MacDon M1170 Self-Propelled (SP) Windrower Operators Manual
MacDon M1170, combined with one of MacDon’s D1XL Series Draper Headers, D1X Series Draper Headers, R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers, or A40DX Auger Headers, provides a package designed to cut and lay a variety of crops into fluffy, uniform windrows. It is known for its Dual Direction® and CrossFlex™ rear suspension.
Advertisement
Advertisement
M1170
Windrower
Operator
’ s Manual
215023 Revision B
Original Instruction
The harvesting specialists.
This manual contains instructions for safety, operation, maintenance, and service for the MacDon M1170 Windrower, featuring Dual Direction
® and CrossFlex
™ rear suspension.
Published September 2019
California Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead components. Wash hands after handling.
© 2019 MacDon Industries, Ltd.
The information in this publication is based on the information available and in effect at the time of printing. MacDon
Industries, Ltd. makes no representation or warranty of any kind, whether expressed or implied, with respect to the information in this publication. MacDon Industries, Ltd. reserves the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Introduction
This instruction manual contains information on the MacDon M1170 Windrower, which when coupled with one of
MacDon
’ s D1XL Series Draper Headers, D1X Series Draper Headers, R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers, or A40DX Auger
Headers, provides a package designed to cut and lay a variety of crops into fluffy, uniform windrows.
Carefully read all the material provided before attempting to use the machine.
If you follow the instructions provided, your windrower will work well for many years.
Use this manual as your first source of information about the machine. If you follow the instructions provided, it will work well for many years. Contact your Dealer if you need assistance, information, or additional copies of this manual.
When setting up the machine or making adjustments, review and follow the recommended machine settings in all relevant
MacDon publications. Failure to do so may compromise the machine function and machine life and may result in a hazardous situation.
MacDon provides warranty for Customers who operate and maintain their equipment as described in this manual. A copy of the MacDon Industries Limited Warranty Policy, which explains this warranty, should have been provided to you by your
Dealer. Damage resulting from any of the following conditions will void the warranty:
•
Accident
•
Misuse
•
Abuse
•
Improper maintenance or neglect
•
Abnormal or extraordinary use of the machine
•
Failure to use the machine, equipment, component, or part in accordance with the manufacturer
’ s instructions
The following conventions are used in this document:
•
The M1170 Windrower is Dual Direction
®
, meaning the windrower can be driven in cab-forward or engine-forward modes. Right and left designations are therefore determined from the operator
’ s position, facing the direction of travel.
This manual uses the terms
“ right cab-forward
”
,
“ left cab-forward
”
,
“ right engine-forward
”
, and
“ left engine-forward
” when referencing specific locations on the machine.
•
Unless otherwise noted, use the standard torque values provided in Chapter
8.1 Torque Specifications, page 401
of this document.
Keep this manual handy for frequent reference and to pass on to new Operators or Owners. A manual storage case is located in the cab.
Call your MacDon Dealer if you need assistance, information, or additional copies of this manual.
NOTE:
Keep your MacDon publications up-to-date. The most current version can be downloaded from our website
( www.macdon.com
) or from our Dealer-only site ( https://portal.macdon.com
) (login required).
This document is available in English only.
215023 i
Revision B
Declaration of Conformity
215023 ii
Revision B
215023 iii
Revision B
Whole Body and Hand-Arm Vibration Levels
The weighted root mean square acceleration, to which the whole body is subjected, ranges from 0.44 to 0.81 m/s 2 as measured on a representative machine during typical operations and analyzed in accordance with ISO 5008.
During the same operations, the weighted root means square hand-arm vibration was less than 2.40 m/s 2 when analyzed in accordance with ISO 5349. These acceleration values depend on the ground roughness, operating speed, and the operator's experience, weight, and driving habits.
Noise Levels
The A-weighted sound pressure levels inside the operator's station ranged from 69.1 to 69.4 dB(A) as measured on several representative machines in accordance with ISO 5131. The sound pressure level depends upon the engine speed and load, field and crop conditions, and the type of platform used.
215023 iv
Revision B
Summary of Changes
At MacDon, we
’ re continuously making improvements. Occasionally these improvements affect product documentation.
The following list provides an account of major changes from the previous version of this document.
Section Summary of Change
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives, page 141
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
5.6.1 Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page
5.6.8 Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
5.10.4 Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant
5.10.6 Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
Installing Drive Wheels, page 371
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Added 12 bolt wheel drive information
Internal Use
Only
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
ECN 58568
215023 v
Revision B
Serial Numbers
If you require MacDon technical assistance, please have the machine
’ s serial numbers recorded and ready before you call.
Record the model number, serial number, and year of manufacture of the windrower and engine on the lines below.
The windrower serial number plate (A) is located on the left side of the main frame near the walking beam.
A
Windrower Model Number: _________________________
Windrower Serial Number: _________________________
Year of Manufacture: ______________________________
The engine serial number plate (A) is located on top of the engine cylinder head cover.
Engine Serial Number: ____________________________
Year of Manufacture: ______________________________
Figure 1: Windrower Serial Number Location
A
Figure 2: Engine Serial Number Location
215023 vi
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
’
215023 vii
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3.11 Lateral Isolation Lockout
3.12.1 AM/FM/CD/USB Radio with Bluetooth
Wireless Technology ............................................................ 63
215023 viii
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
215023 ix
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
215023 x
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adjusting Knife Alarm Pressure
Draper Header ............................................................................ 208
Adjusting Knife Alarm Pressure
Auger Header ............................................................................. 226
215023 xi
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.6.7 Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
10 Bolt ...................................................................................... 273
5.6.8 Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
12 Bolt (Optional) ....................................................................... 274
215023 xii
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.10.4 Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level
12 Bolt (Optional) .............................................................. 304
5.10.5 Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
10 Bolt ....................................................................................... 305
5.10.6 Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
12 Bolt (Optional)......................................................................... 306
215023 xiii
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
215023 xiv
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.2.2 High Performance Lighting
Standard on Deluxe Cab Package........................................................... 380
6.3.2 Double Booster Spring Kit
215023 xv
Revision B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.1.3 O-Ring Boss Hydraulic Fittings
Adjustable .................................................................................... 404
8.1.4 O-Ring Boss Hydraulic Fittings
Non-Adjustable .............................................................................. 406
Index ........................................................................................................................................................ 483
215023 xvi
Revision B
Chapter 1: Safety
1.1
Safety Alert Symbols
This safety alert symbol indicates important safety messages in this manual and on safety signs on the machine.
This symbol means:
•
ATTENTION!
•
BECOME ALERT!
•
YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
Carefully read and follow the safety message accompanying this symbol.
Why is safety important to you?
•
Accidents disable and kill
•
Accidents cost
•
Accidents can be avoided
Figure 1.1: Safety Symbol
215023
1
Revision B
1.2
Signal Words
Three signal words, DANGER , WARNING , and CAUTION , are used to alert you to hazardous situations. Two signal words,
IMPORTANT and NOTE , identify non-safety related information. Signal words are selected using the following guidelines:
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may be used to alert against unsafe practices.
IMPORTANT:
Indicates a situation that, if not avoided, could result in a malfunction or damage to the machine.
NOTE:
Provides additional information or advice.
215023
2
Revision B
1.3
General Safety
CAUTION
The following general farm safety precautions should be part of your operating procedure for all types of machinery.
Protect yourself when assembling, operating, and servicing machinery, wear all protective clothing and personal safety devices that could be necessary for the job at hand. Do NOT take chances. You may need the following:
•
Hard hat
•
Protective footwear with slip-resistant soles
•
Protective glasses or goggles
•
Heavy gloves
•
Wet weather gear
•
Respirator or filter mask
•
Be aware that exposure to loud noises can cause hearing impairment or loss. Wear suitable hearing protection devices such as earmuffs or earplugs to help protect against loud noises.
Figure 1.2: Safety Equipment
•
Provide a first aid kit in case of emergencies.
•
Keep a properly maintained fire extinguisher on the machine.
Be familiar with its proper use.
•
Keep young children away from machinery at all times.
•
Be aware that accidents often happen when the Operator is tired or in a hurry. Take time to consider safest way.
NEVER ignore warning signs of fatigue.
Figure 1.3: Safety Equipment
Figure 1.4: Safety Equipment
215023
3
Revision B
•
Wear close-fitting clothing and cover long hair.
NEVER wear dangling items such as scarves or bracelets.
•
Keep all shields in place.
NEVER alter or remove safety equipment. Make sure driveline guards can rotate independently of shaft and can telescope freely.
•
Use only service and repair parts made or approved by equipment manufacturer. Substituted parts may not meet strength, design, or safety requirements.
•
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from moving parts.
NEVER attempt to clear obstructions or objects from a machine while the engine is running.
•
Do NOT modify the machine. Unauthorized modifications may impair machine function and/or safety. It may also shorten the machine
’ s life.
•
To avoid injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, ALWAYS stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
Figure 1.5: Safety around Equipment
Figure 1.6: Safety around Equipment
•
Keep service area clean and dry. Wet and/or oily floors are slippery. Wet spots can be dangerous when working with electrical equipment. Be sure all electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded.
•
Keep work area well lit.
•
Keep machinery clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine are fire hazards. Do NOT allow oil or grease to accumulate on service platforms, ladders, or controls. Clean machines before storage.
•
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials may be toxic and/or flammable.
•
When storing machinery, cover sharp or extending components to prevent injury from accidental contact.
Figure 1.7: Safety around Equipment
215023
4
Revision B
1.4
Maintenance Safety
To ensure your safety while maintaining machine:
•
Review the operator
’ s manual and all safety items before operation and/or maintenance of the machine.
•
Place all controls in Neutral, stop the engine, set the park brake, remove the ignition key, and wait for all moving parts to stop before servicing, adjusting, and/or repairing.
•
Follow good shop practices:
–
Keep service areas clean and dry
–
Be sure electrical outlets and tools are properly grounded
–
Keep work area well lit
Figure 1.8: Safety around Equipment
•
Relieve pressure from hydraulic circuits before servicing and/or disconnecting the machine.
•
Make sure all components are tight and that steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to hydraulic systems.
•
Keep hands, feet, clothing, and hair away from all moving and/or rotating parts.
•
Clear the area of bystanders, especially children, when carrying out any maintenance, repairs, or adjustments.
•
Install transport lock or place safety stands under the frame before working under the machine.
•
If more than one person is servicing the machine at the same time, be aware that rotating a driveline or other mechanically-driven component by hand (for example, accessing a lubricant fitting) will cause drive components in other areas (belts, pulleys, and knives) to move. Stay clear of driven components at all times.
•
Wear protective gear when working on the machine.
•
Wear heavy gloves when working on knife components.
Figure 1.9: Equipment NOT Safe for Children
215023
5
Figure 1.10: Safety Equipment
Revision B
1.5
Hydraulic Safety
•
Always place all hydraulic controls in Neutral before leaving the operator
’ s seat.
•
Make sure that all components in the hydraulic system are kept clean and in good condition.
•
Replace any worn, cut, abraded, flattened, or crimped hoses and steel lines.
•
Do NOT attempt any makeshift repairs to hydraulic lines, fittings, or hoses by using tapes, clamps, cements, or welding.
The hydraulic system operates under extremely highpressure. Makeshift repairs will fail suddenly and create hazardous and unsafe conditions.
•
Wear proper hand and eye protection when searching for high-pressure hydraulic leaks. Use a piece of cardboard as a backstop instead of hands to isolate and identify a leak.
•
If injured by a concentrated high-pressure stream of hydraulic fluid, seek medical attention immediately. Serious infection or toxic reaction can develop from hydraulic fluid piercing the skin.
Figure 1.11: Testing for Hydraulic Leaks
•
Make sure all components are tight and steel lines, hoses, and couplings are in good condition before applying pressure to a hydraulic system.
Figure 1.12: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
215023
6
Figure 1.13: Safety around Equipment
Revision B
1.6
Tire Safety
Service tires safely.
WARNING
•
A tire can explode during inflation, which could cause serious injury or death.
•
Follow proper procedures when mounting a tire on a wheel or rim. Failure to do so can produce an explosion that may result in serious injury or death.
Figure 1.14: Overinflated Tire
WARNING
•
Do NOT remove, install, or repair a tire on a rim unless you have proper equipment and experience to perform job.
Take the tire and rim to a qualified tire repair shop.
•
Make sure the tire is correctly seated before inflating to operating pressure. If the tire is not correctly positioned on the rim or is overinflated, the tire bead can loosen on one side causing air to escape at high speed and with great force. An air leak of this nature can thrust the tire in any direction, endangering anyone in area.
•
Do NOT stand over tire when inflating. Use a clip-on chuck and extension hose.
•
Do NOT exceed maximum inflation pressure indicated on tire label.
Figure 1.15: Safely Inflating Tire
•
Never use force on an inflated or partially inflated tire.
•
Make sure all air is removed from the tire before removing the tire from the rim.
•
Never weld a wheel rim.
•
Replace tires that have defects and replace wheel rims that are cracked, worn, or severely rusted.
215023
7
Revision B
1.7
Battery Safety
WARNING
•
Keep all sparks and flames away from batteries; an explosive gas is given off by electrolyte.
•
Ventilate when charging in enclosed space.
Figure 1.16: Safety around Batteries
WARNING
•
Wear safety glasses when working near batteries.
•
To avoid an electrolyte loss, do NOT tip batteries more than 45°.
•
Battery electrolyte causes severe burns. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing.
•
Electrolyte splashed into eyes is extremely dangerous.
Should this occur, force eye open, and flood with cool, clean water for 5 minutes. Call a doctor immediately.
•
If electrolyte is spilled or splashed on clothing or body, neutralize it immediately with a solution of baking soda and water, then rinse with clear water.
Figure 1.17: Safety around Batteries
WARNING
•
To avoid injury from a spark or short circuit, disconnect the battery ground cable before servicing any part of the electrical system.
•
Do NOT operate the engine with the alternator or battery disconnected. With battery cables disconnected and the engine running, a high voltage can be built up if terminals touch frame. Anyone touching the frame under these conditions would be severely shocked.
•
When working around storage batteries, remember that all of the exposed metal parts are live. Never lay a metal object across the terminals because a spark or short circuit will result.
•
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Figure 1.18: Safety around Batteries
215023
8
Revision B
1.8
Welding Precaution
IMPORTANT:
It is very important that correct procedures be followed when welding anything connected to the windrower. If procedures are not followed, it could result in severe damage to sensitive, expensive electronics. Even if complete failure of a module doesn
’ t happen immediately, it is impossible to know what effect high current could have with regard to future malfunctions or shorter lifespan.
Due to the number of connectors, components to be welded should be removed from the windrower whenever possible rather than welded in place. When work needs to be completed on a header, disconnect the header completely from the windrower before welding. These same guidelines apply to plasma cutting, or any other high current electrical operation performed on the machine.
The following items need to be disconnected:
•
Negative battery terminals (A) (two connections)
IMPORTANT:
Always disconnect the battery terminals first, and reconnect them last.
A
Figure 1.19: Negative Terminals
•
Master controller (A)
Four connectors: P231, P232, P233, and P234
Location: Behind cab, near header lift/fan manifold
To disconnect the connectors, press the two outer tabs, and pull the connector away from master controller.
IMPORTANT:
When reconnecting these connectors, double-check that the connectors are fully seated into the master controller, and that the two locking tabs on each end of all four connectors have popped outward. If the tabs are not popped outward, the connector is not fully seated.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT power up or operate the windrower until these connectors are locked into place.
A
Figure 1.20: Master Controller
215023
9
Revision B
•
Firewall extension module (A)
Two connectors: P235 and P236
Location: Behind cab, near header lift/fan manifold.
To disconnect, use a small 3
–
6 mm (1/8
–
1/4 in.) blade screwdriver to insert into the connector
’ s locking tab. Gently pry upward (no more than 6 mm [1/4 in.]) to unlock the connector tab, and then pull the connector away from the module.
A
•
Chassis extension module (A)
Two connectors: P247 and P248
Location: Under cab, inside left frame rail
To disconnect, use a small 3
–
6 mm (1/8
–
1/4 in.) blade screwdriver to insert into the connector
’ s locking tab. Gently pry upward (no more than 6 mm [1/4 in.]) to unlock the connector tab, and then pull the connector away from the module.
Figure 1.21: Firewall Extension Module
A
Figure 1.22: Chassis Extension Module
•
Engine Control Module (ECM)
Two connectors for Cummins: P100 (A) and J1 Cummins
Proprietary ECM Connector (B)
Location: On engine
To disconnect, pull the rubber boot off the cover, unlock the latch, and undo the main over-center latch. Remove strain relief bolts (C) so the connectors can be pulled away from the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
Be sure to disconnect both connectors. Note connector locations.
IMPORTANT:
Be sure to reconnect connectors in the proper locations. Do
NOT cross connect.
A
Figure 1.23: Engine Control Module
B
C
C
215023
10
Revision B
NOTE:
To disconnect the remaining circular Deutsch connectors, rotate the outer collar counterclockwise.
•
Cab connectors (A)
Two round connectors: C1 and C2
Location: Under cab
A
•
Roof connectors (A)
Four connectors: C10, C12, C13, and C14
Location: Under cab at base of left cab post
Figure 1.24: Cab Connectors
A
•
Chassis relay module (A)
Three connectors: P240, P241, and P242
Location: Outside left frame rail near batteries
Figure 1.25: Roof Connectors
A
Figure 1.26: Chassis Relay Module
215023
11
Revision B
•
Engine harness (A)
Two round connectors: C30 and C31
Location: Inside left frame rail, at rear of windrower
A
Figure 1.27: Engine Harness
•
Air conditioning (A/C) box connectors (A)
Two connectors: C15 and C16
Location: Rear of A/C box
A
•
Wheel motor connectors (A)
Two round connectors: C25 and C26
Location: Under center of frame, just behind front cross member
IMPORTANT:
To connect circular Deutsch connectors without bending the pins, align the plug with the receptacle before attempting to connect.
Figure 1.28: A/C Box Connectors
A
Figure 1.29: Wheel Motor Connectors
To align the connectors:
1.
Observe the channel cuts and mating channel protrusions on the inner part of the circular walls of the connectors.
2.
Face the mating connectors towards each other, and rotate connectors so that channels are aligned.
3.
Press connectors together while turning the outer connector clockwise until collar locks.
215023
12
Revision B
1.9
Engine Safety
WARNING
Do NOT use aerosol starting aids such as ether. Such use could result in an explosion and personal injury.
CAUTION
•
On initial start-up of a new, serviced, or repaired engine, always be ready to stop the engine to prevent an overspeed. Do this by shutting off the air and/or fuel supply to the engine.
•
Do NOT bypass or disable automatic shutoff circuits. The circuits help prevent personal injury, and prevent engine damage. Contact your Dealer for repairs and adjustments.
•
Inspect the engine for potential hazards.
•
Before starting the engine, ensure no one is on, underneath, or close to the engine. Ensure that people clear the area.
•
All protective guards and covers must be installed if the engine must be started to perform service procedures.
•
To help prevent an accident, work around rotating parts carefully.
•
If a warning tag is attached to the engine start switch or controls, do NOT start engine or move controls. Consult whoever attached the warning tag before starting the engine.
•
Start the engine from the operator
’ s station. Follow the procedure in the Starting Engine section of the operator
’ s manual. Following the correct procedure will help prevent major damage to engine components and prevent personal injury.
•
To ensure that the jacket water heater (if equipped) and/or lubricant oil heater (if equipped) is working correctly, check the water temperature gauge and/or oil temperature gauge during heater operation.
•
Engine exhaust contains products of combustion, which can be harmful to your health. Always start and operate the engine in a well-ventilated area. If the engine is started in an enclosed area, vent exhaust to the outside.
•
Engine exhaust gases become very hot during operation and can burn people and common materials. Stay clear of the rear of machine and avoid exhaust gases when engine is running.
NOTE:
If the engine will be operated in very cold conditions, then an additional cold-starting aid may be required.
1.9.1
High-Pressure Rail
WARNING
•
Contact with high-pressure fuel may cause fluid penetration and burn hazards. High-pressure fuel spray may cause a fire hazard. Failure to follow these instructions may cause personal injury or death.
•
Before disconnecting fuel lines or any other components under high-pressure between the fuel pump and highpressure common rail fuel system, confirm that the fuel pressure is relieved.
1.9.2
Engine Electronics
WARNING
Tampering with electronic system installation or original equipment manufacturer (OEM) wiring installation is dangerous and could result in personal injury or death and/or engine damage.
215023
13
Revision B
WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard. The electronic unit injectors use DC voltage. The engine control module (ECM) sends this voltage to the electronic unit injectors. Do NOT come in contact with the harness connector for the electronic unit injectors while engine is operating. Failure to follow this instruction could result in personal injury or death.
This engine has a comprehensive, programmable engine monitoring system. The ECM has the ability to monitor engine operating conditions. If conditions exceed the allowable range, the ECM will initiate immediate action.
The engine monitoring system can initiate the following actions:
•
Warning
•
Derate
•
Shut down
Abnormalities in the following monitored conditions can limit engine speed and/or engine power:
•
Engine coolant temperature
•
Engine oil pressure
•
Engine speed
•
Intake manifold air temperature
•
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) system performance
•
Aftertreatment system performance
215023
14
Revision B
1.10
Safety Signs
•
Keep safety signs clean and legible at all times.
•
Replace safety signs that are missing or illegible.
•
If the original part on which a safety sign was installed is replaced, be sure the repair part displays the current safety sign.
•
Replacement safety signs are available from your MacDon
Dealer Parts Department.
Figure 1.30: Operator
’ s Manual Decal
1.10.1
Installing Safety Decals
1.
Clean and dry the installation area.
2.
Decide exactly where you are going to place the decal.
3.
Remove the smaller portion of the split backing paper.
4.
Place the decal in position and slowly peel back the remaining paper, smoothing the decal as it is applied.
5.
Prick small air pockets with a pin and smooth out.
215023
15
Revision B
1.11
Safety Sign Locations
Figure 1.31: Safety Sign Locations
E
C
U
B
E
K
J
J
H
P
L
M
R
N
Q
Q
R
E
T
S
F
A
G
B
E
D
C
B
215023
16
Revision B
Ref
A
B
C
D
E
F
K
L
M
G
H
J
T
U
R
S
N
P
Q
Table 1.1 Safety Sign Locations
MD Part
Number
166234
166425
306181
306180
166454
166457
166463
166824
166832
166829
166834
166835
166836
166837
166838
166839
166843
167502
306180
Safety Sign Description
Decal
–
Warning (training seat and seat belts)
Decal
–
Danger
Decal
–
Header lock, 2 panel (both sides)
Decal
–
Header lock, 2 panel (RH)
Decal
–
Read manual
Decal
–
Warning, read manual steering service
Decal
–
Transport
Decal
–
Fill rate
Decal
–
High pressure fluid
Decal
–
Caution, balance
Decal
–
Warning, starter jump
Decal
–
Warning, battery explode
Decal
–
Warning, battery burn
Decal
–
Danger, fan
Decal
–
Warning, hot surface
Decal
–
Warning, belt
Decal
–
Steering control
Decal
–
Warning, pinch hazard
Decal
–
Header lock, 2 panel (LH)
NOTE:
For a more detailed illustration and description of safety signs, refer to
1.12 Understanding Safety Signs, page 18
.
215023
17
Revision B
1.12
Understanding Safety Signs
MD #113482
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
DANGER
To prevent injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
•
Read the operator
’ s manual and follow all safety instructions. If you do not have a manual, obtain one from your Dealer.
•
Do NOT allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
•
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
•
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
•
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
•
Keep riders off the machine.
•
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
•
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operator
’ s position.
•
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
•
Engage safety locks to prevent lowering of raised unit before servicing in the raised position.
•
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
MD #166234
Run-over hazard
DANGER
•
The training seat is provided for an experienced Operator of the machine when a new Operator is being trained.
•
The training seat is NOT intended as a passenger seat or for use by children.
•
Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a trainer.
•
Keep all other riders off the machine.
Figure 1.32: MD #113482
Figure 1.33: MD #166234
215023
18
Revision B
MD #166425
Run-over hazard
DANGER
To prevent machine runaway:
•
Stop engine and remove key from ignition before performing maintenance or service on steering linkage or neutral interlock system,
•
Read the windrower and header manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Figure 1.34: MD #166425
MD #166454
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
DANGER
To prevent injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
•
Read the operator
’ s manual and follow all safety instructions.
•
Do NOT allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
•
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
•
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
•
Make certain everyone is clear of machine before starting engine and during operation.
•
Keep riders off the machine.
•
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
•
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral, and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operator
’ s position.
•
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
•
Engage safety locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
•
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Figure 1.35: MD #166454
215023
19
Revision B
MD #166457
General hazard pertaining to machine operation and servicing
DANGER
To prevent injury or death from improper or unsafe machine operation:
•
Read the operator
’ s manual and follow all safety instructions.
•
Do NOT allow untrained persons to operate the machine.
•
Review safety instructions with all Operators every year.
•
Ensure that all safety signs are installed and legible.
•
Make certain everyone is clear of the machine before starting the engine and during operation.
•
Keep riders off the machine.
•
Keep all shields in place and stay clear of moving parts.
•
Disengage header drive, put transmission in Neutral and wait for all movement to stop before leaving operator
’ s position.
•
Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, or unplugging machine.
•
Engage safety locks to prevent lowering of header or reel before servicing in the raised position.
•
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights when operating on roadways unless prohibited by law.
Run-over hazard
DANGER
•
Machine will move if steering wheel is turned while engine is running.
•
Steering response is opposite to what is normally expected when backing up. Turn bottom of steering wheel in direction you want to go.
•
Always move ground speed lever to slow end of range before shifting high-low speed control.
•
To prevent machine runaway: stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before servicing, adjusting, lubricating, cleaning, unplugging the machine, or before performing maintenance or service on steering linkage or neutral interlock system.
•
Read the windrower and header manuals for inspection and maintenance instructions.
Figure 1.36: MD #166457
215023
20
Revision B
MD #166463
Collision hazard
DANGER
To prevent injury or death form collision between windrower and other vehicles when driving windrower on public roadways:
•
Obey all highway traffic regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles front and rear of windrower if required by law.
•
Use slow moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
•
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install MacDon approved weight box.
For instructions, refer to the operator
’ s manual for safe procedure to tow header.
MD #166824
Hot fluid spray hazard and fluid fill rate information
CAUTION
To prevent injury:
•
Do NOT remove fluid fill cap when engine is hot.
•
Allow engine to cool down before opening fluid fill cap.
•
Fluid is under pressure and may be hot.
•
Do NOT exceed 11 L/min (3 gpm)
Figure 1.37: MD #166463
Figure 1.38: MD #166824
1014917
215023
21
Revision B
MD #166829
Loss of control hazard
DANGER
To prevent serious injury or death from loss of control:
•
It is essential that the machine be equipped such that weights are within the specified limits.
•
Weight on the tail wheels should be greater than 1179 kg
(2600 lb.) with the windrower positioned in the cab-forward direction.
•
Ensure recommended rear ballast kits are installed for proper machine balance. When operating in hilly conditions, additional rear ballast kits may be required.
MD #166832
High-pressure oil hazard
WARNING
To prevent serious injury, gangrene, or death:
•
Do NOT go near leaks.
•
Do NOT use finger or skin to check for leaks.
•
Lower load or relieve hydraulic pressure before loosening fittings.
•
High-pressure oil can easily puncture skin, and can cause serious injury, gangrene, or death.
•
If injured, seek emergency medical help. Immediate surgery is required to remove oil.
MD #166834
Run-over hazard
DANGER
To prevent machine runaway:
•
Starting in gear can kill.
•
Do NOT start engine by shorting across starter or starter relay terminals. Machine will start with drive engaged and move if starting circuitry is bypassed.
•
Start engine only from operator
’ s seat. Do NOT try to start engine with someone under or near machine.
Figure 1.39: MD #166829
Figure 1.40: MD #166832
Figure 1.41: MD #166834
1015176
215023
22
Revision B
MD #166835
Battery explosion hazard
WARNING
To prevent serious bodily injury caused by explosive battery gases:
•
Keep sparks and flames away from the battery and do NOT connect boosting or charging cables incorrectly.
•
Refer to operator
’ s manual for battery boosting and charging procedures.
Figure 1.42: MD #166835
MD #166836
Battery acid hazard
WARNING
To prevent injury from corrosive and poisonous battery acid:
•
Wear protective clothing and personal protective devices when handling battery acid.
•
Acid can severely burn your body and clothing.
Figure 1.43: MD #166836
215023
23
Revision B
MD #166837
Rotating fan hazard
WARNING
To prevent injury:
•
Do NOT operate engine with engine hood open.
•
Stop the engine and remove the key before opening engine hood.
MD #166838
Hot surface hazard
CAUTION
To prevent injury:
•
Keep a safe distance from hot surface.
Figure 1.44: MD #166837
Figure 1.45: MD #166838
215023
24
Revision B
MD #166839
Hand and arm entanglement hazard
WARNING
To prevent injury:
•
Do NOT operate without shields in place.
•
Stop engine and remove key before opening shield.
Figure 1.46: MD #166839
MD #166843
Loss of control hazard
DANGER
To prevent serious injury or death from loss of control:
•
Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
•
Anticipate turns by slowing down well in advance.
•
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
When travelling up steep slopes:
•
Reduce speed and lower header.
•
Move ground speed lever to slow end of range.
•
Shift high-low speed control to low range.
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
•
Operate in low-speed range.
•
Avoid slopes.
•
Do NOT tow a header.
•
If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever to neutral.
Figure 1.47: MD #166843
1014916
215023
25
Revision B
MD #167502
Pinch point hazard
CAUTION
To prevent injury:
•
Do NOT reach into pinch area
MD #306179/306181
Header crushing hazard
DANGER
To prevent injury or death from fall of raised header:
•
Fully raise header, stop engine, remove key, and engage safety props before going under header.
Figure 1.48: MD #167502
Figure 1.49: MD #306179/306181
215023
26
Revision B
MD #306180/306181
Header crushing hazard
DANGER
To prevent injury or death from fall of raised header:
•
Fully raise header, stop engine, remove key, and engage safety props before going under header.
Figure 1.50: MD #306180/306181
215023
27
Revision B
Chapter 2: Product Overview
2.1
Definitions
The following terms and acronyms may be used in this manual:
Term
A Series header
API
ASTM
Bolt
Cab-forward
Center-link
CGVW
D1X Series Header
D1XL Series Header
DDD
DEF
DEF Supply Module
DM
DK
DKD
DOC
DRT
DWA
ECM
EEC
Engine-forward
FFFT
Finger tight
GSL
GSS
GVW
Hard joint
Header
Hex key
Definition
MacDon A40D, A40DX, and Grass Seed auger headers
American Petroleum Institute
American Society of Testing and Materials
A headed and externally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a nut
Windrower operation with Operator and cab facing in direction of travel
A hydraulic cylinder link between header and machine used to change header angle
Combined gross vehicle weight
MacDon D115X, D120X, and D125X rigid draper headers for M1 Series Windrowers
MacDon D130XL, D135XL, D140XL, and D145XL rigid draper headers for M1 Series
Windrowers
Double-draper drive
Diesel exhaust fluid; also called AdBlue in Europe, and AUS 32 in Australia
Pump that supplies diesel exhaust fluid through system
Dosing module
Double knife
Double-knife drive
Diesel oxidation catalyst
Aftertreatment decomposition tube
Double Windrow Attachment
Engine control module
Eco engine control
Windrower operation with Operator and engine facing in direction of travel
Flats from finger tight
Finger tight is a reference position where sealing surfaces or components are making contact with each other, and fitting has been tightened to a point where fitting is no longer loose
Ground speed lever
Grass Seed
Gross vehicle weight
A joint made with use of a fastener where joining materials are highly incompressible
A machine that cuts and lays crop into a windrow and is attached to a windrower
A tool of hexagonal cross-section used to drive bolts and screws that have a hexagonal socket in head (internal-wrenching hexagon drive); also known as an Allen key and various other synonyms
215023
29
Revision B
Term
HDS hp
HPT display
JIC
Knife
MDS
M1 Series n/a
NPT
Nut
ORB
Screw
SDD
SK
SKD
Soft joint spm
Tension
TFFT
Torque
ORFS
PARK
R1 SP Series
RoHS (Reduction of
Hazardous Substances) rpm
SAE
SCR
Torque angle
Torque-tension
Definition
Hydraulic deck shift
Horsepower
Harvest Performance Tracker display module on an M1 Series Windrower
Joint Industrial Council: A standards body that developed standard sizing and shape for original 37° flared fitting
A cutting device which uses a reciprocating cutter (also called a sickle)
Mechanical deck shift
MacDon M1170 and M1240 Windrowers
Not applicable
National Pipe Thread: A style of fitting used for low-pressure port openings. Threads on
NPT fittings are uniquely tapered for an interference fit
An internally threaded fastener that is designed to be paired with a bolt
O-ring boss: A style of fitting commonly used in port openings on manifolds, pumps, and motors
O-ring face seal: A style of fitting commonly used for connecting hoses and tubes. This style of fitting is also commonly called ORS, which stands for O-ring seal
The slot opposite the NEUTRAL position on operator
’ s console of M1 Series windrowers
MacDon R113 and R116 Rotary Disc Headers for windrowers
A directive by the European Union to restrict use of certain hazardous substances (such as hexavalent chromium used in some yellow zinc platings)
Revolutions per minute
Society of Automotive Engineers
Selective catalytic reduction
A headed and externally threaded fastener that threads into preformed threads or forms its own thread into a mating part
Single-draper drive
Single knife
Single-knife drive
A joint made with use of a fastener where joining materials are compressible or experience relaxation over a period of time
Strokes per minute
Axial load placed on a bolt or screw, usually measured in Newtons (N) or pounds (lb.)
Turns from finger tight
The product of a force X lever arm length, usually measured in Newton-meters (Nm) or foot-pounds (lbf
∙ ft)
A tightening procedure where fitting is assembled to a precondition (finger tight) and then nut is turned farther a number of degrees to achieve its final position
The relationship between assembly torque applied to a piece of hardware and axial load it induces in bolt or screw
215023
30
Revision B
Term
ULSD
Washer
Windrower
WOT
Definition
Ultra-low sulphur diesel
A thin cylinder with a hole or slot located in the center that is to be used as a spacer, load distribution element, or locking mechanism
Power unit for a header
Wide open throttle
215023
31
Revision B
2.2
Specifications
Specifications and design are subject to change without notice or obligation to revise previously sold units.
Table 2.1 M1170 Specifications
Engine
Type
Displacement
Power
Maximum rpm (no load)
Idle rpm
Electrical System
Rated
Cummins QSB-4.5L CM2350, 4 cylinder tier 4 final, turbo, diesel
(B20 bio-diesel approved)
4.5 L (275 cu.in.)
129 kW (173 hp) @ 2400 rpm
2500
1000
Battery (2)
Minimum CCA per battery (cold cranking amps)
Alternator
Egress lighting
Starter
Lights
Traction Drive
Type
Speed
Transmission
Final drive
Base cab
High performance lighting package
Field
Reverse
Transport
Type
Displacement
Flow
Type
Ratio
System Capacities
Fuel tank
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank capacity
Coolant
Hydraulic reservoir
12 Volt, maximum dimension
–
334 x 188 x 232 mm
(13 x 6.81 x 9.43 in.)
Group rating 29H or 31A
Heavy duty / off road / vibration resistant
750
200 amp
Standard
Wet type
12 halogen: 4 road, 8 work (2 also used for egress)
12 lights: 4 halogen road, 8 LED work
(2 LED work lights also used for egress)
Hydrostatic, infinitely variable motors via electric shift
0
–
29 km/h (18 mph)
9.6 km/h (6 mph)
Engine-forward 0
–
43 km/h (27 mph)
0
–
34.6 km/h (21.5 mph) (High torque drive wheel)
2 piston pumps
–
1 per drive wheel
44 cc (2.65 cu. in.)
167 L/min (40 U.S. gpm)
Planetary gearbox
Standard: 27.8 : 1, High Torque: 36.82 : 1
518 L (137 U.S. gallons)
28 L (7.5 U.S. gallons)
30 L (7.9 U.S. gallons)
60 L (15.8 U.S. gallons)
215023
32
Revision B
Header Drive
Knife/Disc
Reel
Draper
Lift/Fan Drive
Pump
Max pressure
Flow
Header Lift/Tilt
Type
Max lift capacity
Header Float
Adjustment
Automatic
Options
Cab
Suspension
Dimensions
Seat
Windshield wiper
Heater
Air conditioning
Electrical outlets
Mirrors
Radio
215023
Pump
Max pressure
Flow
Pump
Max pressure
Flow
Pump
Max pressure
Flow
Width
Depth
Height
Operator
Training
Front
Rear
12 V DC
USB
Piston, 53 cc (3.23 cu. in.)
37,921 kPa (5500 psi)
151.4 L/min (40 gpm)
Gear, 25.2 cc (1.54 cu. in.)
23,994 kPa (3480 psi)
75.7 L/min (20 gpm)
Gear, 19.3 cc (1.18 cu. in.)
23,994 kPa (3480 psi)
53 L/min (14 gpm)
Piston, 60 cc (3.66 cu. in.)
22,063 kPa (3200 psi)
0
–
170.3 L/min (45 gpm)
Hydraulic double acting cylinders
3810 kg (8400 lb.)
Fully in cab adjustable
Memory for 3 float settings (deck shift positions on draper)
External booster spring (1 or 2 per side)
4 point spring/shock
1767 mm (69.6 in.)
1735 mm (68.3 in.)
1690 mm (66.5 in.)
Cloth, adjustable air ride suspension, seat belt
Cloth, folding, cab mounted, seat belt
990 mm (39 in.) blade, washer equipped
560 mm (22 in.) frameless blade, washer equipped
11.10 kW (37,900 Btu/hr)
8.73 kW (29,800 Btu/hr)
6
2
Two outside (field use), one inside (engine-forward transport)
AM/FM/CD/USB/Bluetooth radio, antenna, microphone, and two factory-installed speakers
33
Revision B
Sun Shades
Deluxe Cab Package
Front and rear
Seat
Radio
Operator
Training
Leather, adjustable air ride suspension, seat belt, heated/cooled, lateral isolation, adjustable front cushion
Leather, folding, cab mounted, seat belt
AM/FM/CD/USB/Bluetooth radio, antenna, microphone, and two factory-installed speakers
Two power adjustable outside (field use)
Front and rear
Mirrors
Sun shades
System Monitoring
Display
Speeds
Pressures
Header position
Engine parameters
Tire Options
Drive
Caster
Frame and Structure
Dimensions
Weight 1
Header compatibility
Platform
Reel
Bar
Turf
Suspended
Mud
Frame to ground (crop clearance)
Walking beam max width
Base
Max GVW
Max CGVW
Draper
Rotary
Auger
7 in. LCD
Ground (mph or km/h), engine (rpm), knife (spm), reel (rpm or mph/km/h), conveyor (rpm or mph/km/h), cooling fan (rpm)
Knife or disc (psi or MPa), reel (psi or MPa), conveyor (psi or MPa), supercharge (psi or MPa)
Height, angle, float
Height, fore-aft
Fuel consumption, load
600/65R28
580/70R26
16.5 L-16.1 with independent suspension
11x16 with single sided caster (unsuspended)
Refer to
2.3 Windrower Dimensions, page 36
1160 mm (45.7 in.)
3856 mm (151.8 in.) with 3422 mm (134.7 in.) crop clearance
5942 kg (13,100 lb) 2
10,660 kg (23,500 lb.)
11,794 kg (26,000 lb.)
D1XL Series
D1X Series
R1 Series
A40DX
NOTE:
Specifications and design are subject to change without notice or obligation to revise previously sold units.
1.
Weights do not include options.
2.
Weight with 600/65R28 bar tires, no fuel/DEF. Hydraulic oil and coolant included in weight.
215023
34
Revision B
Figure 2.1: Pump Orientation
6
7
1 - Reel/Auger Drive Pump
3 - Charge Pressure Pump for Pumps 4, 5, 6, and 7
5 - Fan Drive and Lift Functions (Open Loop System)
7 - Traction Drive Tandem Pump (Right Wheel)
3
2
1
5
4
2 - Draper Drive or Double Windrow (DWA) Drive Option
3
4 - Knife/Disc Drive (Closed Loop System)
6 - Traction Drive Tandem Pump (Left Wheel)
3.
DWA is used only with auger or disc header only.
215023
35
Revision B
2.3
Windrower Dimensions
Figure 2.2: Windrower Dimensions
G
A
B
C
H
J
K
D
E
F
A - 3304 mm (130 3/32 in.)
D - 4070 mm (160 1/4 in.)
G - 3449 mm (135 13/16 in.)
K - 4415 mm (173 13/16 in.)
215023
B - 4290 mm (168 7/8 in.)
E - 1160 mm (45 11/16 in.)
H - 3422 mm (134 3/4 in.)
36
C - 5752 mm (226 7/16 in.)
F - 3480 mm (137 1/32 in.)
J - 3856 mm (151 13/16 in.) (Max)
Revision B
2.4
Component Location
Figure 2.3: Front Cab-Forward View
F
E
D
G
H
J
F
E
K
C
B
M
N
A
L
A - Header Lift Leg
D - Windshield Wiper
G - Field/Road Lights
4
K - Door
N - Horn
B - Header Float Springs
E - Turn Signal / Hazard Lights
H - Handholds
L - Maintenance Platform
C - Operator
’ s Station
F - Tail lights Engine-Forward
J - Mirror
M - Center-Link
4.
Standard cabs have halogen lights; deluxe cabs have LED lights.
215023
37
Revision B
Figure 2.4: Rear Cab-Forward View
P
J
G
K
F
F
N
E
C
D
Q
B
L
M
H
A
A - Caster Wheel
D - Engine Compartment Hood
G - Turn Signal / Hazard Lights
K - Door
N - Precleaner
B - Walking Beam
E - Windshield Wiper
H - Field/Road Lights
L - Drive Wheel
P - Beacons
C - Taillights
–
Cab-Forward
F - Field Lights
5
J - Mirror
M - Maintenance Platform
Q - Anti-Shimmy Dampeners
5.
Standard cabs have halogen lights; deluxe cabs have LED lights.
215023
38
Revision B
Chapter 3: Operator
’ s Station
The operator
’ s station is designed for operating the windrower in cab-forward mode (working mode) or in engine-forward mode (transport mode). The operator
’ s station, which includes the seat, console, and steering column, pivots 180 degrees so that the Operator maintains access to the windrower controls and gauges regardless of the direction of travel.
3.1
Console
The console contains controls to operate the windrower, as well as amenities for the Operator. The console position is adjustable to suit each particular Operator.
B
A
C
D
E
Figure 3.1: Console
A - Ignition B - Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) Display
C - Header Controls
E - Throttle
D - Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
1.
Adjust fore-aft and height as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) and slide console fore or aft to the desired position.
b.
Release lever to lock console.
A
Figure 3.2: Console Fore-Aft/Height
215023
39
Revision B
2.
Adjust only fore-aft as follows: a.
Loosen nuts (A) under console.
b.
Move console as required.
c.
Tighten nuts (A).
A
Figure 3.3: Console Fore-Aft
215023
40
Revision B
3.2
Operator Presence System
The Operator Presence System is a safety feature designed to deactivate selected systems or sound an alarm when the
Operator is not seated at the operator
’ s station.
These systems include:
•
Header drive; refer to
•
Engine and transmission; refer to
3.2.2 Engine and Transmission, page 41
3.2.1
Header Drive
•
Requires the Operator to be in the seat in order to engage the header drive.
•
Power is maintained to the header drive for 5 seconds after the Operator leaves the seat, and then the header shuts down.
•
After the header has shut down automatically, the HEADER ENGAGE switch must be moved to the OFF position and back to the ON position to restart the header.
3.2.2
Engine and Transmission
•
The engine will NOT start when the HEADER ENGAGE switch is engaged.
•
The engine will shut down when the windrower is moving at 8 km/h (5 mph) or less, and the Operator leaves the seat, and the transmission is not locked in NEUTRAL. The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) will display NO OPERATOR
DETECTED and ENGINE SHUT DOWN 5...4...3...2...1...0 accompanied by a steady tone. At 0, the engine shuts down.
•
If the windrower is moving faster than 8 km/h (5 mph), and the Operator leaves the seat, after 2 seconds an alarm will sound and the HPT will display NO OPERATOR.
•
When the seat is in between cab-forward and engine-forward positions, the engine will shut down if the transmission is not locked in the NEUTRAL position. The HPT will display LOCK SEAT BASE until the seat base is locked into position.
215023
41
Revision B
3.3
Operator
’ s Seat Adjustments
The operator
’ s seat has several adjustments. Refer to the following sections for a description and the location of each adjustment. Some seat features are only available with the deluxe cab option.
3.3.1
Armrest
Raise armrest for easier access to seat.
Lower armrest after seat belt is buckled.
B
A
3.3.2
Armrest Angle
Use controls to adjust angle of armrest.
•
Rotate knob (A) clockwise to increase armrest angle.
•
Rotate knob (A) counterclockwise to decrease armrest angle.
Figure 3.4: Operator
’ s Seat Armrest
A - Standard Seat B - Deluxe Seat
215023
42
A
Figure 3.5: Operator
’ s Seat Armrest Angle Controls
Revision B
3.3.3
Suspension and Height
Use controls to adjust the height and stiffness of the seat suspension.
•
Press upper switch (A) to increase seat stiffness and height.
•
Press lower switch (A) to decrease seat stiffness and height.
3.3.4
Fore-Aft Slide Control
Use controls to adjust the seat
’ s fore-aft position.
1.
Pull lever (A) up to release.
2.
Move seat forward or rearward.
3.
Release lever (A).
A
Figure 3.6: Operator
’ s Seat Suspension and Height
Controls
215023
43
A
Figure 3.7: Operator
’ s Seat Fore-Aft Position Controls
Revision B
3.3.5
Fore-Aft Isolator Control
Use controls to lock the seat
’ s fore-aft isolator.
•
Push lever (A) down to lock
•
Pull lever (A) up to unlock
A
Figure 3.8: Operator
’ s Seat Fore-Aft Isolator Controls
3.3.6
Tilt
Use controls to adjust the seat
’ s tilt.
1.
Pull lever (A) up to release.
2.
Position seat back as desired.
3.
Release lever (A).
215023
44
Figure 3.9: Operator
’ s Seat Tilt Controls
A
Revision B
3.3.7
Lumbar Support
Use controls to adjusts the stiffness of the seat
’ s back.
•
Rotate knob (A) clockwise to increase lumbar support.
•
Rotate knob (A) counterclockwise to decrease lumbar support.
A
3.3.8
Vertical Dampener
Use controls to adjust the seat
’ s vertical suspension dampening.
•
Turn knob (A) counterclockwise to increase vertical dampener.
•
Turn knob (A) clockwise to decrease vertical dampener.
Figure 3.10: Operator
’ s Seat Lumbar Support Controls
215023
45
A
Figure 3.11: Operator
’ s Seat Vertical Dampener
Controls
Revision B
3.3.9
Cushion Tilt
–
Deluxe Cab Only
Use controls to adjust the deluxe seat
’ s cushion tilt.
1.
Pull lever (A) up to release.
2.
Tilt seat cushion up or down.
3.
Release lever (A).
A
3.3.10
Cushion Extension
–
Deluxe Cab Only
Use controls to adjust seat cushion extension fore-aft.
1.
Pull lever (A) up to release.
2.
Move cushion forward or rearward.
3.
Release lever (A).
Figure 3.12: Deluxe Seat Cushion Tilt Controls
A
Figure 3.13: Deluxe Seat Cushion Extension Controls
215023
46
Revision B
3.3.11
Lateral Isolation Lockout
–
Deluxe Cab Only
Use the controls (A) to lock or unlock the deluxe seat
’ s lateral isolation lockout.
A
Figure 3.14: Deluxe Seat Lateral Isolation Controls
3.3.12
Heating/Cooling
–
Deluxe Cab Only
WARNING
•
Do NOT use the seat heating or cooling system if you have a diminished ability to sense temperature, a reduced ability to feel pain, or have sensitive skin. There is a possibility that some people may suffer heat-induced burns or excessive cooling when using the system.
•
Do NOT place anything on the seat that insulates against heat or cooling, such as a blanket or cushion. These items may cause the seat heating or cooling system to overheat and cause a heat-induced burn to the seat occupant, or damage to the seat itself.
Use the controls to adjust the heating/cooling of deluxe operator
’ s seat.
Seat heating/cooling switch (A)
•
Press switch forward for COOL
•
Press switch back for HEAT
A
Heating/cooling high/low/off switch (B)
•
Press switch up for HIGH
•
Press switch down for LOW
•
Center switch for OFF
B
Figure 3.15: Deluxe Seat Heating and Cooling Controls
215023
47
Revision B
3.4
Training Seat
A folding wall-mounted training seat (with seat belt) is provided.
WARNING
•
The training seat is provided for use by an experienced machine Operator while training a new Operator.
•
The training seat is NOT intended as a passenger seat or for use by children. Use the seat belt whenever operating the machine or riding as a Trainer.
•
Keep all other riders off the machine.
To store training seat, lift seat and secure with latch (A).
To lower training seat, pull latch (A) and lower seat.
A
Figure 3.16: Training Seat
215023
48
Revision B
3.5
Seat Belts
The windrower is equipped with seat belts on the operator seat and training seat.
WARNING
Seat belts can help ensure your safety when properly used and maintained.
•
Before starting the engine, fasten your seat belt, and ensure that the training seat occupant
’ s seat belt is securely fastened.
•
Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.
To fasten seat belt:
1.
Pull belt with metal eye (A), at right side of seat, completely across your body.
2.
Push the metal eye (A) into the buckle (B) until it locks.
3.
Adjust the position of the belt as low on your body as possible.
A
A
B
Figure 3.17: Seat Belt
B
215023
49
Revision B
To release seat belt:
1.
Push the red button on the end of the buckle (B).
2.
Separate the buckle (B) from the metal eye (A).
A
A
B
Figure 3.18: Seat Belt
B
215023
50
Revision B
3.6
Adjusting the Steering Column and Steering Wheel
The steering column and steering wheel are adjustable for the operator
’ s comfort and to make it easier to get in and out of the operator
’ s seat.
To adjust the steering column:
1.
Hold onto the steering wheel, lift handle (A), and move steering column forward or backward into the desired position.
2.
Release handle (A) to lock the steering column in position.
A
To adjust the steering wheel:
1.
Hold onto the steering wheel, turn the center cap (A) counterclockwise, and move steering wheel up or down to desired position.
2.
Turn center cap clockwise (A) to lock steering wheel in position.
Figure 3.19: Steering Column
A
Figure 3.20: Steering Wheel
215023
51
Revision B
3.7
Lighting
The field and road light switches are located on the operator
’ s console.
The position of the operator
’ s station (cab-forward or engineforward) automatically determines which lights are active when the lighting mode is selected.
The field lights (B) do NOT turn on when the windrower is in engine-forward mode.
An LED on the switch changes from OFF to amber when the switch is on. The high beam switch has a blue LED that changes from OFF to blue when the switch is on.
D
B
A
Figure 3.21: Light Switches
A - Road Lights
C - Low or High Beams
B - Field Lights
D - Beacons
3.7.1
Cab-Forward Lighting
–
Field
The following lights are on when FIELD LIGHT button (A) is selected and the operator
’ s station is locked in cabforward mode:
A
Figure 3.22: Field Light Button
215023
52
Revision B
•
Cab-forward road lights (A) with low/high beams
•
Engine-forward road lights (B) with low/high beams
•
Inner work lights (C)
•
Outer work lights (D)
NOTE:
Work lights (D) are also turned on when the high beams are activated in cab-forward mode.
•
Rear roof work lights (E)
•
Rear swath lights (F)
NOTE:
For adjustment procedures, refer to
.
E
D
C
A
F
B
A
C
D
F
B
E
3.7.2
Cab-Forward Lighting
–
Road
The following lights are functional when the ROAD LIGHT button (A) is selected and the operator
’ s station is locked in the cab-forward mode:
•
To toggle between low and high beams, press the HIGH
BEAM button (B)
•
To operate hazard lights, press HAZARD LIGHT button (C)
Figure 3.23: Windrower Lighting
–
Top View
C
A
B
Figure 3.24: Road Light Button
215023
53
Revision B
•
Headlights (A) with low/high beams
•
Red tail lights (B)
•
Amber turn signals/hazard lights (C) on mirror supports
•
Work lights (D) turn on only when high beams are on in cabforward mode
C
D
A
A
D
C
B
B
3.7.3
Engine-Forward Lighting
–
Road
The following lights are functional when the ROAD LIGHT button (A) is pressed and the operator
’ s station is locked in the engine-forward mode.
•
To toggle between low and high beams, press the HIGH
BEAM button (B)
•
To operate hazard lights press HAZARD LIGHT button (C)
Figure 3.25: Windrower Lighting
–
Top View
C
A
B
Figure 3.26: Road Light Button
215023
54
Revision B
•
Engine-forward headlights (A) with low/high beams
•
Red taillights (B) on the mirror supports
•
Amber turn signals and hazard lights (C) on mirror supports
(viewed from the front)
•
Work lights (D) turn on only when high beams are activated in engine-forward mode
NOTE:
To align headlights (A), refer to
.
B
C
D
3.7.4
Tail/Beacon Lighting
The beacons (A) are functional when the IGNITION is ON and the BEACON button (B) is selected.
NOTE:
In some areas, the law requires the use of beacon lights when driving on the road.
A A
Figure 3.27: Windrower Lighting
–
Top View
A
C
D
B
Figure 3.28: Windrower Lighting
–
Top View
215023
55
Revision B
B
Figure 3.29: Beacon Light Button
3.7.5
Turn Signal / Hazard Lighting
The following lights are on when the LEFT and RIGHT turn signal switches (A) are pressed. Press the switches again to turn the lights off.
•
Amber turn signal lights (C) are visible from both front and rear.
NOTE:
Turn signals can also be controlled with the REEL/DISC
SPEED switches on the ground speed lever (GSL) when the header is disengaged.
The following lights are on when the HAZARD switch (B) is pressed. Press the switch again to turn the lights off.
•
Amber hazard lights (C) which are visible from both front and rear.
A
B
Figure 3.30: Turn Signal/Hazard Button
A
C C
Figure 3.31: Windrower Lighting
–
Top View
215023
56
Revision B
3.8
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper controls are located on the console. The illustration shows the controls in cab-forward mode.
Button (A) activates the front (cab-forward) wiper, and button (B) activates the rear wiper.
One window washer button (C) applies washer fluid to both the front and rear wipers as follows:
•
If both wipers are on, pressing and holding the window washer button (C) will spray washer fluid onto both windows.
When the button is released, the washer fluid stops, but both wipers continue to operate.
A B
•
If both wipers are NOT on, pressing and holding the window washer button (C) will spray washer fluid onto both windows, and both wipers will turn on. When the button is released, the washer fluid stops, but both wipers continue to operate for 4 seconds before automatically stopping.
Figure 3.32: Wiper Controls
C
•
If only one wiper is on, pressing and holding the window washer button (C) will activate the other wiper and spray washer fluid onto both windows. When the button is released, the washer fluid stops, and the active wiper will continue to operate while the activated wiper operates for only 4 seconds before automatically stopping.
You can aim the rear wiper washer nozzle (A) by turning it with a flat head screwdriver.
NOTE:
The front wiper washer nozzle is nonadjustable.
A
Figure 3.33: Rear Wiper Washer Nozzle
215023
57
Revision B
3.9
Rear View Mirrors
Two outside-mounted adjustable mirrors (A) provide a rear view when the windrower is in cab-forward mode.
A single interior-mounted mirror (B) provides a rear view in the engine-forward mode.
The mirror/light assemblies (A) are designed to fold back if accidentally struck.
B
A
The deluxe cab is equipped with power adjustable exterior mirrors which can be adjusted using knob (A) located next to the radio inside the cab.
Figure 3.34: Mirrors
A
Figure 3.35: Mirror Adjustment Knob
215023
58
Revision B
3.10
Cab Temperature
The cab environment is controlled by a climate control system that provides clean air-conditioned or heated air.
The heater/evaporator/blower assembly is located under the cab floor and is accessible from beneath the windrower.
3.10.1
Heater Shut-Off Valve
A shut-off valve (A) at the engine allows the cab heater to be isolated from the engine coolant.
The valve must be open to provide heat to the cab, but can be closed for maximum cooling.
3.10.2
Air Distribution
Cab air distribution is controlled through adjustable air vents (A) located in the cab posts.
You can adjust the vent to open/close (B) or to change the direction (C) of the air flow.
Figure 3.36: Heater Shut-Off Valve
A
B
C
Figure 3.37: Adjustable Air Vents
3.10.3
Climate Controls
NOTE:
When switches (A), (C), (D), and (E) are activated, the LED light on the switch will turn amber.
215023
59
Revision B
Auto fan speed switch (A)
Sets the climate control system to auto mode, which automatically adjusts the fan speed to maintain the set-point temperature.
Blower control toggle switch (B)
Controls the blower speed. Overrides auto fan control.
•
Press + for more air flow
•
Press
– for less air flow
Recirculating air switch (C)
Controls the air source; stops booster fan so cab air is recirculated.
Windshield defog/defrost switch (D)
The windshield defog/defrost operates with the A/C switch (E) ON.
Air conditioning (A/C) switch (E)
Controls the A/C system.
F
E
D
The A/C operates with the blower switch ON and blower speed is set above 0.
Temperature control toggle switch (F)
Figure 3.38: Climate Controls
Controls cab temperature.
•
Press red (top) area to increase cab temperature.
•
Press blue (bottom) area to decrease cab temperature.
IMPORTANT:
When starting the windrower after more than 1 week of storage, it may be necessary to distribute the refrigerant oil throughout the A/C system. For instructions, refer to
Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling, page 111
.
B
A
C
215023
60
Revision B
3.11
Operator Amenities
The operator
’ s station includes the following amenities:
Operator
’ s console
•
Auxiliary power outlets (A)
•
USB jack (B)
•
Utility tray under armrest (C)
•
Utility tray (D)
•
Cup holder (E)
C
D
Window shades
Retractable window shades (A) are located at the front and rear windows.
Figure 3.39: Console
A
B
E
A
Manual storage
A plastic case (A) is located behind the training seat to store the windrower manuals.
Figure 3.40: Window Shades
A
215023
61
Figure 3.41: Manual Storage Location
Revision B
Coat hook
A coat hook (A) is located above the training seat, to the left of the Operator.
Figure 3.42: Coat Hook
A
215023
62
Revision B
3.12
Radio
The M1170 Windrower comes equipped with an AM/FM/CD/USB/Bluetooth
® how to activate and pair Bluetooth
® devices with the radio.
radio. The following procedures describe
3.12.1
AM/FM/CD/USB Radio with Bluetooth
A radio (A) and two speakers (B) are factory-installed in the cab headliner. The radio operates in AM, FM, CD, and USB modes. It also supports Bluetooth
® wireless technology audio streaming and hands-free calling. For instructions, refer to the operating instructions supplied with the radio.
Wireless Technology
A
B
Figure 3.43: Radio and Speakers
To locate the operating instructions for the radio, follow this procedure:
1.
Turn the latch (A) to unlock the relay module cover (B).
2.
Retrieve the operating instructions for the radio from the relay module cover (B) access panel in the cab roof liner.
A
B
Figure 3.44: Relay Module Cover
215023
63
Revision B
3.
When finished with the radio manual, place the manual in the manual storage case (A) located behind the training seat.
A
Figure 3.45: Manual Storage Location
4.
Close the relay module cover (B) and turn latch (A) to lock it.
A
B
Figure 3.46: Relay Module Cover
Activating Bluetooth
®
Feature
The Bluetooth
® feature must be activated to allow mobile device pairing.
To activate the Bluetooth
® feature, follow this procedure:
1.
Press POWER button (A) to turn the radio on.
2.
Press and hold VOL/SEL knob (B) for 2 seconds. MENU is displayed on screen (C).
3.
Rotate VOL/SEL knob (B) to highlight BT SET menu and press the VOL/SEL knob to select. BLUETOOTH ON/OFF is displayed (C).
4.
Press VOL/SEL knob (B) to select BLUETOOTH.
5.
Rotate VOL/SEL knob (B) to display ON and press VOL/SEL knob (B) to select.
6.
Rotate VOL/SEL knob (B) and select DISCOVER.
7.
Rotate VOL/SEL knob (B) to display ON and press VOL/SEL to select.
A
B
Figure 3.47: Bluetooth Radio
C
215023
64
Revision B
Pairing a Bluetooth
®
Device
The installed radio allows the operator to pair a Bluetooth
Bluetooth
®
® phone or audio device. Before proceeding, check that is enabled and radio has been set to DISCOVER mode. For instructions, refer to
.
To pair a mobile device, follow this procedure:
1.
Press POWER button (A) to turn radio ON.
This will set the radio to Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
® discover mode if the feature has been activated.
2.
Turn the mobile device
’ s Bluetooth
® to ON. For instructions, refer to the device
’ s operator
’ s manual. The radio appears as a discoverable device.
3.
Select CD-5000 BT on the mobile device to connect.
NOTE:
A passkey is required to connect to the Bluetooth
® radio.
The default passkey is four zeros (0000).
4.
Enter the default passkey 0000. The radio will display
CONNECTED (B) and the Bluetooth
® icon (C) appears in the upper right corner of the screen.
A
Figure 3.48: Radio Display
B
C
215023
65
Revision B
3.13
Horn
The horn is activated by pushing button (A) located on the console.
Sound the horn three times prior to starting the engine.
The horn is located under the front left corner of the cab floor when facing cab-forward.
Figure 3.49: Console
A
215023
66
Revision B
3.14
Engine Controls
The following engine controls are conveniently located on the operator
’ s console.
Ignition switch
•
ACC (A): The windrower
’ s electrical accessories are turned
ON without starting the engine
•
OFF (B): All electrical systems OFF
•
RUN (C): Engine run position
•
START (D): Turn fully clockwise to crank engine, and release to return switch to RUN position.
A
B
C
D
IMPORTANT:
Remove ignition key when windrower is not in use. The ignition key also locks the doors and tool box in the left platform.
Figure 3.50: Ignition Switch on Operator
’ s Console
Throttle (A)
B
Controls engine speed range
•
MAX: Push lever forward
•
MIN: Pull lever back
Harvest Performance Tracker display (B)
•
Fuel level monitoring
•
DEF level monitoring
•
High exhaust system temperature indicator (HEST)
•
Exhaust system cleaning inhibit and forced indicator
•
Speed monitoring (ground, engine, knife/disc, reel, conveyor, and cooling fan)
A
Figure 3.51: Engine Controls
•
Pressure monitoring (knife, reel, conveyor, and supercharge)
•
Engine parameters (coolant temperature, fuel consumption, and engine load)
•
Header position
For more information on the Harvest Performance Tracker, refer to
3.17 Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 77 .
215023
67
Revision B
3.14.1
Using Eco Engine Control
Eco Engine Control (EEC) is useful in lighter crop conditions that do not require the maximum engine rpm. The reduced engine speed lowers fuel consumption, noise levels, and exhaust emissions in addition to reducing engine wear.
The EEC limits the engine to 1900
–
2300 rpm when the header is engaged, and is adjustable in 100 rpm increments. Activate this feature by using the EEC button (A) on the operator
’ s console.
The EEC symbol will display on the Harvest Performance Tracker
(HPT) screen over the right side of the tachometer.
A
The EEC feature will only be active when the header is engaged, but can be adjusted without the header running. When the header is disengaged, EEC will be canceled and engine rpm will return to the setting determined by the throttle.
Use the QuickMenu to adjust EEC rpm. For instructions, refer to
1014733
Figure 3.52: Eco Engine Control (EEC)
215023
68
Revision B
3.15
Windrower Controls
Console controls:
Turn signals (A)
–
Activates turn signals on windrower and header.
•
Push-ON/Push-OFF (activating the hazard switch also cancels the turn signal)
Ground speed lever (GSL) (B)
–
Controls speed and direction of movement.
•
F: Forward
•
N: NEUTRAL
•
PARK: Engages neutral interlock, and applies park brake when steering locked in center
•
R: Reverse
Hazard warning lights (C)
–
Activates signals on windrower and header.
•
Push-ON / Push-OFF
PARK (D)
–
Engages neutral interlock, and applies park brake when steering locked in center.
Horn (E)
Autosteer engagement button (F)
–
Engages/disengages the automated steering system (if installed).
•
ENGAGE: Click to engage
•
DISENGAGE: Turn steering wheel to disengage
B
D
A
C
F
A
E
Figure 3.53: Console Controls and Autosteer
215023
69
Revision B
3.16
Header Controls
All header controls are conveniently located on the operator
’ s console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
NOTE:
Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed, but are not functional for certain headers.
Refer to specific header sections in this manual for detailed operating procedures for all header controls.
3.16.1
Header Engage Switch
The header engage switch (A) engages and disengages the header drive.
To engage header: Push and hold HEADER ENGAGE switch (A) down while pulling up on the collar (B).
To disengage header: Push HEADER ENGAGE switch (A) down.
NOTE:
Although not required, it is good practice to move the throttle lever back to IDLE before engaging header drive.
A
B
Figure 3.54: Header Engage Switch
3.16.2
Header Drive Reverse Button
NOTE:
R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers do NOT have any reverse capability.
NOTE:
The following header systems have reverse capability:
•
D1XL Series Draper Headers: knife
•
D1X Series Draper Headers: knife
•
A40DX Auger Headers: knife, conditioner, auger and reel
•
A40DX GSS Auger Headers: knife, auger and reel
Reverse header systems as follows:
•
Engage : Push and hold reverser button (B) and engage header with switch (A).
•
Disengage : Release reverser button (B).
NOTE:
To re-engage in forward operation, push switch (A) down and then up again.
B
Figure 3.55: Header Drive Controls
A
215023
70
Revision B
3.16.3
Ground Speed Lever Switches
The switches on the Ground Speed Lever (GSL) (A) control the most common header functions.
A
GSL controls
— front
•
One-Touch-Return position switch (A)
•
One-Touch-Return position switch (B)
•
One-Touch-Return position switch (C)
•
Reel or disc speed (D) (also operates turn signals when header disengaged)
•
Reel position (E)
•
Autosteer engagement (F) (if equipped)
•
Header position (G)
•
Back switch (H)
– controls Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) functions
•
Select switch (J)
– controls HPT functions
Figure 3.56: Ground Speed Lever (GSL)
J
F
D
H
E
A
C
G
Figure 3.57: GSL Function Groups
B
215023
71
Revision B
GSL controls
— rear
•
Shift switch (A)
•
Scroll wheel (B)
NOTE:
When the shift switch is used with another button it performs the following shortcut functions:
•
SHIFT + BACK
–
Home page
•
SHIFT + SELECT
–
Main menu access
•
SHIFT + SCROLL
–
Adjust maximum ground speed
A
Figure 3.58: GSL Function Groups
Header Position Six-Way Switch
•
To lower header slowly, press (A) lightly
•
To lower header quickly, press (A) fully
•
To raise header slowly, press (C) lightly
•
To raise header quickly, press (C) fully
•
To tilt header downward, press (B)
•
To tilt header upward, press (D)
Release switch at desired position.
B
C
NOTE:
Header raise and lower rates are adjustable on the HPT display.
For instructions, refer to
4.6.8 Adjusting Header Raise and Lower
or header setup in
.
A
Figure 3.59: Ground Speed Lever
NOTE:
For detailed switch operating modes, refer to the section in this manual that is specific to your header.
Reel Position Four-Way Switch
The reel position button performs different functions depending on the attached options. For specific operating instructions, refer to the following sections:
•
Reel fore-aft position and height on draper headers:
–
4.7.2 Adjusting Reel Fore-Aft Position, page 193
–
4.7.3 Adjusting Reel Height, page 193
•
Center-link assist cylinder:
–
4.4.2 D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 154
–
4.4.1 A40DX Auger Header, page 143
•
Double windrow attachment (DWA) position:
–
4.6.6 Double Windrowing, page 189
B
C
A
Figure 3.60: Ground Speed Lever
A - Reel Down
C - Reel Up
B - Reel Forward
D - Reel Aft
D
D
B
215023
72
Revision B
Reel and Disc Speed Switch
•
Press and hold the + button (A) to increase the reel or disc speed.
•
Press and hold the
– button (B) to decrease the reel or disc speed.
•
Release the button at the desired speed.
For instructions, refer to the applicable header topic for detailed use of these switches.
A
NOTE:
The REEL and DISC SPEED switch can operate the turn signals when the header is not in use. For example, when driving in the engine-forward position, or when operating in cab-forward position with the header disengaged.
B
Figure 3.61: GSL Reel and Disc Speed Switch
NOTE:
The reel and auger speeds are hydraulically linked on the A40DX Auger Header. When the reel speed is changed, the auger speed changes automatically. Independent reel and auger adjustment is available on the A40DX GSS (Grass Seed) using the differential auger-reel control feature. It is also available on the A40DX (not Grass Seed) as an option: the Reel Speed
Control kit (MD #B6604).
IMPORTANT:
Reel speed on an A40DX Auger Header MUST NOT EXCEED 85 rpm. Auger speed MUST NOT EXCEED 320 rpm.
One-Touch-Return Buttons (A, B, C)
One-Touch-Return buttons save header configuration settings and serve as presets for quickly returning the header to specific settings.
The One-Touch-Return buttons A, B, and C always save header height settings, but the following settings can also be saved depending on the header type:
•
Header tilt
•
Deck position/header float selection
•
Double windrow attachment (DWA) or swath compressor raise/lower
•
DWA speed
•
Knife speed
•
Draper speed
•
Reel speed
•
Reel height
•
Reel fore-aft
•
Disc speed
To program the One-Touch-Return buttons, press and hold button A, B, or C on the GSL handle for 3 seconds until an audible tone is heard, indicating the current header settings are saved to that button.
Figure 3.62: One-Touch-Return Buttons on GSL
215023
73
Revision B
To return header to a preset condition, tap the A, B, or C button quickly. Holding the One-Touch-Return button too long can inadvertently reprogram the current header settings.
Pressing a programmed A, B, or C button opens a run screen that shows the corresponding letter (A) on the screen for the preset.
A
3.16.4
Console Header Buttons
The console header buttons (A) adjust the following header functions:
•
Deck shift/float preset
•
Draper speed
•
Double windrow attachment (DWA) or swath compressor lift functions
Figure 3.63: One-Touch-Return Buttons on GSL
A
Figure 3.64: Console Header Buttons
215023
74
Revision B
Deck Shift / Float Presets
Draper header with deck shift option:
•
Controls the draper deck position for double windrowing with a draper header.
•
Set header float for each deck position. For instructions, refer to
NOTE:
The last float setting used in any deck shift position will be stored into memory automatically.
A B
C
Float presets:
When used with a rotary disc header, auger header, or draper header, these buttons select header float presets. For instructions, refer to
4.9.2 Setting Float Options with Fixed Deck, page 235
to learn how to preset the float.
NOTE:
For detailed switch operating modes, refer to the section in this manual that is specific to your header.
Figure 3.65: Header Deck Shift Buttons
A - Right-Side Delivery
C - Left-Side Delivery
B - Center Delivery
A B
C
Figure 3.66: Header Switches
A - Float Preset 1
C - Float Preset 3
B - Float Preset 2
215023
75
Revision B
Conveyor Speed Adjustment Buttons
Adjust header or double windrow attachment (DWA) conveyor speed by pressing switch (A) to increase the speed, or switch (B) to decrease the speed.
Conveyor speed can be adjusted in either manual or auto modes. For instructions, refer to
4.7.6 Adjusting Draper Speed, page 200
for more information.
Figure 3.67: Operator
’ s Console Conveyor Controls
Auxiliary Lift Switches
With double windrow attachment (DWA):
•
Raise the DWA deck by pressing button (A), or lower the deck by pressing button (B).
With swath compressor attachment:
•
Raise the swath compressor by pressing button (A), or lower it by pressing button (B).
A
B
Figure 3.68: Operator
’ s Console Auxiliary Controls
A
B
215023
76
Revision B
3.17
Harvest Performance Tracker Display
The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display settings are preset at the factory. This section explains how to adjust the settings.
3.17.1
Harvest Performance Tracker Screen Layout
The appearance and functions of the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) depend on the type of header attached.
Figure 3.69: Run Screen 1
–
Draper Header Shown
D
A
A - Left Gauge Cluster B - Header Information C - Current Header Position D - Telltales
B
C
215023
77
Revision B
The HPT display is separated into the following zones:
Left gauge cluster:
•
Ground speed
•
Maximum ground speed
•
Engine rpm
•
Eco engine control (EEC) active/inactive
•
High exhaust system temperature (HEST) light
•
Inhibit status
•
Park and turn signal status
•
Level gauges for fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
•
Coolant temperature gauge
•
Climate control temperature and blower speed
•
Current time
Figure 3.70: Gauge Cluster
Header information:
The information displayed depends on the type of header attached to the windrower and which run screen is active.
•
Run screen #1: Displays reel, draper, knife, disc, or auger speed and pressure; alarm point; and indexing (factory-set according to header)
•
Run screen #2: Displays draper, knife, or disc speed and pressure; reel height and fore-aft position; hydraulic pressure; and load bar
•
Run screen #3: Displays fuel per hour/acre, acres per hour, and sub acres per hour (resettable)
•
Run screen #4: Displays cooling fan speed, engine air intake temperature, hydraulic oil temperature, and engine coolant temperature
Figure 3.71: Draper Header Information
215023
78
Revision B
Current header position:
•
Displays basic header functions: height and angle
Telltales:
•
Telltales (A) indicate an engine or windrower fault
•
Telltales are amber or red in color accompanied by a symbol for the fault
•
Telltales display a short description (B) of the fault
Figure 3.72: Current Header Position
A
B
Required maintenance indicator:
•
An amber indicator (A) is displayed 50 hours before required maintenance is due
•
The indicator only displays when header is disengaged
•
The indicator flashes when maintenance is overdue by
50 hours
Figure 3.73: Faults/Telltales
A
1016051
1019632
Figure 3.74: Maintenance Indicator
3.17.2
Navigating the Harvest Performance Tracker Display
Scroll Knob, Scroll Wheel, and Select Button
Turning the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display highlights the available options within a menu and adjusts the settings. Pushing the scroll knob selects functions or menu items. Scroll and select functions are duplicated
215023
79
Revision B
on the ground speed lever (GSL) controls. Unless otherwise specified, both buttons will perform the same function. When
SELECT is used in this document, either of these buttons can be used.
•
Turn scroll knob (A) clockwise to move selections down the screen, to the right (clockwise), and to increase settings. Push the scroll knob to activate the selection.
•
Turn scroll knob (A) counterclockwise to move selections up the screen, to the left (counterclockwise), and to decrease settings. Push the scroll knob to activate the selection.
A
NOTE:
The scroll wheel (A) on the back of the GSL and the SELECT button (B) on the front of the GSL perform the same functions as the HPT rotary scroll knob.
Figure 3.75: HPT Scroll Knob
A
B
Home, Back, and Select Buttons
•
Press the BACK button (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) to return to the previous level within the menu structure.
•
Press the HOME button (B) on the HPT to return to the last selected run screen (or header disengaged screen).
Figure 3.76: GSL Scroll Wheel and Select Button
1014567
B
A
Figure 3.77: HPT Home and Back Buttons
1014573
215023
80
Revision B
•
Press the BACK button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to return to the previous level within the menu structure.
•
Press the SHIFT button (B) on the back of the GSL, and then press the GSL BACK button (A) to return to the last selected run screen (or header disengaged screen). Pressing the
SHIFT (B) and BACK (A) buttons on the GSL at the same time produces the same result as pushing the HOME key on the
HPT display.
B
A
Soft Keys
•
Soft keys 1
–
4 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display run screens 1
–
4 respectively
•
Soft key 5 (B) displays the main menu
•
After a menu is open, soft keys 1
–
5 also function as buttons within menus
Figure 3.78: GSL Select and Back Buttons
1014574
A
B
Figure 3.79: HPT Soft Keys
QuickMenu System
The QuickMenu system allows you to change certain windrower and header functions directly on the screen.
1.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) while in any run screen to open the QuickMenu system.
B
A
1014576
215023
81
1014578
Figure 3.80: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
Revision B
2.
Use the HPT scroll knob or the GSL scroll wheel to move the red cursor (A) around the screen. The following selectable areas are highlighted in white and can be changed while in motion using the QuickMenu system:
•
Ground speed limit (A)
–
For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124
.
•
EEC throttle limit (B)
–
For instructions, refer to
Programming the Eco Engine Control, page 119
.
•
Header float (C)
–
For instructions, refer to
.
•
Header adjustments (when header is running [not shown])
–
For instructions, refer to
.
•
Knife speed
–
For instructions, refer to
•
Access maintenance information
–
For instructions, refer to
3.17.8 Machine Information Pages, page 99 .
•
Adjust auto speed settings
–
For instructions, refer to
4.7 Operating with D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 193 ,
4.8 Operating with an A40DX Auger Header, page 218 , or
4.9 Operating with an R1 Series Rotary
•
Define header alarm speeds
–
For instructions, refer to
4.7 Operating with D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 193 , or
4.8 Operating with an A40DX Auger
.
•
Header Alarm pressure
–
For instructions, refer to
Operating with D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page
,
4.8 Operating with an A40DX Auger Header, page
,
4.9 Operating with an R1 Series Rotary Disc
.
•
Manage telltales
–
For instructions, refer to
.
•
Turn auto speeds ON/OFF
–
For instructions, refer to
4.7 Operating with D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 193 , or
4.8 Operating with an A40DX Auger
.
3.
Place the red cursor (red border [A]) over the function you want to adjust, and press the HPT scroll knob or GSL SELECT button to display a submenu containing the adjustable values within the selected function.
Main Menu
To display the main menu and select functions, follow these steps:
A
B
Figure 3.81: QuickMenu System
C
1016115
215023
82
Revision B
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu or press SHIFT and SELECT on the ground speed lever.
2.
Use the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown) to place the red cursor (C) over the icon you want to select.
NOTE:
Using scroll knob will activate titles that explain each selection.
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the highlighted icon.
NOTE:
Pressing the corresponding soft key will also work.
A
B
Figure 3.82: Opening the Main Menu
C
The main menu provides access to submenus for viewing and adjusting windrower and header settings. Refer to
for details on navigating the following submenus:
•
Information
•
Settings
•
Maintenance
•
Diagnostics
•
Engine aftertreatment
Menu Icons
Several menu icons are available in the main menu. Selecting a menu icon will open submenu icons, menu lists, and radio buttons for viewing and adjusting windrower and header settings.
Information: Icon (A) displays the following submenu icons:
•
Windrower Information (B)
•
Header Information (C)
•
Module Information (D)
•
Performance Information (E)
NOTE:
Header Information (C) has a hidden menu allowing Dealers to modify the stored list of headers. To access, hold the EEC button for 5 seconds while on the Header Information page.
A
B
E
C
D
Figure 3.83: Information Icon and Information
Submenu Icons
215023
83
Revision B
Setup: Icon (A) displays the following submenu icons:
•
Screen Settings (B)
•
Windrower Settings (C)
•
Header Setup (D)
•
One-Touch-Return Settings (E)
A
Windrower Settings: Icon (A) displays the following submenu icons:
NOTE:
The F3 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console also displays the windrower settings menu.
•
Calibration (B)
•
Tires (C)
•
Lockout Functions (D)
•
Sensors (E)
Figure 3.84: Settings Icon and Settings Submenu Icons
Screen Settings: Icon (A) displays the following submenu icons:
•
Brightness and Volume (B)
•
Time and Date (C)
•
Language and Units (D)
•
Run Screen Set-Up (E)
•
Reset to Defaults (F)
A
E
F
1016130
Figure 3.85: Screen Settings Icon and Display Settings
Submenu Icons
B
C
D
A
B
C
D
E
Figure 3.86: Windrower Settings Icon and Windrower
Settings Submenu Icons
B
C
D
E
215023
84
Revision B
Header Setup: Icon (A) opens the SET-UP HEADER menu list.
NOTE:
The F4 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console also displays the SET-UP HEADER menu list.
•
Header Type (B)
•
Hours Used (C)
•
Total Acres (D)
A
B
C
After the header is selected, the HEADER SETUP menu opens, which includes:
•
Cut Width
•
Raise/Lower Rates
•
Attachments
Figure 3.87: Header Setup Icon and Menu List
D
1019721
One-Touch-Return: Icon (A) displays the One-Touch-Return menu list.
NOTE:
The F2 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console also displays the One-Touch-Return menu list.
Figure 3.88: Header Setup Menu
Figure 3.89: One-Touch-Return Icon and
One-Touch-Return Menu List
A
1019634
215023
85
Revision B
Maintenance: Icon (A) opens the maintenance menu list (B). For instructions, refer to
5.2.3 Electronic Maintenance Tool, page
A
B
Figure 3.90: Maintenance Icon and Maintenance
Menu List
Diagnostics: Icon (A) displays the following submenu icons:
•
Windrower Fault Codes (B)
•
Engine Fault Codes (C)
•
Inputs/Outputs (D)
•
Can Network (E)
A
Figure 3.91: Diagnostics Icon and Diagnostics
Submenu Icons
B
C
D
E
Engine Aftertreatment: Icon (A)
•
Soft key 4 (B) activates the initiate manual SCR conditioning command, and the initiate icon (D) will become highlighted on the display
•
Soft key 5 (C) activates the inhibit SCR conditioning command, and the inhibit icon (E) will become highlighted on the display
D
B
A
C
E
1014659
Figure 3.92: Engine Aftertreatment Icon and Soft Keys
Faults and Telltales
Faults and telltales displayed on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) provide important information about the windrower and the engine. Telltales (A) include a symbol indicating the affected area (refer to
106 ) and a short description of the fault (B).
215023
86
Revision B
•
Red faults (displayed on the top line) indicate that a major fault has occurred and will cause progressive damage or affect the safe operation of the machine. The machine should be shut down as soon as possible.
•
Yellow faults (displayed on the bottom line) indicate that a failure has occurred, and the machine should be serviced as soon as possible to diagnose the failure.
To display a more detailed fault page, use the HPT scroll knob (E) to select the question mark symbol (C).
To close the short description (B), use the HPT scroll knob (E) to select the close symbol (D). Telltales (A) remain on the screen until the fault is corrected.
NOTE:
Closing the short description of a yellow fault will mute the alarm tone associated with that fault. Alarm tones associated with red faults cannot be muted.
Figure 3.93: HPT Run Screen Displaying Faults
E
A B
C
D
If multiple faults are detected, the number of faults will appear in the corner of the telltale icon (A).
215023
87
A
1016235
Figure 3.94: Telltale Icon (Multiple Faults Detected)
Revision B
Using the HPT scroll/select knob, select the question mark symbol next to the short description to display a detailed description of the fault. If there are multiple faults, the icons (A) will appear in a row. To display a detailed description of each fault, use the HPT scroll/select knob to select the icon.
A
1016236
Figure 3.95: HPT Fault Description Page
3.17.3
Setting up the Harvest Performance Tracker Screen
The setup menu configures the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) for specific operations. The following settings should be checked before initial operation of the windrower.
The key must be turned to the ON position to enter the setup menu, but the engine does not have to be running.
Setting Screen Brightness and Volume
Follow this procedure to adjust the factory set screen brightness and alarm volume.
Setting screen brightness:
The screen brightness is shown with a 10-segment bar graph and is adjustable down to 10%. The brightness automatically adjusts for daytime and nighttime operation. Day mode is defined as having the headlights or work lights OFF (or having only the clearance lights ON). Night mode is defined as having either the headlights or work lights ON.
1.
Navigate to the SETTINGS Menu with soft key 5 and the
Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob. Refer to
3.17.2 Navigating the Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 79
if required.
2.
Scroll to the SCREEN icon (A) and select it.
3.
Scroll to the BRIGHTNESS AND VOLUME icon (B), and select it to open adjustment window.
A
B
Figure 3.96: Brightness and Volume
215023
88
Revision B
4.
Scroll through the following four brightness modes, and select the mode that requires adjustment:
•
DAY mode (A) (default setting is 70%)
•
NIGHT mode (B) (default setting is 20%)
•
KEYPAD DAY mode (C) (default setting is 70%)
•
KEYPAD NIGHT mode (D) (default setting is 20%)
5.
Adjust the selected value by scrolling and previewing the brightness as you scroll.
A
B
C
D
Figure 3.97: Brightness and Volume
Setting volume:
The volume control adjusts the audible alarms. It is depicted with a 10-segment bar graph and is adjustable down to 10%.
The default volume is factory-set to 50%.
Adjust the volume as follows:
1.
Navigate to SETTINGS Menu (C) with soft key 5 (A) and the
HPT scroll knob (B). Refer to
Performance Tracker Display, page 79
if required.
C
B
A
2.
Scroll to the SCREEN icon (A) and select it.
3.
Scroll to the BRIGHTNESS AND VOLUME icon (B), and select it to open adjustment window.
Figure 3.98: Main Menu
A
B
215023
89
Figure 3.99: Brightness and Volume
Revision B
4.
Scroll to the VOLUME option (A) and select it.
5.
Adjust volume by scrolling.
A
Figure 3.100: Brightness and Volume
Setting Time and Date
Whenever the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) boots up, the time and date will display according to your selected configuration.
1.
Navigate to the SETTINGS Menu with soft key 5 and the
HPT scroll knob. For instructions, refer to
3.17.2 Navigating the Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 79 .
2.
Scroll to the SCREEN option (A) and select it.
3.
Scroll to the TIME AND DATE option (B), and select it to open the adjustment window.
A
B
4.
Scroll through the available options on the HPT display, select the desired option, and scroll to adjust.
Figure 3.101: Time and Date
215023
90
Figure 3.102: Time and Date
Revision B
Setting Language and Units of Measurement
To set the language and units of measurement displayed, follow these steps:
1.
Navigate to the SETTINGS menu with soft key 5 and the
Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob. For instructions, refer to
Performance Tracker Display, page 79
.
2.
Scroll to SCREEN icon (A) and select it.
3.
Scroll to LANGUAGE AND UNITS icon (B), and select it to open the adjustment window.
4.
Scroll through the available options on the HPT, select desired item, and scroll to adjust:
LANGUAGE
•
ENGLISH (default)
•
SPANISH
UNITS
•
METRIC
•
USA (default)
Refer to
8.2 Conversion Chart, page 409
for a comprehensive list of U.S. and metric units.
A
B
Figure 3.103: Language and Units
Resetting to Factory Defaults
To change any Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) settings back to the defaults set in the factory, follow these steps:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A), and use the HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown) to place the red cursor over the SETTINGS icon (C).
2.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to activate the main menu (C) options.
B
C
A
Figure 3.104: Opening the Main Menu
215023
91
Revision B
3.
Scroll to the DISPLAY SETTING icon (A) and press SELECT.
4.
Scroll to the RESET TO DEFAULTS icon (B), and press SELECT to open the adjustment window.
A
B
Figure 3.105: Opening the Reset to Defaults Page
5.
Scroll through the available options, and press SELECT to reset to default. Refer to the following list for factory default options:
•
Select all
•
Display brightness
•
Keypad brightness by day
•
Display volume
•
Language (English)
•
Units (USA)
•
Eco engine control speed (4 and 6 cylinders have different speeds)
•
Max cab-forward speed 14 mph
•
Max engine-forward speed 27 mph
•
Header speed settings
•
Header alarm pressures
•
Knife alarm speed
•
Manual (not auto) knife speed mode
•
Manual (not auto) reel speed mode
•
Manual (not auto) draper speed mode
•
All functions unlocked
•
All sensors enabled
•
Cut width
•
Swath roller selection off
•
Max header raise/lower rates
•
One-touch-return presets (reset to default option available also within this menu)
•
DWA speed
•
DWA alarm pressure
6.
Press the HOME or BACK button. The CONFIRM YES/NO dialog box is displayed.
215023
92
Revision B
7.
Select YES to save changes and close the dialog box, or select NO to close the dialog box without saving changes.
3.17.4
Calibrating the Header Systems
When a header is attached to the windrower, the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) will recognize the header ID and determine the appropriate systems to calibrate. The following sensors may require calibration depending on header type:
•
Header height
•
Header angle
•
Header float left
•
Header float right
•
Reel height
•
Reel fore-aft
•
Swath compressor
Recalibration is required if the HPT is replaced, a position sensor is replaced, sensor readouts are erratic, or a new header type or attachment is connected to the windrower.
NOTE:
To calibrate the knife drive, the header must be attached and engaged. If the header is disengaged when calibration is selected, the message ENGAGE HEADER will appear on the screen.
NOTE:
Calibrations MUST be performed with the engine running. Some calibrations will NOT be available with engine off.
CAUTION
Before starting the machine, check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
Start the engine, and engage the header.
2.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the HPT main menu.
3.
Use HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel to scroll to settings icon (C).
4.
Press HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to activate the settings menu options.
A
B
C
Figure 3.106: Opening the Main Menu
215023
93
Revision B
5.
Scroll to WINDROWER SETTINGS icon (A) and press SELECT.
6.
Scroll to CALIBRATION icon (B), and press SELECT to open the adjustment page.
NOTE:
The F3 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console will also open the WINDROWER SETTINGS menu.
A
7.
Select POSITION SENSORS (A).
B
Figure 3.107: Windrower Settings Icon and Calibration
Submenu Icon
A
1019618
8.
Select CALIBRATION WITH HEADER ENGAGED to display the calibration page as shown at right.
9.
Press the PLAY button on the screen to begin the calibration process.
NOTE:
If the engine speed is less than 1500 rpm when you press the PLAY button, the calibration system will accelerate the engine to 1500 rpm.
Figure 3.108: Calibration Options
Figure 3.109: Calibration Page
1014668
215023
94
Revision B
10. When Stage 1 of the calibration is complete, press the PLAY button (A) on the screen to continue with Stage 2 of the calibration process.
A
11. When Stage 2 of the calibration is complete, press the
RESUME button (A) on the screen to set HEADER FLOAT, or press the HOME or BACK button (not shown) to exit without setting the float.
Figure 3.110: Calibration Page
A
Figure 3.111: Calibration Page
NOTE:
Press the X button (A) on the screen (or press the HOME,
BACK, or any GSL button [buttons not shown]) at any time during the calibration process to EXIT calibration without saving. The engine speed will return to the original rpm prior to starting the calibration process.
NOTE:
If a sensor goes out of its normal operating range during the calibration process, calibration will stop, and a message will appear on the screen indicating that the sensor is out of range. A flashing amber question mark will appear on the calibration icon in the menu system. If a sensor is out of range, adjust the sensor and restart the calibration process.
Figure 3.112: Calibration Page
A
3.17.5
Calibrating Knife Drive on Harvest Performance Tracker
NOTE:
Calibration of the knife drive must be completed with the header attached; the header must be engaged to perform the calibration procedure. If the header is disengaged when calibration is selected, the message ENGAGE HEADER will appear on the screen.
215023
95
Revision B
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
Start the windrower and engage the header.
2.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu.
3.
Use HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown) to highlight SETTINGS icon (C).
4.
Press HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to activate the settings menu options.
A
B
C
5.
Scroll to WINDROWER SETTINGS icon (A) and press SELECT.
6.
Scroll to CALIBRATION icon (B), and press SELECT to open the adjustment page.
NOTE:
The F3 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console will also open the WINDROWER
’
S SETTINGS menu.
7.
Select KNIFE DRIVE.
Figure 3.113: Opening the Main Menu
A
B
8.
Press the PLAY button on the screen to begin the calibration process.
NOTE:
During the calibration sequence, the engine rpm and header speed will increase and decrease multiple times.
NOTE:
Press X button (A) on the screen or use the Header
Disengage Switch at any time during the calibration process to EXIT calibration without saving. The engine speed will return to the original rpm prior to starting the calibration process.
Figure 3.114: Windrower Settings Icon and Calibration
Submenu Icon
A
Figure 3.115: Calibration Page
215023
96
Revision B
3.17.6
Setting Windrower Tire Size
The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) is factory-set for 600/65R28 bar tires. If the windrower has a different tire type, you need to change this setting. Setting the proper tire size is important for accurate tracking of ground speed, acres, and productivity data.
1.
Navigate to the SETTINGS menu with soft key 5 and the
HPT scroll knob. For instructions, refer to
3.17.2 Navigating the Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 79 .
2.
Scroll to the WINDROWER SETTINGS icon (A) and select it.
3.
Scroll to the TIRES icon (B), and select it to display the adjustment window.
NOTE:
The F3 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console will also display the WINDROWER SETTINGS menu.
A
B
4.
Scroll to highlight the appropriate tire size (A) and select it.
The new selection will be displayed with a shaded green radio button.
Figure 3.116: Tire Size
A
Figure 3.117: Tire Selection
215023
97
Revision B
3.17.7
Activating Control Locks
All header functions are factory-set to the unlocked position, but certain functions can be locked to prevent changes. This feature can be used to maintain preferred settings when there are multiple Operators.
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to display the main menu.
2.
To scroll to the setting icon (C), use the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to activate the settings menu options.
B
C
A
4.
Scroll to the WINDROWER SETTINGS icon (A) and press SELECT.
5.
Scroll to the CONTROL LOCKS icon (B), and press SELECT to display the adjustment window.
NOTE:
The F3 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console will also display the windrower settings menu.
Figure 3.118: Displaying the Main Menu
A
B
6.
On the LOCKOUT FUNCTIONS PAGE, use the scroll knob on the HPT to move the cursor (A) to the desired function(s) to lock.
7.
Press SELECT to activate the lock.
Figure 3.119: Windrower Settings Icon and Tires
Submenu Icon
A
Figure 3.120: Lockout Functions Page
215023
98
Revision B
3.17.8
Machine Information Pages
Selecting the INFORMATION icon (A) from the main menu provides access to the following submenu icons:
•
Windrower information (B)
–
Refer to
.
•
Header information (C)
–
Refer to
•
Software information (D)
–
Refer to
•
Performance information (E)
–
Refer to
Performance Information, page 102
.
A
B
C
D
E
Figure 3.121: Information Icon and Information
Submenu Icons
Accessing Windrower Information
To access information about the windrower on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display, follow these steps:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu.
2.
To scroll to the INFORMATION icon (C), use the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the highlighted INFORMATION icon.
B
A
C
4.
Scroll to the WINDROWER INFORMATION submenu icon (A), and press SELECT to display the windrower information menu.
Figure 3.122: Opening the Main Menu
A
215023
99
Figure 3.123: Windrower Information Submenu Icon
Revision B
The windrower information menu displays the following information:
•
Engine hours (A)
•
Windrower total hours (B)
•
Total acres (C)
•
Windrower total header hours (D)
A
C
B
D
Figure 3.124: Windrower Information Menu
Accessing Header Information
To access information about the header on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display, follow these steps:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu.
2.
To scroll to the INFORMATION icon (C), use the HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the highlighted INFORMATION icon.
B
A
C
1018967
4.
Scroll to the HEADER INFORMATION submenu icon (A), and press SELECT to display the header information menu.
Figure 3.125: Opening the Main Menu
A
215023
100
Figure 3.126: Header Information Submenu Icon
Revision B
The header information menu displays the following information:
•
Header (A)
•
Header hours (B)
•
Total acres (C)
•
Sub acres (D) (resettable)
NOTE:
If you select any particular value (E), the message RESET YES/NO appears on the display. Select YES to reset the sub acres to zero and return to the same highlighted sub acres. Select NO or press the BACK or HOME button to dismiss the message without resetting the sub acres. The sub acres are also resettable from run screen 3. For instructions, refer to
A
B
C
Figure 3.127: Header Information Menu
Accessing Software Information
To access software information on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display, follow these steps:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu.
2.
To scroll to the INFORMATION icon (C), use the HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the highlighted INFORMATION icon.
B
A
D
C
E
1018968
4.
Scroll to the SOFTWARE INFORMATION submenu icon (A), and press SELECT to display the module information menu.
Figure 3.128: Opening the Main Menu
215023
101
A
Figure 3.129: Software Information Submenu Icon
Revision B
The HPT display reports the component make, software ID, and software installation date in the software information menu. In addition, the software versions and make, model, and serial numbers of the following modules are also displayed on the screen:
•
Master controller (A)
•
Display (B)
•
Console (C)
•
Ground speed lever (D)
•
Engine control module (E)
•
Roof relay module (F)
•
Chassis relay module (G)
•
HVAC module (not shown)
•
Firewall extension module (not shown)
C
B
A
D
E
F
G
Figure 3.130: Software Information Menu
1018971
Accessing Performance Information
To access information on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) about how the machine has performed to date, follow these steps:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to open the main menu.
2.
To scroll to the INFORMATION icon (C), use the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the highlighted INFORMATION icon.
B
C
A
Figure 3.131: Opening the Main Menu
215023
102
Revision B
4.
Scroll to the WINDROWER PERFORMANCE submenu icon (A), and press SELECT to display the performance information menu.
A
Figure 3.132: Performance Information Submenu Icon
The performance information menu displays two columns: one column displays the accumulated data over the machine
’ s lifetime (A) and is not resettable, the other displays the data accumulated per field (B) and is resettable.
A
B
The performance information menu displays the following information:
•
Engine hours (C)
•
Engine % idle time (D)
•
Average % load (E)
•
Gal/Hr (F)
•
Acres (G)
•
Acres/Gal (H)
•
Gal/Acre (J)
•
Windrower header hours (K)
C
J
D
H
E
G
F
K
Figure 3.133: Performance Information Menu
1018974
NOTE:
To reset all of the field values to zero, use the scroll knob to highlight the FIELD column (B) and press the SELECT button.
215023
103
Revision B
3.17.9
F1 to F4 Function Buttons
The following functions have been assigned to the function buttons on the operator
’ s console:
•
F1 (A)
–
Float menu
•
F2 (B)
–
One-Touch-Return
•
F3 (C)
–
Windrower settings
•
F4 (D)
–
Header settings
Press a function button to override the existing screen and display the function.
Press the function button again or press the Back button to return to the previous screen.
Press the Home button to return to the run screen.
NOTE:
F5 and F6 buttons are not assigned to any functions.
A B C D
Figure 3.134: Operator
’ s Console Shortcut Buttons
215023
104
Revision B
Chapter 4: Operation
4.1
Owner/Operator Responsibilities
CAUTION
•
It is your responsibility to read and understand this manual completely before operating the windrower. Contact your Dealer if an instruction is not clear to you.
•
Follow all safety messages in the manual and on safety signs on the machine.
•
Remember that YOU are the key to safety. Good safety practices protect you and the people around you.
•
Before allowing anyone to operate the windrower, for however short a time or distance, make sure they have been instructed in its safe and proper use.
•
Review the manual and all safety related items with all Operators every year.
•
Be alert for other Operators not using recommended procedures or not following safety precautions. Correct these mistakes immediately, before an accident occurs.
•
Do NOT modify the machine. Unauthorized modifications may impair the function and/or safety and affect machine life.
•
The safety information given in this manual does NOT replace safety codes, insurance needs, or laws governing your area. Be sure your machine meets the standards set by these regulations.
215023
105
Revision B
4.2
Symbol Definitions
The following symbols are used to depict functions or reactions of the various instruments and controls.
Learn the meaning of these symbols before operating the windrower.
4.2.1
Windrower Operating Symbols
These are the symbols used on the console for windrower operation.
Figure 4.1: Windrower Operating Symbols
L
A
F
R
B
G M
N
C
H
S
D
J
P
T
E
K
Q
A - Signal Lights
D - Neutral
G - High Beams
K - Air Conditioning
N - Float Menu
R - Header Engage
U - Slow
X - One-Touch-Return
B - Hazard Lights
E - Reverse
H - Cab-forward Field Lights
L - Windshield Wiper
P - Windrower Settings
S - Header Disengage
V - Fast
Y - Electrical Power / Accessories
C - Forward
F - Road Lights
J - Blower Speed (Manual Mode)
M - Wiper Fluid
Q - Header Settings
T - Header Reverse
W - Engine Throttle
W
V
U
Y
X
215023
106
Revision B
4.2.2
Harvest Performance Tracker Symbols
Figure 4.2: Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) Symbols
A
G
M
S
N
T
B
C
H
J P
U
D
K
E
F
A Knife
D Reel Speed
G Draper
K Header Height
N DWA Raise
R Disc Pressure
U SCR Conditioning Manual
X Engine rpm
AA - Parking Brake
AD - Swath Compressor Raised
L
Q
R
V
W
B Knife Pressure
E Reel Height
H Draper Pressure
L Header Tilt
P DWA Lower
S Disc Speed
V SCR Conditioning Inhibit
Y Fuel
AB - Climate Control
AE - Lowering Swath Compressor
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
AE
AF
AC
AD
C Reel
F Reel Fore-Aft
J Draper Speed
M Header Float
Q Disc
T DEF
W - High Exhaust System Temperature
Z Water in Fuel
AC - Raising Swath Compressor
AF - Swath Compressor Lowered
215023
107
Revision B
Figure 4.3: HPT Symbols
A
B
C
D
E
A Acres/Hour
D Fuel/Hour
G Engine Malfunction
K Engine Intake Air Filter
N Engine Oil Filter
R Hydraulic Oil Pressure
U Battery/Voltage
X Function Locked
AA - Alarm
AD - Sensor Disabled
F
G
N
H
P
J
Q
K
R
L
S
M
B Sub Acres
E Engine Power Kilowatt
H Wait to Start
L Engine Oil Pressure
P Engine Coolant Level
S Hydraulic Oil Temperature
V Fan Speed
Y Time
AB - Alarm Off
AE - Night
T
U AA
V
AB
W
AC
X
AD
Y
Z
C Fuel/Acre
F Engine Power Horsepower
J Engine Coolant Temperature
M Engine Oil Level
Q Engine Air Intake Temperature
T Transmission Oil Pressure
W - Caution (Yellow) / Danger (Red)
Z Date
AC - Volume Level
AF - Day
AF
AE
215023
108
Revision B
4.3
Operating the Windrower
4.3.1
Operational Safety
CAUTION
Follow these safety precautions:
•
Wear close-fitting clothing and protective shoes with slipresistant soles.
•
Remove foreign objects from the machine and surrounding area.
•
Carry with you any protective clothing and personal safety devices that could be necessary through the day. DO NOT take chances.
You may need:
•
A hard hat
•
Protective glasses or goggles
•
Heavy gloves
•
A respirator or filter mask
•
Wet weather gear
•
Protect against noise. Wear suitable hearing protection such as ear muffs or ear plugs to protect against loud noises.
•
Follow all safety and operational instructions given in your operator
’ s manuals. If you do not have a header manual, get one from your Dealer and read it thoroughly.
•
NEVER attempt to start the engine or operate the machine except from the operator
’ s seat.
•
Check the operation of all controls in a safe clear area before starting work.
•
Check for excessive vibration and unusual noises. If there is any indication of trouble, shut down and inspect the machine. Follow proper shutdown procedure. For instructions, refer to
Shutting down the Engine, page 120
.
•
Operate only in daylight or good artificial light.
Figure 4.4: Safety Equipment
Figure 4.5: Safety Equipment
4.3.2
Break-in Period
From the factory the windrower is ready for normal operation. However, there are several items to check and watch out for during the first 150 hours.
DANGER
Before investigating an unusual sound or attempting to correct a problem, place ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK, shut off engine, and remove key.
IMPORTANT:
Until you become familiar with the sound and feel of your new windrower, be extra alert and attentive.
215023
109
Revision B
•
Avoid unnecessary idling. If engine will be idling longer than 5 minutes after reaching operating temperature, turn ignition key OFF to stop the engine.
•
Before taking the GSL out of PARK, let the hydraulic oil warm up to 32°C (90°F). You can view the hydraulic oil temperature on Run Screen 4 on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display. For instructions, refer to
Engine Cooling Data, page 132 .
•
Check engine oil level frequently. Watch for any signs of leakage. If oil must be added, refer to
.
•
Watch coolant gauge in cab for temperature rising beyond normal operating range. Check that coolant level at reserve tank (mounted next to radiator) stays between HOT and COLD marks on tank. For instructions, refer to
Engine Coolant Level, page 285 .
NOTE:
If overheating problems occur, check for coolant leaks.
•
Perform the break-in inspections specified in
5.2.1 Break-in Inspection Schedule, page 243
.
NOTE:
During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
NOTE:
If windrower must be driven in cold weather (below freezing), let engine idle for 3 minutes, and then operate at moderate speed until oil has warmed up.
4.3.3
Preseason Checks / Annual Service
Follow these steps at the beginning of each season.
CAUTION
•
Review the operator
’ s manual to refresh your memory on safety and operating recommendations.
•
Review all safety signs and other decals on the windrower and note hazard areas.
•
Be sure all shields and guards are properly installed and secured. Never alter or remove safety equipment.
•
Be sure you understand and have practiced safe use of all controls. Know the capacity and operating characteristics of the machine.
•
Store a properly stocked first aid kit and charged fire extinguisher on the windrower.
1.
Drain off excess hydraulic oil added for storage. For instructions, refer to
5.13.2 Draining Hydraulic Oil, page 322
.
2.
Remove any plastic bags and/or tape from all sealed openings (air cleaner intake, exhaust pipe, fuel tank).
3.
Charge and install the batteries. Be sure the terminals are clean and cables are connected securely.
4.
Adjust the tension on the air conditioning (A/C) compressor belt. For instructions, refer to
Conditioner Compressor Belts, page 272 .
5.
Distribute A/C refrigerant by cycling the A/C switch. For instructions, refer to
Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant
6.
Check the entire A/C system for leakage.
7.
Perform annual maintenance. For instructions, refer to
5.2 Windrower Break-In Inspections and Maintenance Schedule, page 243 .
215023
110
Revision B
Air Conditioning Compressor Coolant Cycling
IMPORTANT:
Perform the following steps whenever the machine is first started after storage for more than one week:
1.
Press the reduce (
–
) BLOWER SPEED switch (A) repeatedly until the lowest fan setting is reached.
2.
Press the red area on the TEMPERATURE CONTROL switch (F) repeatedly until maximum heating is reached.
3.
Press the A/C control (E) to OFF.
4.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
5.
Operate the windrower at low idle until engine is warm.
F
E
D
A
B
C
Figure 4.6: Climate Control
A - Blower Toggle Button
C - Recirculating Air Button
E - Air Conditioning Button
B - Outside Air Button
D - Windshield Defog/Defrost
F - Temperature Control
4.3.4
Daily Checks and Maintenance
Perform the following checks and recommended maintenance before operating the windrower every day:
1.
Check the machine for leaks.
NOTE:
Use proper procedure when searching for pressurized fluid leaks. For instructions, refer to
2.
Check for missing or broken parts.
3.
Clean the windows and mirrors to ensure good visibility in all directions. Stand on the platform to access the rear window. Hold onto the handholds on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips to wash the front window.
4.
Clean all lights and reflective surfaces to maintain visibility to others.
5.
Perform daily maintenance. For instructions, refer to
5.2 Windrower Break-In Inspections and Maintenance Schedule, page 243 .
215023
111
Revision B
Filling Fuel Tank
The symbol inside the fuel gauge on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display will signal the Operator when the fuel level is low. Fill fuel tank daily, preferably at the end of the day
’ s operation to help prevent condensation in the tank.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
WARNING
•
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOT smoke or allow flame or sparks near fuel tank when refueling.
•
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
•
To avoid electric discharge and the risk of a fire or explosion, ensure that the fuel delivery system is properly bonded and grounded. A bonded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive and unbroken connection between all components of the fuel delivery system (fuel supply tank, transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others). A wire connection from the fuel delivery system to the machine chassis will equalize the static electric potential between the two machines, further reducing the chance of a static electric discharge. A properly grounded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive connection from the fuel delivery system tank to earth ground to allow static and electrical charge dissipation.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT allow tank to empty. Running out of fuel can cause air locks and/or contamination of the fuel system. For instructions, refer to
.
1.
Stop the windrower and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Clean the area around the fuel filler cap (A).
3.
Turn fuel filler cap (A) counterclockwise until loose.
Remove cap.
4.
Fill tank with approved fuel. For fuel type and quantity, refer to the manual
’ s inside back cover.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT completely fill the tank as space is required for expansion. A filled tank could overflow if exposed to a rise in temperature, such as direct sunlight.
5.
Replace fuel tank filler cap (A), and turn cap clockwise until it clicks.
A
Figure 4.7: Fuel Tank Filler Cap
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
The symbol inside the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display will signal the
Operator when DEF level is low.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
112
Revision B
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Clean around filler cap (A).
3.
Turn cap (A) counterclockwise until loose and remove cap.
NOTE:
Filler cap for DEF tank is blue and the nozzle dispenser is smaller than that of the fuel tank.
A
Figure 4.8: DEF Tank
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
4.
Fill tank with approved DEF. For specifications, refer to the inside back cover.
IMPORTANT:
DEF is corrosive. Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shovelled into a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
IMPORTANT:
If the windrower temperature is going to be below 0°C
(32°F), do NOT fill the DEF tank more than 75% full. When freezing, the DEF fluid will expand by approximately 7%. For storage information, refer to
5.
Replace filler cap (A) and turn clockwise until tight.
Checking Engine Oil Level
Check engine oil level frequently and watch for any signs of leakage.
A
Figure 4.9: DEF Tank
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
NOTE:
During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
NOTE:
Oil can be checked without opening the hood.
215023
113
Revision B
1.
Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the filter and drain plug.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Wait about 5 minutes.
4.
Remove dipstick (A) by turning it counterclockwise to unlock.
5.
Wipe dipstick clean and reinsert it into engine.
A
6.
Remove dipstick again and check oil level. Oil level should be between LOW (L) and HIGH (H). If below the LOW mark, add oil.
NOTE:
Adding 1.9 liters (2 U.S. quarts) will raise the level from
LOW to HIGH. To add oil, refer to
7.
Replace dipstick and turn it clockwise to lock.
Figure 4.10: Dipstick Location
8.
Grasp hood by louver (A) and lower until hood engages latch.
NOTE:
Check that latch lever is not tilted to ensure hood is latched.
Figure 4.11: Engine Oil Level
A
215023
114
Figure 4.12: Engine Compartment
Revision B
4.3.5
Engine Operation
Starting the Engine
DANGER
•
Avoid possible injury or death from a runaway machine.
•
This machine has safety devices which allow the engine to start only when the ground speed lever (GSL) is in PARK, the steering wheel is locked in the PARK position, and the HEADER ENGAGE switch is in the OFF position. Under NO circumstances are these devices to be deliberately rewired or misadjusted so that the engine can be started with controls out of NEUTRAL.
•
Do NOT start the engine by shorting across the starter or starter relay terminals. If normal starting circuitry is bypassed, the machine will start with the drive engaged and move.
•
Start the engine only from operator
’ s seat with controls in PARK. NEVER start the engine while standing on ground.
NEVER try to start the engine with someone under or near the machine.
•
Before starting the engine, be sure there is plenty of ventilation to avoid asphyxiation.
IMPORTANT:
Before starting the windrower, check fluid level of the following, and add fluid if necessary:
•
Engine oil
– refer to
Checking Engine Oil Level, page 113
•
Hydraulic oil
– refer to
5.7.3 Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281
•
Gearbox oil
– refer to
5.7.7 Checking Engine Gearbox Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant, page 286
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT tow the machine to start the engine. Damage to hydrostatic drives will result.
NOTE:
Before taking the GSL out of PARK, let the hydraulic oil warm up to 32°C (90°F). You can view the hydraulic oil temperature on Run Screen 4 on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display. For instructions, refer to
Viewing Engine Cooling Data, page 132 .
NOTE:
When the console receives a wake-up signal, the console awakens from sleep mode and closes the battery disconnect relay. The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) goes into a boot-up sequence that takes approximately 40 seconds. The following items trigger a wake-up signal for the console:
•
Key switch ignition or accessory positions
•
Cab door switch
•
Horn button
•
Hazards button
•
Field lights button
•
Clearance lights button
•
Road lights button
•
High beam button
215023
115
Revision B
1.
Before starting the engine, ensure engine exhaust pipe (A) is not covered or obstructed.
A
2.
Ensure the cab-forward or engine-forward directional lock (A) is engaged at the base of the steering column.
Figure 4.13: Engine Exhaust
A
3.
Move GSL (A) into PARK (C).
4.
Turn the steering wheel until it locks. It may be possible to move the steering wheel slightly in the locked position.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT attempt to force the wheel out of the locked position or damage to the steering system may occur.
5.
Fasten seat belt.
6.
Push HEADER ENGAGE switch (B) to ensure it is in the OFF position.
Figure 4.14: Direction Locks
A
C
Figure 4.15: Operator Controls
B
A
215023
116
Revision B
7.
Turn IGNITION switch (A) to the ON position; the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) display (B) will illuminate. If the
HPT is still booting up, wait for WAIT TO START (WTS) symbol (C) to disappear before trying to start engine.
8.
Check that red PARK symbol light (D) is ON and that there are no error messages on screen.
9.
Press HORN button (E) three times prior to starting the engine.
B
E
D
C
Figure 4.16: Console and HPT Run Screen
10. Turn the IGNITION switch to crank (A).
NOTE:
When the engine starts and the header is not engaged, the
HPT will display the header disengaged page (B).
IMPORTANT:
•
Do NOT operate the starter for longer than 15 seconds at a time.
•
If the engine does not start, wait at least 2 minutes before trying again.
•
If you crank the engine for more than 30 seconds within a 2-minute period, the engine will lock the starter circuit to prevent overheating, and a flashing WTS symbol will appear on the display. Wait for the WTS symbol to stop flashing before attempting to crank engine again.
•
If the engine still does not start, refer to
Troubleshooting Tips, page 118 .
A
B
Figure 4.17: HPT Header Disengaged Screen
A
215023
117
Revision B
NOTE:
When the engine temperature is below 5°C (40°F), the engine will cycle through a period where it appears to labor until it warms up. Do NOT operate the engine above 1500 rpm until the
HPT engine temperature gauge is above the blue range (A).
A
Figure 4.18: HPT No Header Screen
Engine Start Troubleshooting Tips
If the windrower will not start normally, refer to the following troubleshooting table:
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT tow the machine to start engine. Damage to the hydrostatic drives will result.
Table 4.1 Engine Start Troubleshooting
Problem
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Operator
’ s station not locked
Neutral interlock misadjusted
No fuel to engine
Old fuel in tank
Water, dirt, or air in fuel system
Improper type of fuel
Crankcase oil too heavy
Low battery output
Solution
•
Move GSL to NEUTRAL
•
Move steering wheel to locked (centered) position
•
Disengage HEADER switch
•
Adjust position of operator
’ s station
•
Ensure lock is engaged
•
Contact MacDon Dealer
•
Fill empty fuel tank
•
Replace clogged filter
•
Check for blocked or damaged fuel lines
•
Drain tank
•
Refill with fresh fuel
•
Drain, flush, fill, and prime system
•
Drain tank
•
Refill with correct fuel
•
Replace with recommended oil
•
Test the battery
•
Check battery electrolyte level
215023
118
1019655
Revision B
Table 4.1
Engine Start Troubleshooting (continued)
Problem
Poor battery connection
Solution
•
Clean and tighten loose connections
Faulty starter
Wiring shorted, circuit breaker open
Faulty injectors
•
Contact MacDon Dealer
•
Check continuity of wiring and breaker (manually reset)
•
Contact MacDon Dealer
Programming the Eco Engine Control
Engine speed can be programmed to operate at reduced rpm to lower fuel and diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) consumption, and to reduce in-cab noise levels. The set-point for engine speed can be adjusted in increments of 100 rpm from 1800 to 2400 rpm in the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) QuickMenu. While the header is engaged, the system can easily be activated and deactivated (depending on field conditions) using the Eco
Engine Control (EEC) button (A) on the console. When the engine is running at less than full speed, you will notice a small reduction in the maximum reel, draper, and ground speeds.
The EEC feature is turned ON or OFF by pressing the EEC button (A) on the operator
’ s console. EEC will only be available when the header is engaged. The GREEN LEAF symbol on the
HPT display indicates that the EEC is active. If EEC is turned OFF, or the header is disengaged, the LEAF symbol will appear grayed out. The EEC throttle limit can be adjusted at any time.
1.
To open the QuickMenu system while in any run screen, press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT.
A
Figure 4.19: Eco Engine Control (EEC) Button
1014733
A
Figure 4.20: HPT Scroll Knob/Select Button
1014560
215023
119
Revision B
2.
Use the HPT scroll knob to move the red cursor to the ECO
THROTTLE LIMIT (A) value.
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob to select the ECO THROTTLE
LIMIT (A) adjustment function.
4.
Adjust the ENGINE rpm value using the HPT scroll knob.
5.
Press the HPT scroll knob to program the adjusted value.
A
1015072
Figure 4.21: HPT Display
Shutting down the Engine
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
IMPORTANT:
Before stopping the engine, run at low idle for approximately 5 minutes to cool hot engine parts (and allow turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available).
1.
Lower the header.
2.
Place ground speed lever (GSL) (B) into PARK.
A
3.
Lock the steering wheel.
4.
Turn ignition key (A) counterclockwise to the OFF position.
B
Figure 4.22: Console
215023
120
Revision B
Engine Temperature
The engine temperature gauge (A) is displayed in the lower left corner of the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display.
Normal engine operating temperature is indicated when the needle is in the green range of the gauge.
If the engine temperature exceeds 105°C (221°F), the needle will move to the red range of the gauge. Depending on the temperature, the engine will trigger a fault code and an amber caution or red stop light will illuminate on the HPT display.
A
When the engine temperature is below 5°C (40°F), the engine will cycle through a period where it appears to labor until the engine warms up. Do NOT operate engine above 1500 rpm until the HPT engine temperature gauge is above the blue range.
1015077
NOTE:
Figure 4.23: HPT Display
–
Engine Temperature Gauge
Before taking the ground speed lever (GSL) out of PARK, let the hydraulic oil warm up to 32°C (90°F). You can view the hydraulic oil temperature on Run Screen 4 on the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) display. For instructions, refer to
Viewing Engine Cooling Data, page 132
.
Engine Oil Pressure
The nominal engine oil pressure is 69 kPa (10 psi) at low idle and 380 kPa (55.1 psi) at maximum rated speed.
If the oil pressure drops below the preset level of 52 kPa (7.5 psi), the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) displays an engine telltale fault code to identify the issue.
If the red STOP ENGINE light illuminates, stop the engine IMMEDIATELY and investigate.
If the amber CAUTION light illuminates, stopping immediately is optional. You may continue operations and investigate later, but you are STRONGLY advised to monitor the situation carefully.
Exhaust System Cleaning
The exhaust aftertreatment system uses diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) and selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology to reduce the emission of nitrogen oxides (NOx). The process involves injecting DEF (a nitrogenous compound which decomposes into ammonia) into the exhaust over a catalyst. The ammonia reacts with NOx, producing harmless nitrogen and water.
Automatic exhaust system cleaning events maintain the performance of the aftertreatment system by increasing exhaust temperatures in order to remove the buildup of crystallized DEF. Automatic cleaning occurs any time during machine operation as long as the INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch is OFF. Turn on the INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch if the environment is not suitable for high exhaust temperatures (e.g., inside a building). The INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING switch is intended as a temporary measure. If the INHIBIT switch is left on for an extended period, the engine will derate until manual SCR conditioning is performed.
Activate the MANUAL SCR CONDITIONING exhaust system cleaning if the automatic exhaust system cleaning was deactivated during normal operation. Engine speed may vary between 1000 and 1400 rpm during manual exhaust system cleaning.
215023
121
Revision B
Activating the Exhaust Aftertreatment Functions
Follow these steps to access the exhaust aftertreatment functions on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display.
1.
To display the main menu, press the soft key 5 / menu button (A) on the HPT.
2.
To display the manual / inhibit SCR conditioning switches, press soft key 5 / menu button (A) next to the EXHAUST
AFTERTREATMENT icon (B).
A
3.
To inhibit SCR conditioning, press soft key 5 / menu button (A) next to the INHIBIT SCR CONDITIONING icon (B), and hold for 3 seconds. The SCR CONDITIONING INHIBIT icon (C) will appear under the engine rpm display.
Figure 4.24: HPT Display
B
C
B
A
4.
To select manual SCR conditioning, press soft key 4 (A) next to the MANUAL SCR CONDITIONING icon (B), and hold for
3 seconds. The high exhaust system temperature (HEST) icon (C) appears highlighted under the rpm display during system cleaning.
NOTE:
The HEST icon also appears during normal operation when exhaust temperature exceeds the maximum temperature threshold. The icon remains on until the exhaust temperature drops below the minimum temperature threshold.
Figure 4.25: HPT Display
C
Figure 4.26: HPT Display
B
A
215023
122
Revision B
Operator Console Buttons
Figure 4.27: Operator Console Buttons
B
C
D
H
K
A
E
G
F
N
H
R
M
L
P
Q
Z
S
U
V
T
Y
X
W
AA
AB
AC
AD
AE
A - Double Window Attachment (DWA) / Swath
Roller
D - Deck Shift Draper Left Side Delivery
G - Beacon Lights
L - Clearance Lights
P - Windshield Defog/Defrost
S - Blower Speed (Manual Mode)
V - Cab Air Recirculation
Y - Wiper Fluid
AB - Float Menu Shortcut
AE - Header Settings Shortcut
B - Deck Shift Draper Right Side Delivery
E - Draper / Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) Speed
H - Turn Signals
M - Road Lights
Q - Air Conditioning
T - Horn
W - Eco Engine Control (EEC)
Z - Windshield Wiper (Front)
AC - One-Touch-Return Shortcut
C - Deck Shift Draper Center Delivery
F - Cab-Forward Field Lights
K - Hazard Lights
N - High Beams
R - Temperature
U - Auto Fan Speed
X - Windshield Wiper (Rear)
AA - Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT)
Shortcuts
AD - Windrower Settings Shortcut
215023
123
Revision B
Entering and Exiting the Windrower
CAUTION
To prevent slipping and possible injury, ALWAYS face the windrower and use the hand rail when dismounting (or mounting). NEVER attempt to get on or off a moving windrower. Before leaving the operator's seat for any reason:
•
Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever in PARK position and the steering wheel in locked position
(centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
•
Fully lower the header and reel.
•
Disengage the header drives.
•
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition.
•
Turn off the lights unless required for inspection purposes.
•
Release the seat belt.
•
Turn off the wipers.
•
Raise the armrest and steering wheel for easier exit and re-entry.
•
Lock the cab door when leaving the windrower unattended. (When the door is locked, it can still be opened from inside the cab.)
A swing-away platform with stairs (A) is provided on the left side of the windrower to accommodate cab-forward and engine-forward access to the operator
’ s station as well as several maintenance tasks.
B
Two doors (B) are provided for cab entry and exit in either cabforward mode or engine-forward mode. Enter the cab using the door opposite the operator
’ s console.
A
Figure 4.28: Platforms and Doors
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit
The windrower has the following selectable ground speed limits depending on seat position:
Direction of Travel
Cab-forward (Standard drive wheel)
Engine-forward (Standard drive wheel)
Cab-forward (High torque drive wheel)
Engine-forward (High torque drive wheel)
Selectable Ground Speed Limits
16, 19, 23, 29 km/h (10, 12, 14, 16, 18 mph)
16, 29, 43 km/h (10, 18, 27 mph)
13, 19, 23, 29 km/h (8, 12, 14, 16, 18 mph)
16, 34.6 km/h (10, 21.5 mph)
To adjust the ground speed limit, follow these steps:
215023
124
Revision B
1.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) while in any run screen to open the
QuickMenu system.
A
2.
To scroll to the GROUND SPEED LIMIT selectable area (A), use the HPT scroll knob to move the red cursor.
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob to select, and scroll to adjust the ground speed limit values.
NOTE:
Ground speed limit is also changed by simultaneously pressing the GSL shift button on back of GSL and scrolling.
Figure 4.29: HPT Scroll Knob / Select Button
1014560
A
1014825
Figure 4.30: HPT Display
Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode
CAUTION
Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly for familiarization. Avoid the common tendency of new
Operators to oversteer.
In cab-forward mode, the operator
’ s station is facing away from the engine. If necessary, swivel operator
’ s seat to cab-forward position as follows:
WARNING
Do NOT drive windrower on road in cab-forward configuration unless it is equipped with the proper lighting and markings for cab-forward road travel.
WARNING
Outside of North America, do NOT drive windrower on the road in cab-forward mode, as lighting/reflector visibility will not be compliant with road regulations.
Figure 4.31: Cab-Forward Mode
215023
125
Revision B
1.
Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in PARK. Engine can be running.
IMPORTANT:
If GSL is NOT in PARK, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operator
’ s station.
2.
Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at base of steering column.
3.
Turn steering wheel counterclockwise to pivot operator
’ s station clockwise 180° until pin engages latch to secure operator
’ s station in new position.
4.
Ensure seat belt is fastened.
5.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
6.
Set the desired ground speed limit. For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124 .
C
B
A
Figure 4.32: Operator Station
B
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7.
Slowly push throttle (A) to full forward (operating speed).
8.
Move the GSL (B) out of PARK and slowly forward to desired speed.
NOTE:
The transmission is most efficient with the engine at full speed and the GSL fully forward. The windrower can be equipped with an automatic steering system for use in the field. An automated steering system is available as an option and can be installed by a MacDon Dealer. The GSL has been pre-wired at the factory with a switch. For more information, refer to
6.2.1 Automated Steering Systems, page 380 .
A
Figure 4.33: Console
Driving in Reverse in Cab-Forward Mode
WARNING
Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear of the machine to travel.
215023
126
Revision B
1.
Move throttle lever (A) to a mid-range position.
NOTE:
Reversing in low speed range and at reduced engine speed is recommended since steering will be less sensitive than at higher speed settings.
CAUTION
Check again to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
2.
Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (B) rearward to desired speed.
A
B
Figure 4.34: Console
3.
Steer as shown.
Driving Forward in Engine-Forward Mode
In the engine-forward mode, the operator
’ s station is facing toward the engine. If necessary, swivel the operator
’ s station to engine-forward position as follows:
Figure 4.35: Cab-Forward Mode
Figure 4.36: Engine-Forward
–
Seat Faces Engine
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
215023
127
Revision B
1.
Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in PARK and lock
(center) the steering wheel. The engine can be running.
IMPORTANT:
If GSL is NOT in PARK, damage to the GSL cable may result when swivelling operator
’ s station.
2.
Pull up on knob (B) and hold to release latch (C) at the base of the steering column.
3.
Turn the steering wheel clockwise to pivot the operator
’ s station counterclockwise 180° until the pin engages the latch to secure the operator
’ s station in the new position.
4.
Start the engine (if not already running). For instructions, refer to
Starting the Engine, page 115 .
C
B
A
Figure 4.37: Engine-Forward
–
Seat Faces Engine
5.
Use the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to adjust the maximum speed setting to 43 km/h (27 mph). For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page
6.
Slowly push throttle (A) to full forward (operating speed).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
7.
Slowly move the GSL (B) forward to the desired speed.
NOTE:
The transmission is most efficient with the engine at full speed and the GSL fully forward.
A
B
Figure 4.38: Console
CAUTION
Operate both steering wheel and ground speed lever slowly while becoming familiar with the machine. Steering can be sensitive; avoid the tendency of new Operators to overcorrect.
8.
If more tractive (lugging) power is required (e.g., when driving up a ramp, up a hill, or out of a ditch): a.
Move the GSL (B) closer to NEUTRAL.
b.
Reduce max speed setting to 16 km/h (10 mph) by holding the shift button on the GSL while scrolling downwards, or by reducing the max speed setting using the QuickMenu. For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124 .
9.
Once the lugging condition no longer exists: a.
Set GSL (B) to NOT MORE THAN HALF maximum forward speed.
b.
For standard drive wheel: Adjust the maximum speed setting back to 43 km/h (27 mph). For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124 .
For high torque drive wheel: Adjust the maximum speed setting back to 34.6 km/h (21.5 mph). For
A
B
Figure 4.39: Console
215023
128
Revision B
instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page 124
Driving in Reverse in Engine-Forward Mode
WARNING
Back up slowly. Steering is opposite to normal when reversing. Hold steering wheel at the bottom and turn wheel in direction you want the rear of the machine to travel.
1.
Move throttle lever (A) to a mid-range position.
B
NOTE:
Reversing in low speed range and at reduced engine speed is recommended since steering will be less sensitive than at higher speed settings.
2.
Move the ground speed lever (GSL) (B) rearward to desired speed.
A
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.40: Console
3.
Steer as shown.
Figure 4.41: Steering the Windrower
Spin Turning
Hydrostatic steering provides significantly more maneuverability than mechanical steering.
CAUTION
Be sure area is clear before making turns. Although windrower pivots on the spot, the ends of the header travel faster and in a large arc.
215023
129
Revision B
1.
Move ground speed lever (GSL) (A) out of PARK towards the seat and hold.
2.
Slowly turn the steering wheel in the desired direction of turn. The windrower will pivot between the drive wheels.
3.
To increase the turn radius, slowly move the GSL away from
NEUTRAL. Remember that this will increase ground speed as well.
4.
To stop the turn, slowly turn the steering wheel back to its centered position.
A
Figure 4.42: Console
Stopping
WARNING
Do NOT move the ground speed lever (GSL) rapidly back to NEUTRAL. You may be thrown forward by a sudden stop and the wheels may skid, reducing steering control. Always wear a seat belt when operating the windrower.
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
1.
Anticipate stopping and SLOWLY return the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) to NEUTRAL and into PARK.
2.
Turn the steering wheel until it locks.
3.
Move throttle lever (B) to low-idle position.
IMPORTANT:
Before stopping the engine, run at low idle for approximately 5 minutes to cool hot engine parts and allow the turbocharger to slow down while engine oil pressure is available.
NOTE:
Avoid unnecessary idling. Stop the engine if it will be idling for longer than 5 minutes.
NOTE:
Brakes are automatically engaged when steering wheel is locked in PARK position.
4.
Turn the ignition key counterclockwise to OFF position.
A
B
Figure 4.43: Console
215023
130
Revision B
Viewing Performance Data
You can check current performance information on Run Screen 3 on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display.
Figure 4.44: Run Screen 3
–
Performance Data
A
B
C
D
E
A - Sub Acres
D - Fuel Used per Acre
B - Acres per Hour
E - Header Height
To display the windrower
’ s performance data:
1.
Press soft key 3 (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) to open the PERFORMANCE DATA display.
NOTE:
Soft keys 1
–
5 also function as buttons within menus.
NOTE:
The sub acres can also be reset from this screen. Press the
HPT scroll knob to highlight and select the sub acres. If you press the HPT scroll knob a second time, the message
RESET OR EXIT appears on the display. Select RESET to reset the sub acres to zero and return to the same highlighted sub acres. Select EXIT or press the BACK or HOME button to dismiss the message without resetting the sub acres.
You can view:
•
Sub acres (A)
•
Acres per hour (B)
•
Fuel used per hour (C)
•
Fuel used per acre (D)
C - Fuel Used per Hour
F - Header Tilt
Figure 4.45: HPT Display
215023
131
F
A
1019422
Revision B
Viewing Engine Cooling Data
You can check current engine cooling information on Run Screen 4 on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display.
Figure 4.46: Run Screen 4
–
Cooling Data
A
B
C
D
E F
A - Fan Speed
D - Engine Coolant Temperature
B - Hydraulic Oil Temperature
E - Header Height
To display the windrower
’ s cooling data:
1.
Press soft key 4 (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) to open the COOLING DATA display.
NOTE:
Soft keys 1
–
5 also function as buttons within menus.
NOTE:
The engine fan speed will increase/decrease, depending on cooling requirements. A small fan icon will appear beside the icon of the parameter that is currently controlling the fan.
NOTE:
The engine fan will automatically reverse on a set time interval, or when one of the system temperatures gets high enough. No operator input is required to reverse the fan.
You can view
•
Fan speed
•
Engine air intake temperature
•
Engine coolant temperature
C - Engine Air Intake Temperature
F - Header Tilt
Figure 4.47: HPT Display
A
1019423
215023
132
Revision B
4.3.6
Transporting
Driving on Road in Engine-Forward Mode
The M1170 Windrower is designed to be driven on the road with the engine facing forward to provide better visibility for the Operator and improved stability for the machine.
Windrowers sold in North America can also be driven on roads in cab-forward mode, with or without a header attached, but at a reduced speed, under restricted conditions. For instructions, refer to
Driving on Road in Cab-Forward Mode, page
CAUTION
Windrowers sold outside of North America: Do NOT drive windrower on the road in cab-forward mode, as lighting and marking will not be compliant with road regulations.
WARNING
Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
WARNING
When driving windrower on public roadways:
•
Obey all highway traffic regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles in front and rear of windrower if required by law.
•
Use slow-moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
•
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
WARNING
Do NOT drive windrower on a road or highway at night or in conditions that reduce visibility, such as fog or rain. The width of the windrower may not be apparent under these conditions.
CAUTION
Check local laws for width regulations and lighting and marking requirements before transporting on roads.
Before driving windrower on a roadway:
1.
Ensure header engage switch (A) is off (down position).
2.
Clean and ensure flashing amber lights, red tail lights, and head lights are working properly.
3.
Clean all reflective surfaces and slow moving vehicle signs.
4.
Adjust interior rear view mirror and clean windows.
5.
Ensure header (if attached) is fully raised and header lift safety props are engaged.
6.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
For instructions, refer to
.
A
Figure 4.48: Header Engage Switch
215023
133
Revision B
7.
If towing a header, refer to
Towing Header with Windrower, page 138 .
8.
Press switch (A) for road lights. Always use these lights when driving windrower on roads.
9.
Press switch (B) for high/low beams as required when other vehicles are approaching.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use field lights on the road; other drivers may be confused by them.
10. Press switch (C) to activate beacons.
11. Press switch (D) to activate hazard lights.
C
B
Figure 4.49: Light Switches
12. Set the desired maximum ground speed limit. For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page
NOTE:
Maximum ground speed can be set while the windrower is moving. Anticipate acceleration or deceleration if changing maximum speed while moving.
13. Slowly push throttle (A) to full forward (operating speed).
B
A
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
15. Move the GSL (B) out of PARK and slowly forward to desired speed.
16. If towing a header, refer to
Towing Header with Windrower, page 138 .
Figure 4.50: Console
D
A
215023
134
Figure 4.51: Towing a Header
Revision B
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
•
Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
•
Anticipate turns and steep slopes by slowing down well in advance. Before making an abrupt turn, pull back on the ground speed lever (GSL) as steering is more responsive at reduced speeds.
•
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
When traveling on steep slopes:
•
Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
•
Lower header.
•
If the ground speed is greater than or equal to 51 km/h (30 mph), the HPT will display a warning message (SLOW
DOWN) with an audible alert. Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
•
Do NOT exceed minimum speed setting.
•
Avoid loose gravel and slopes.
•
Do NOT tow a header.
•
If control of machine is lost, immediately pull GSL to NEUTRAL.
Driving on Road in Cab-Forward Mode
The M1170 Windrower is capable of being driven on the road in cab-forward mode, with or without a header attached, but at a reduced speed, under restricted conditions, and only for models sold in North America.
WARNING
Windrowers sold outside of North America: Do NOT drive windrower on the road in cab-forward mode, as lighting/ reflector visibility will not be compliant with road regulations.
WARNING
Collision between windrower and other vehicles may result in injury or death.
WARNING
When driving windrower on public roadways:
•
Obey all highway traffic regulations in your area. Use pilot vehicles in front and rear of windrower if required by law.
•
Use slow-moving vehicle emblem and flashing warning lights unless prohibited by law.
•
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
WARNING
Do NOT drive windrower on a road or highway at night or in conditions that reduce visibility, such as fog or rain. The width of the windrower may not be apparent under these conditions.
215023
135
Revision B
CAUTION
Check local laws for width regulations and lighting and marking requirements before transporting on roads.
Before driving windrower on a roadway:
1.
Clean flashing amber lights, red tail lights, and head lights, and check that they work properly.
2.
Clean all reflective surfaces and slow moving vehicle emblems.
3.
Adjust interior rear view mirror and clean windows.
4.
Ensure header engage switch (A) is off (down position).
A
Figure 4.52: Header Engage Switch
CAUTION
Do NOT raise the header too high. Make sure you have good visibility out of the cab and that motorists are able to see the header lights.
5.
Raise the header (if attached) enough to clear common obstacles, and then engage the header lift safety props.
6.
If width of attached header impedes other vehicle traffic, remove header and install a MacDon approved weight box.
For instructions, refer to
Preparing Windrower to Tow a Header, page 139
.
7.
Press switch (A) to turn on lights. Always use these lights on roads to provide warning to other vehicles.
D
8.
Use high/low switch (B) as required when other vehicles are approaching.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use field lights on the road; they may confuse other drivers.
9.
Press switch (C) to turn on beacons.
10. Press switch (D) to turn on hazard lights.
C
B
A
Figure 4.53: Light Switches
215023
136
Revision B
11. Set the desired maximum ground speed limit. For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page
NOTE:
Maximum ground speed can be set while the windrower is moving. Anticipate acceleration or deceleration if changing maximum speed while moving.
12. Slowly push throttle (A) to full forward (operating speed).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
13. Move the GSL (B) out of PARK and slowly forward to desired speed.
A
B
Figure 4.54: Console
WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death from loss of control:
•
Do NOT make abrupt changes in steering direction.
•
Anticipate turns and steep slopes by slowing down well in advance. Before making an abrupt turn, pull back on the ground speed lever (GSL) as steering is more responsive at reduced speeds.
•
Do NOT rapidly accelerate or decelerate while turning.
When traveling on steep slopes:
•
Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
•
Lower header.
•
If the ground speed is greater than or equal to 51 km/h (30 mph), the HPT will display a warning message (SLOW
DOWN) with an audible alert. Move GSL closer to NEUTRAL to reduce speed.
With header removed, steering control is reduced if weight is not added to drive wheels. If you must drive the windrower without header or MacDon weight system:
•
Do NOT exceed minimum speed setting.
•
Avoid loose gravel and slopes.
•
Do NOT tow a header.
•
If control of machine is lost, immediately pull ground speed lever (GSL) to NEUTRAL.
215023
137
Revision B
Towing Header with Windrower
The windrower can be used to tow a MacDon draper header that has the Slow Speed Transport option installed. Ensure the optional weight box is installed on the windrower to transfer weight to the lift arms. For instructions, refer to
Windrower to Tow a Header, page 139 .
WARNING
•
A windrower without a header or weight box must NOT be used to tow headers due to reduced traction and possible loss of control.
•
For towed equipment without brakes, do NOT exceed
32 km/h (20 mph).
CAUTION
•
To tow a header with an M1170 Windrower, the header must be equipped with the appropriate equipment to comply with local regulations.
•
Before towing, verify signal lighting and safety equipment is installed and functioning properly.
Figure 4.55: Towing a Header
•
Do NOT exceed the combined gross vehicle weight (CGVW) specified in Table
.
•
To prevent damage and/or loss of control, ensure the machine and attached equipment are within the following weight limits:
Table 4.2 Maximum Weight kg lb.
Maximum GVW (includes mounted implements)
Maximum CGVW (includes towed and mounted implements)
Maximum
Weight on both drive wheels (A)
Minimum
Maximum weight on both caster tires (B)
10,660
11,793
8618
4568
2744
23,500
26,000
19,000
10,070
6050
A
B
Figure 4.56: Maximum Weight
215023
138
Revision B
Preparing Windrower to Tow a Header
1.
Attach the header to the windrower. For instructions, refer to
Attaching a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 155
.
2.
Convert header to transport mode. For instructions, refer to header operator
’ s manual.
3.
Detach the header from the windrower. For instructions, refer to
Detaching a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 163 .
4.
Remove hairpin (D) and clevis pin (C) securing header support (B) to leg (A). Retain pins for attaching weight box.
5.
Remove header support (B) from windrower lift leg (A).
6.
Repeat above step for opposite support.
Figure 4.57: Windrower with Header
A
C
D
B
7.
Drive windrower so that lift legs (A) are positioned into the weight box (B) pockets. Raise lift legs slightly.
8.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
9.
Install locking pin (C) into pocket and secure with hairpin (D). Repeat for opposite leg.
NOTE:
Pins were previously removed from the header supports.
Figure 4.58: Draper Header Support
B
D
A
C
Figure 4.59: Windrower Lift Linkage
215023
139
Revision B
10. Attach slow speed transport hitch (A) to the weight box tongue (B) with drawbar pin, and secure with lynch pin.
Attach safety chain (C).
11. Connect hitch harness to electrical socket at front of weight box.
A
C
12. Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
13. Raise weight box until tow bar is level. The header is now ready for transport. For instructions, refer to
Header with Windrower, page 138
.
Figure 4.60: Weight Box
B
Figure 4.61: Towing a Header
Towing the Windrower
–
Emergency
Towing the windrower is NOT recommended. If the windrower gets stuck, or must be towed onto a truck or trailer, follow these steps:
IMPORTANT:
•
NEVER attempt to start the windrower by towing it. Serious damage to the final drives may occur.
•
Failure to disengage final drives before towing will result in serious transmission damage.
•
Only tow the windrower for a short distance, on level ground, and at slow speed.
DANGER
Uncontrolled heavy equipment. With final drives disengaged (turned inward), brakes and steering do NOT work. After towing, place blocks under front and rear wheels to prevent uncontrolled movement.
215023
140
Revision B
1.
Before towing the vehicle, disengage the final drives. For instructions, refer to
Engaging and Disengaging Final
.
2.
Use attachment points (A) to tow if windrower gets stuck, or when pulling onto a truck or trailer for transport.
3.
When towing is complete, place blocks under front and rear wheels to prevent uncontrolled movement.
4.
Engage final drives. For instructions, refer to
Disengaging Final Drives, page 141
.
Figure 4.62: Emergency Towing
Engaging and Disengaging Final Drives
Disengage and engage final drives as follows:
WARNING
Park on a flat, level surface, and chock wheels to prevent unexpected rolling when disengaging final drive.
1.
Remove two bolts (A) at the center of the drive wheel.
2.
Remove cap (B) and flip it over so that the convex side faces in. The cap presses a pin that disengages the gearbox.
3.
Reinstall bolts (A) to secure cap (B).
4.
Repeat the previous steps on the other drive wheel.
5.
After towing, reverse cap (B) to engage the final drives. Be sure the pin at the center of the wheel pops out to engage the drive.
NOTE:
Engaging the final drives may require rocking the wheels slightly.
B
A
Figure 4.63: Final Drives
–
10 Bolt
A
B
A
215023
141
Figure 4.64: Final Drives
–
12 Bolt (Optional)
Revision B
4.3.7
Storing the Windrower
Follow these steps to prepare your windrower for storage at the end of the season:
WARNING
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and can be flammable.
CAUTION
NEVER operate engine in a enclosed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
CAUTION
When working with batteries, remove metal jewelry and NEVER allow a metal object (such as a wrench) to touch across the battery terminals. A short circuit can produce an extremely hot spark causing severe injuries.
1.
Retract all cylinders to protect the cylinder rods from corrosion during storage:
•
Header lift cylinders
•
Float cylinders
•
Header tilt cylinder
2.
Check for broken components and order replacements from your Dealer. Attending to these items right away will save time and effort at beginning of next season.
3.
Tighten loose hardware and replace any missing hardware. Refer to
8.1 Torque Specifications, page 401 .
4.
Clean the windrower thoroughly.
5.
Repaint all worn or chipped painted surfaces to prevent rust.
6.
Fill the fuel tank to prevent condensation.
7.
Drain the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank when storing for 6 MONTHS OR LONGER . For instructions, refer to
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank, page 253 .
8.
Change the oil at the end of the season to remove acids and other by-products of combustion from the engine.
9.
Test engine coolant antifreeze concentration to ensure it is sufficient to protect engine against lowest expected temperature.
10. Drain the windshield washer tank or ensure the fluid can endure the lowest expected temperatures.
11. Lubricate the windrower thoroughly, leaving excess grease on fittings to keep moisture out of bearings. Apply grease to exposed threads and sliding surfaces of components.
12. Remove the batteries. For instructions, refer to
Removing a Battery, page 331 . Bring batteries to full charge, and store
in a cool, dry place not subject to freezing.
13. If possible, block up windrower to take weight off tires. If this is not possible, increase tire pressure by 25% for storage.
Adjust to recommended operating pressure before next use.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT exceed the maximum pressure specified on the tire sidewall.
14. Store the windrower in a dry, protected place.
15. If stored outside, seal the air cleaner intake and exhaust pipe with plastic bags and/or waterproof tape.
16. If stored outside, cover the windrower with a breathable cover. Avoid plastic covers that can trap humidity.
215023
142
Revision B
4.4
Attaching and Detaching a Header
4.4.1
A40DX Auger Header
Attaching an A40DX Auger Header
The windrower may have an optional self-aligning hydraulic center-link that allows vertical position control of the centerlink from the cab.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Remove hairpin (A) from pin (B), and remove the pin from header supports (C) on both sides of the header.
C
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
2.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
B
A
Figure 4.65: Header Support
IMPORTANT:
When lowering the header lift legs without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float springs tension is fully released to prevent damage to the header lift linkages.
NOTE:
If not prompted by the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display to remove float, remove float manually by doing the following:
Figure 4.66: Header Float Springs
215023
143
Revision B
3.
Press HPT scroll knob (A) to highlight QuickMenu options.
4.
Rotate HPT scroll knob (A) to highlight the HEADER FLOAT symbol (B) and press the scroll knob to select.
5.
On FLOAT ADJUST PAGE, press soft key 3 (A) to remove float.
Figure 4.67: HPT Display
B
A
A
6.
Press the HEADER DOWN switch (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
7.
For hydraulic center-link with self-alignment, press the REEL
UP switch (B) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.68: HPT Display
A
Figure 4.69: GSL
B
215023
144
Revision B
8.
If the hydraulic center-link self-alignment kit is not installed, relocate pin (A) in frame linkage as required to raise the center-link (B) until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
A
B
Figure 4.70: Hydraulic Center-Link without
Self-Alignment Kit
9.
Drive the windrower slowly forward so feet (A) on the windrower enter supports (B) on the header. Continue to drive slowly forward until the feet engage the supports, and the header nudges forward.
A
B
Figure 4.71: Header Support
10. If the hydraulic center-link self-alignment kit is installed, adjust position of the center-link cylinder (A) with switches on the GSL until the hook (B) is above the header attachment pin.
11. For hydraulic center-link without self-alignment, push down on the rod end of link cylinder (C) until the hook engages and locks onto the header pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release (D) must be down to enable the self-locking mechanism. If the release is open (up), manually push it down after the hook engages the header pin.
12. For hydraulic center-link with self-alignment, lower centerlink (A) onto the header with REEL DOWN switch on the
GSL until it locks into position (hook release [D] is down).
13. For hydraulic center-link with self-alignment, check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
A
Figure 4.72: Hydraulic Center-Link
D
C
B
215023
145
Revision B
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
14. Press the HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
15. If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows: a.
Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b.
Continue to hold the switch for 3
–
4 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
NOTE:
This procedure may have to be repeated if there is air in the system.
16. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
17. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) toward you to release, and then rotate toward header to lower the safety prop onto the cylinder.
b.
Repeat for the opposite lift cylinder.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the safety props engage over the cylinder piston rods. If the safety prop does NOT engage properly, raise the header until the safety prop fits over the rod.
Figure 4.73: GSL
Figure 4.74: Safety Prop Lever
A
18. Install clevis pin (A) through the support and foot, and secure with a hairpin. Repeat for the opposite support.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted and the hairpin is installed behind bracket.
A
A
Figure 4.75: Header Support
215023
146
Revision B
19. Remove the lynch pin from clevis pin (A) in stand (B).
20. Hold stand (B) and remove pin (A).
21. Move the stand to storage position by inverting and relocating onto bracket as shown. Reinsert clevis pin (A) and secure with the lynch pin.
22. Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
23. Repeat for the opposite side.
A
Figure 4.76: Header Stand
A
Figure 4.77: Safety Prop Lever
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
24. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on
GSL to fully lower the header.
A
Figure 4.78: GSL
B
215023
147
Revision B
25. Press rotary scroll knob (A) on the HPT to highlight the
QuickMenu options.
26. Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight the HEADER FLOAT symbol (B). Press the scroll knob to select.
A
Figure 4.79: HPT Display
27. Turn scroll knob (A) to highlight left (B) or right (C) float and press knob (A) to activate selection.
28. Rotate scroll knob (A) to adjust the float setting and press the knob when finished.
IMPORTANT:
Float adjustments of 1.0 (out of 10) change the header weight at the cutterbar by approximately 91 kg (200 lb.).
Adjust the float in increments of 0.05 to optimize field performance.
29. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
30. Grasp one end of the auger header and lift. Lifting force should be 335
–
380 N (75
–
85 lbf) at both ends.
31. Proceed to
Connecting A40DX Auger Hydraulics, page 148
.
B
C
Figure 4.80: HPT Display
Connecting A40DX Auger Hydraulics
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
1.
Approach platform/stair unit (A) on the left cab-forward side of the windrower and ensure the cab door is closed.
2.
Push latch (B), and pull platform (A) toward the walking beam until it stops and the latch engages.
B
215023
A
B
148
A
Figure 4.81: Left Cab-Forward Platform
1015479
Revision B
3.
Retrieve hydraulic multicouplers (A) and electrical harness (B) from the header.
4.
Route the hose/harness bundle toward the windrower through support (C).
C
A
5.
Insert hose support (B) into hole (A) in the windrower left leg, and route the header hose bundle (C) under the windrower to the hydraulic and electrical couplers.
B
Figure 4.82: Hydraulic Hoses in Storage Position
B
Figure 4.83: Multicoupler
6.
Clean the multicouplers and receptacles to prevent contamination.
7.
Push button (A) on the rear multicoupler receptacle and rotate handle (B) away from the windrower.
8.
Open cover (C) and position multicoupler (D) onto the receptacle. Align the pins in the coupler with slots in handle (B), and rotate the handle toward the windrower so that the coupler is locked onto the receptacle and button (A) snaps out.
9.
Push button (E) on the front multicoupler receptacle and rotate handle (F) away from the windrower.
10. Open cover (G) and position multicoupler (H) onto the receptacle. Align the pins in the coupler with slots in the handle, and rotate the handle toward the windrower so that the coupler is locked onto the receptacle and button (E) snaps out.
F
H
G
E
D
C
Figure 4.84: Knife/Reel/Auger Drive Multicoupler
B
A
215023
149
Revision B
M1170 configured with R1 Hydraulic Drive Bundle (B6621):
11. If switching from a rotary header to an auger header, remove hose (A) from storage location (B) and connect to knife pressure receptacle (C) on the frame.
A
B
1
C
A
Figure 4.85: Knife Pressure Hose Positions
1 - Hose in Storage Position (Rotary Configuration)
2 - Hose to Knife Pressure Receptacle (Auger/Draper Configuration)
2
12. Remove cover from receptacle (A), and connect the electrical harness from the header.
A
Figure 4.86: Electrical Connectors
Detaching an A40DX Auger Header
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
215023
150
Revision B
1.
Start engine and press HEADER UP button (A) on ground speed lever (GSL) to raise header to maximum height.
2.
If one end of the header does NOT raise fully, rephase the cylinders as follows: a.
Press and hold the HEADER UP (A) switch until both cylinders stop moving.
b.
Continue to hold the switch for 3
–
4 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
Figure 4.87: GSL
4.
Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) toward you to release, and then rotate toward header to lower the safety prop onto the cylinder.
b.
Repeat for the opposite lift cylinder.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the safety props engage over the cylinder piston rods. If the safety prop does NOT engage properly, raise the header until the safety prop fits over the rod.
Figure 4.88: Safety Prop Lever
5.
Remove hairpin from the clevis pin (A) and remove clevis pin from header support (B) on both sides.
A
A
B
Figure 4.89: Header Support
215023
151
Revision B
6.
Lower stand (A) by pulling clevis pin (B), inverting stand, and relocating on bracket. Reinsert pin (B) and secure with hairpin.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
B
A
Figure 4.90: Header Stand
7.
Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
8.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
9.
Lower the header fully.
A
Figure 4.91: Safety Prop Lever
10. Activate HEADER TILT UP (A) and HEADER TILT DOWN (B) cylinder switches on GSL to release the load on center-link cylinder.
11. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
B
Figure 4.92: GSL
A
215023
152
Revision B
12. Lift hook release (A) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
NOTE:
If optional center-link self-alignment kit is installed, lift release (A) and then operate the link lift cylinder with the
REEL UP switch on the GSL to disengage the center-link from the header.
A
Figure 4.93: Hydraulic Center-Link
B
13. Disconnect header drive hydraulics (A) and electrical harness (B) from the windrower.
A
B
14. Place the hydraulics/electrical bundle (A) in storage position on the header.
15. Back windrower slowly away from header.
Figure 4.94: Header Drive Hydraulics
A
Figure 4.95: Hydraulics Hoses in Storage Position
215023
153
Revision B
16. Reinstall clevis pin (B) into header support (C) and secure with hairpin (A). Repeat for opposite side.
C
Figure 4.96: Header Support
B
A
4.4.2
D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header
Attaching Draper Header Supports
Draper header supports are required to attach a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header to the windrower.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
If not installed, attach the draper header support (supplied with the header) to the windrower lift linkage as follows:
1.
Remove the hairpin and clevis pin (B) from draper header support (A).
A
B
Figure 4.97: Draper Header Support
215023
154
Revision B
2.
Position draper header support (B) on lift linkage (A), and reinstall clevis pin (C).
NOTE:
To avoid the pin snagging the windrow, install the clevis pin on the outboard side of the draper header support.
3.
Secure clevis pin (C) with hairpin (D).
4.
Repeat for the opposite lift linkage.
C
D
A
B
Figure 4.98: Draper Header Support
Attaching a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header
The windrower may have an optional self-aligning hydraulic center-link that allows vertical position control of the centerlink from the cab.
NOTE:
Draper header supports must be installed onto the windrower lift linkage before starting this procedure. For instructions, refer to
Attaching Draper Header Supports, page 154 .
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
For windrowers without the self-aligning center-link kit:
Relocate pin (A) in the frame linkage as required to raise the center-link (B) until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
A
B
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
Figure 4.99: Center-Link without Self-Alignment
215023
155
Revision B
3.
Remove hairpin (A) from pin (B), and remove pin (B) from header leg. Repeat on the opposite header leg.
A
B
Figure 4.100: Header Leg
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
4.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
Starting the Engine, page 115 .
CAUTION
When lowering header lift legs without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float springs tension is fully released to prevent damage to the header lift linkages.
NOTE:
If not prompted by the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display to remove float, remove float manually as follows:
5.
Press scroll knob (A) on the HPT to display the QuickMenu system.
6.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight HEADER FLOAT symbol (B), and press the scroll knob to select.
Figure 4.101: Header Float Springs
A
215023
156
Figure 4.102: HPT Display
B
Revision B
7.
On the FLOAT ADJUST page, press soft key 3 (A) to remove float.
A
Figure 4.103: HPT Display
8.
For windrowers equipped with the self-aligning center-link kit: a.
Press the HEADER DOWN switch (E) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract the header lift cylinders.
b.
Press the REEL UP switch (B) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
F
C
E
Figure 4.104: GSL Switches
A - Reel Down
C - Header Tilt Down
E - Header Down
B - Reel Up
D - Header Tilt Up
F - Header Up
D
A
B
9.
Drive the windrower slowly forward until draper header supports (A) enter header legs (B). Continue driving slowly forward until lift linkages contact the support plates in the header legs and the header nudges forward.
10. Ensure that lift linkages are properly engaged in the header legs and are contacting the support plates.
B
A
Figure 4.105: Header Leg and Draper Header Support
215023
157
Revision B
11.
Self-Aligning Hydraulic Center-Link: a.
Adjust the position of center-link cylinder (A) with the switches on the GSL until hook (B) is above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release (C) must be down to enable the selflocking mechanism.
b.
If hook release (C) is open (up), shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition. Manually push hook release (C) down after the hook engages the header pin.
c.
Lower center-link (A) onto the header with REEL DOWN switch on the GSL until the center-link locks into position and hook release (C) is down.
d.
Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
12.
Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment: a.
Press HEADER TILT UP or HEADER TILT DOWN cylinder switches on the GSL to extend or retract center-link cylinder until the hook is aligned with the header attachment pin.
b.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
c.
Push down on rod end of link cylinder (B) until hook engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the hook release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages pin.
d.
Check that center-link (A) is locked onto header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
A
Figure 4.106: Hydraulic Center-Link
Figure 4.107: Hydraulic Center-Link
A
B
C
B
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
e.
Start the engine.
215023
158
Revision B
13. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE:
If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows: a.
Press and hold HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b.
Continue to hold the switch for 3
–
4 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
14. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
Figure 4.108: GSL
15. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) toward you to release, and then rotate toward header to lower the safety prop onto the cylinder.
b.
Repeat for the opposite lift cylinder.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the safety props engage over the cylinder piston rods. If the safety prop does NOT engage properly, raise the header until the safety prop fits over the rod.
16. Install pin (B) through the header leg (engaging U-bracket in draper header support) on both sides and secure with a hairpin (A).
17. Raise header stand (D) to storage position by pulling spring pin (C) and lifting stand into uppermost position. Release spring pin.
Figure 4.109: Safety Prop Lever
A
C
B
A
D
Figure 4.110: Header Leg
A
215023
159
Revision B
18. Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
A
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
19. Start engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on GSL to fully lower header.
Figure 4.111: Safety Prop Lever
A
Figure 4.112: GSL
Connecting D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header Hydraulics
IMPORTANT:
To prevent contamination of the hydraulic system, use a clean rag to remove dirt and moisture from all (fixed and movable) hydraulic couplers.
1.
Push link on latch (C) and pull handle (A) on hose management system (B) rearward to disengage arm from the latch.
2.
Move hose management system (B) toward the left cabforward side of the windrower.
C
B
A
215023
160
Figure 4.113: Hydraulic Hose Management System
Revision B
3.
Connect hydraulic hose management system (A) to the windrower by securing ball joint (B) into latch support (C) on the windrower leg.
4.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
A
B
C
M1170 configured with R1 Hydraulic Drive kit (MD #B6621):
5.
If switching from a rotary header to a draper header, remove hose (A) from storage location (B) and connect to knife pressure receptacle (C) on the frame.
Figure 4.114: Hydraulic Hose Management System
1
A
B
C
2
A
Figure 4.115: Knife Pressure Hose Positions
1 - Hose in Storage Position (Rotary Configuration)
2 - Hose to Knife Pressure Receptacle (Auger/Draper Configuration)
215023
161
Revision B
6.
Retrieve draper drive and reel control multicoupler (A) from the hose management system.
7.
Push knob (B) on hydraulic receptacle and pull handle (C) fully away from the windrower.
8.
Open cover (D) and position coupler onto the receptacle.
Align the pins in the coupler with slots in handle (C) and push the handle toward the windrower so that the coupler locks onto the receptacle and knob (B) snaps out.
9.
Remove hose quick-disconnect (F) from the storage location and connect to receptacle on the frame.
NOTE:
Hose quick-disconnect (F) is only present on M1240 machines configured for draper headers, and on M1170 machines with the R1 Series Hydraulic Drive kit
(MD #B6621) installed.
10. Remove the cover from electrical connector (E), push the electrical connector onto the receptacle, and secure it by turning the collar on the electrical connector clockwise.
11. Retrieve knife and reel drive multicoupler (A) from the hose management system.
12. Push knob (B) on the hydraulic receptacle and pull handle (C) fully away from the windrower.
13. Open cover (D) and position the coupler onto the receptacle. Align the pins in the coupler with the slots in handle (C), and push the handle toward the windrower so that the coupler locks onto the receptacle and knob (B) snaps out.
14. Close the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
E
A
A
B
D
Figure 4.116: Draper/Reel Multicoupler
D
B
Figure 4.117: Knife/Reel Drive Multicoupler
C
C
F
15. Ensure hydraulic hose routing is as straight as possible and avoids potential rub/wear points.
215023
162
Figure 4.118: Hydraulic Multicouplers and Hose
Routing
Revision B
Detaching a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Lower the header fully.
2.
Raise the header fully.
3.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
4.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
5.4.1 Opening Platform, page 249 .
5.
Push lock button (A) and pull handle (B) to disengage multicoupler (C). Disconnect the hydraulics from the rear knife/reel drive receptacle.
NOTE:
Firmly hold handle (B) when disconnecting the multicoupler (C). Pressure may cause the handle to kick back with force.
6.
Route knife/reel drive hose bundle back to the storage position (D) on the hydraulic hose management system.
7.
Remove any debris that may have accumulated on the receptacle. Close the cover (E).
D
E
C
A
B
Figure 4.119: Knife/Reel Drive Multicoupler
8.
Push lock button (B), and pull handle (C) to disengage multicoupler (A). Disconnect the hydraulics from the windrower draper drive/reel lift receptacle.
9.
Disconnect electrical connector (E).
10. Remove any debris that may have accumulated on the windrower front receptacle, and close cover (D).
E
A
C
D
B
Figure 4.120: Draper/Reel Multicoupler
215023
163
Revision B
11. Route draper drive/reel hose bundle back to the storage position (A) on the hydraulic hose management system (B).
12. Insert electrical connector into storage cup (C).
13. Close the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
B
C
A
14. Disconnect hose management system (A) from windrower by pulling latch lever (B) to open the latch. Keep latch open and move hose management system (A) away from header with handle (C).
Figure 4.121: Hydraulic Hose Management System
A
B
C
15. Pivot hose management system (B) forward with handle (A), and engage hook (D) into latch (C) on header.
Figure 4.122: Hydraulic Hose Management System
B
C
A
D
Figure 4.123: Hydraulic Hose Management System
215023
164
Revision B
16. Remove the header leg pin (B) by removing the hairpin (A) from header leg on both sides.
17. Lower header stand (D) by pulling spring loaded pin (C).
Release spring pin to lock stand.
B
A
C
18.
Windrowers with self-aligning center-link: Release the center-link latch (A) before returning to the cab.
Figure 4.124: Header Stand
D
A
19. Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
20. Repeat for the opposite side.
Figure 4.125: Center-Link
A
Figure 4.126: Safety Prop Lever
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
215023
165
Revision B
21. Start the engine.
22. Remove header float when prompted by the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT).
NOTE:
If not prompted by the HPT to remove float, remove float manually. For instructions, refer to
23. Lower the header to the ground with HEADER DOWN switch (A).
24. Press HEADER TILT switches (B) as required on GSL to release load on center-link.
25.
Windrowers with self-aligning center-link: a.
Press the REEL UP switch (C) to disengage center-link from header.
b.
Proceed to Step
26.
Windrowers without self-aligning center-link: a.
Shut off the engine and remove the key.
b.
Disconnect center-link by lifting release (B) and lift hook (A) off header.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
c.
Start the engine.
A
Figure 4.127: GSL
B
B
A
27. Back windrower away from header.
28. Reinstall pin (A) into header leg, and secure with hairpin (B).
Figure 4.128: Hydraulic Center-Link
B
A
C
Figure 4.129: Header Stand
215023
166
Revision B
4.4.3
R1 Series Rotary Disc Header
Attaching R1 Series Rotary Disc Header
The windrower may have an optional self-aligning hydraulic center-link that allows vertical position control of the centerlink from the cab.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment: Remove pin (A) and raise center-link (B) until hook is above the attachment pin on header. Replace pin (A) to hold centerlink in place.
A
B
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
2.
Remove hairpin (A) from clevis pin (B), and remove pin from header support (C) on both sides of the header.
3.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Figure 4.130: Hydraulic Center-Link
A
C
B
Figure 4.131: R113 Header Support
215023
167
Revision B
CAUTION
When lowering header lift legs without a header or weight box attached to the windrower, ensure the float springs tension is fully released to prevent damage to the header lift linkages.
Figure 4.132: Header Float Spring
If not prompted by the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display to remove float, remove float manually by doing the following:
4.
Press rotary scroll knob (A) on HPT display to highlight
QuickMenu options.
5.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight the HEADER FLOAT symbol (B), and press scroll knob to select. The header float adjust screen displays.
A
6.
Press soft key 3 (A) to remove the header float.
NOTE:
If the header float is active, the icon at soft key 3 will display REMOVE FLOAT; if header float has been removed, the icon will display RESUME FLOAT.
Figure 4.133: HPT Display
B
A
Figure 4.134: HPT Display
215023
168
Revision B
7.
Press HEADER DOWN switch (E) on ground speed lever (GSL) to fully retract header lift cylinders.
8.
Self-Aligning Hydraulic Center-Link: Press REEL UP switch (B) on the GSL to raise the center-link until the hook is above the attachment pin on the header.
IMPORTANT:
If the center-link is too low, it may contact the header as the windrower approaches the header for hookup.
C
E
Figure 4.135: GSL
A - Reel Down
C - Header Tilt Down
E - Header Down
9.
Drive the windrower slowly forward until feet (A) enter supports (B). Continue to drive slowly forward until feet engage the supports and header nudges forward.
10. Ensure feet (A) are properly engaged in supports (B).
F
B - Reel Up
D - Header Tilt Up
F - Header Up
D
A
B
A
B
Figure 4.136: Header Support
11.
Self-Aligning Hydraulic Center-Link: a.
Adjust the position of center-link cylinder (A) with the switches on the GSL until hook (B) is above the header attachment pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release (C) must be down to enable the selflocking mechanism.
b.
If hook release (C) is open (up), shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition. Manually push hook release (C) down after the hook engages the header pin.
c.
Lower center-link (A) onto the header with REEL DOWN switch on the GSL until the center-link locks into position and hook release (C) is down.
d.
Check that center-link is locked onto header by pressing the REEL UP switch on the GSL.
A
Figure 4.137: Hydraulic Center-Link
C
B
215023
169
Revision B
12.
Hydraulic Center-Link without Self-Alignment: a.
Press HEADER TILT UP or HEADER TILT DOWN cylinder switches on the GSL to extend or retract center-link cylinder until the hook is aligned with the header attachment pin.
b.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
c.
Push down on rod end of link cylinder (B) until hook engages and locks onto header pin.
IMPORTANT:
Hook release must be down to enable self-locking mechanism. If the hook release is open (up), manually push it down after hook engages pin.
d.
Check that center-link (A) is locked onto header by pulling upward on rod end (B) of cylinder.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
e.
Start the engine.
13. Press HEADER UP switch (A) to raise the header to maximum height.
NOTE:
If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows: a.
Press and hold HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b.
Continue to hold the switch for 3
–
4 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
14. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
Figure 4.138: Hydraulic Center-Link
A
A
B
Figure 4.139: GSL
15. Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) toward you to release, and then rotate toward header to lower the safety prop onto the cylinder.
b.
Repeat for the opposite lift cylinder.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the safety props engage over the cylinder piston rods. If the safety prop does NOT engage properly, raise the header until the safety prop fits over the rod.
A
Figure 4.140: Safety Prop Lever
215023
170
Revision B
16. Install clevis pin (A) through support and windrower lift arm and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for the opposite side of the header.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure clevis pin (A) is fully inserted, and hairpin is installed behind bracket.
B
A
17. Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
Figure 4.141: Header Support
A
18. Start the engine and press HEADER DOWN switch (A) on
GSL to fully lower header.
NOTE:
If not prompted by the HPT display to restore float, restore float manually.
19. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
Figure 4.142: Safety Prop Lever
A
Figure 4.143: GSL
Connecting R1 Series Rotary Disc Header Hydraulics to an M1170
IMPORTANT:
To prevent contamination of the hydraulic system, use a clean rag to remove dirt and moisture from all (fixed and movable) hydraulic couplers.
215023
171
Revision B
1.
Approach platform/stair unit (A) on the left cab-forward side of the windrower and ensure the cab door is closed.
2.
Push latch (B), and pull platform (A) toward the walking beam until it stops and the latch engages.
3.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
4.
Retrieve the hydraulic hoses from the header.
B
A
Figure 4.144: Left Cab-Forward Platform
1015479
5.
Attach hose support (A) to the frame near the windrower left cab-forward leg, and route hoses under frame.
NOTE:
Route hydraulic hoses as straight as possible, and avoid rub/wear points that could cause damage.
A
Figure 4.145: Hose Support Attachment
215023
172
Revision B
If switching from an auger/draper header to a rotary header:
6.
Disconnect hose (A) from knife pressure receptacle (C) on frame, and move to storage location (B).
A
B
1
C
A
Figure 4.146: Knife Pressure Hose Positions
1 - Knife Pressure Hose in Storage Position
–
Rotary Configuration
2 - Hose to Knife Pressure Receptacle
–
Auger/Draper Configuration
7.
Attach couplers to receptacles on windrower as follows: a.
Connect pressure hose female coupler to receptacle (A) b.
Connect return hose male coupler to receptacle (B) c.
Connect case drain hose coupler to receptacle (C) d.
Connect the electrical harness to receptacle (D)
IMPORTANT:
The hydraulic hoses should have enough slack to pass by multicoupler (E) without coming into contact with it. This will protect the hoses from rubbing against the multicoupler and becoming damaged. You can increase slack in the hoses by loosening and adjusting the hose holder on the front windrower leg, and pulling the hoses backward toward the windrower.
D
E
A
C
B
Figure 4.147: Hydraulic and Electrical Connections
2
215023
173
Revision B
8.
Push latch (B) to unlock platform (A).
B
9.
Pull platform (A) towards the cab until it stops and latch engages.
10. Close the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
A
Figure 4.148: Left Cab-Forward Platform
1015479
A
Figure 4.149: Left Cab-Forward Platform
Detaching R216 Rotary Disc Header from M1240 Windrower
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
215023
174
Revision B
1.
Start the engine, and press switch (A) to lower the header to the ground.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Open the left platform. For instructions, refer to the windrower operator
’ s manual.
4.
Disconnect hydraulic hoses (A), (B), and (C) from the windrower.
5.
Install caps and plugs on open lines to prevent buildup of dirt and debris while in storage.
A
Figure 4.150: GSL
C
A
B
Figure 4.151: Header Drive Hydraulics
6.
Remove hose support (A) and hose bundle from windrower frame.
A
Figure 4.152: Hoses on Windrower
215023
175
Revision B
7.
Rest hydraulic hose bundle (A) on header for storage as shown.
A
8.
Disconnect main header harness (A) from adapter harness (B).
9.
Disconnect electric baffle control harness (C) from adapter harness (D) if installed.
Figure 4.153: Hose Bundle Storage Position
D
C
B
A
Figure 4.154: Electrical Connection
10. Secure adapter harness (A) on the center link with an adjustable strap (B).
B
Figure 4.155: Adapter Harness
A
215023
176
Revision B
11. Remove hairpin (B) from clevis pin (A). Remove clevis pin from header support (C) on both sides of header.
C
Windrowers with center-link self-alignment kit only:
12. Release center-link latch (A) before returning to the cab.
Figure 4.156: Header Supports
A
B
A
Figure 4.157: Center-Link
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
13. Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
Starting the Engine, page 115 .
14. Remove header float when prompted by the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT).
NOTE:
If not prompted by the HPT to remove float, remove float manually.
215023
177
Revision B
Self-aligning center-link (if installed):
15. Use HEADER TILT cylinder switches (A) on GSL to release load on center-link cylinder.
16. Operate the link lift cylinder with REEL UP switch (B) to disengage the center-link from the header.
B
A
Figure 4.158: GSL
Non-self-aligning center-link:
17. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
18. Lift hook release (A) and lift hook (B) off header pin.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
19. Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
A
B
20. Back the windrower slowly away from header.
21. Reinstall clevis pin (A) through support (C) and secure with hairpin (B). Repeat for opposite side.
Figure 4.159: Hydraulic Center-Link
A
B
C
Figure 4.160: Header Support
215023
178
Revision B
4.5
Adjusting Header Settings on the Harvest Performance Tracker
Before operating the header, ensure the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) settings are appropriate for your header.
1.
Navigate to SETTINGS menu with soft key 5 and HPT scroll knob. For instructions, refer to
Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 79
if required.
2.
Scroll to SET-UP HEADER option (A) and press the scroll knob to select it.
NOTE:
Settings vary depending on the header type.
3.
Scroll to highlight appropriate option and press the scroll knob to select it.
•
For example, if a draper header is attached, and
ATTACHMENTS (B) is selected, the available choice is
DOUBLE DRAPER DRIVE.
A
B
Figure 4.161: Header Settings
4.
Press BACK button (A) on the HPT to return to the previous level within the menu structure.
5.
Press HOME button (B) on the HPT to return to the last selected run screen (or header disengaged screen).
B
A
Figure 4.162: HPT Display
215023
179
Revision B
4.6
Operating a Header
This section describes the operating instructions for the following header types when attached to a MacDon M1170
Windrower: A40DX Auger Header, D1XL Series Draper Header, D1X Series Draper Header, or R1 Series Rotary Disc Header. A variety of header options and attachments are available for use on headers powered by an M1170 Windrower. Refer to the header operator
’ s manual for a list of available options and attachments.
4.6.1
Engaging and Disengaging Header Safety Props
Safety props are located on both header lift cylinders on the windrower. Follow these steps to engage or disengage the header safety props:
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury from fall of raised header, always engage safety props when working on or around raised header, and before going under header for any reason.
1.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
2.
Press the HEADER UP (A) switch to raise header to maximum height.
NOTE:
If one end of the header does NOT fully raise, rephase the lift cylinders as follows: a.
Press and hold the HEADER UP switch (A) until both cylinders stop moving.
b.
Continue to hold the switch for 3
–
4 seconds. Cylinders are now phased.
3.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
Figure 4.163: Ground Speed Lever
4.
Engage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows: a.
Pull lever (A) toward you to release, and then rotate toward header to lower the safety prop onto the cylinder.
b.
Repeat for the opposite lift cylinder.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the safety props engage over the cylinder piston rods. If the safety prop does NOT engage properly, raise the header until the safety prop fits over the rod.
A
Figure 4.164: Safety Prop Lever
215023
180
Revision B
5.
Disengage the safety props on both lift cylinders as follows:
NOTE:
If the safety prop will NOT disengage, raise the header to release the prop.
a.
Turn lever (A) away from the header to raise the safety prop until the lever locks into the vertical position.
b.
Repeat for the opposite cylinder.
6.
Start the engine. For instructions, refer to
7.
Lower the header fully.
8.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
Figure 4.165: Safety Prop Lever
4.6.2
Using Header Float
The windrower is equipped with float springs that are fully adjustable with hydraulic cylinders. Spring tension is adjustable from 0 to maximum tension through the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT). The header float feature allows the header to closely follow ground contours and to respond quickly to sudden changes or obstacles. The float setting is ideal when the cutterbar is on the ground with minimal bouncing, scooping, or pushing soil.
IMPORTANT:
•
Set header float as light as possible
— without excessive bouncing
— to avoid frequent breakage of knife components, scooping soil, or soil build-up at the cutterbar in wet conditions.
•
Avoid excessive bouncing (resulting in a ragged cut) by operating at a slower ground speed when the float setting is light.
•
Before setting header float, install header options (upper cross auger, skid shoes, transport kit, etc.). If the Slow Speed
Transport (SST) tow bar will be stored on the header during operation, set float with tow bar in place.
•
Adjust the float when adding or removing optional attachments that affect the weight of the header.
Checking Float
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Before starting the machine, check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
215023
181
Revision B
1.
Start the engine.
2.
Use HEADER TILT switches (A) on the ground speed lever
(GSL) to set the center-link to the mid-range position ( 5.0
on the Harvest Performance Tracker [HPT]).
3.
If checking float with a draper header attached, set the reel to the normal operating position.
4.
Using HEADER DOWN switch (B), lower the header fully and with the header lift cylinders fully retracted.
NOTE:
Ensure the header is level with the ground with zero tilt.
5.
Turn the engine off, and remove the ignition key.
6.
Grasp one end of the header and lift. The force required to lift the header should the same at both ends (refer to Table
A
B
Figure 4.166: GSL
A
Table 4.3 Target Header Float Values
Draper
Auger
Header Type
Rotary Disc
Force Required to Lift Header at the Ends with Lift Cylinder Fully Retracted
335
–
380 N (75
–
85 lbf) with stabilizer/transport wheels raised (if equipped)
335
–
380 N (75
–
85 lbf)
426
–
471 N (95
–
105 lbf)
7.
Restart the engine, and adjust float as required. For instructions, refer to
NOTE:
Increasing the float value on the HPT makes the header feel lighter.
Setting the Float
The float can be set for windrowing with the cutterbar on the ground or with the cutterbar off the ground (normally used with the draper header).
Cutterbar on ground
The optimum float setting lets the header follow the contour of the terrain. Proceed as follows:
1.
Press rotary scroll knob (A) on the HPT to display the
QuickMenu system.
2.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight header float icon (B) and press scroll knob to select.
A
215023
182
B
Figure 4.167: HPT Run Screen
Revision B
3.
Turn scroll knob (A) to highlight left (B) or right (C) float and press knob (A) to activate selection.
4.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to adjust float setting and press knob when finished. Float is now set.
NOTE:
Float adjustments of 1.0 (out of 10) change the header weight at the cutterbar by approximately 91 kg (200 lb.).
Adjust float in increments of 0.05 to optimize field performance.
5.
Use soft key 3 (D) to remove/resume float and deck position to previous setting for the attached header.
B
C
D
A
Figure 4.168: HPT Left and Right Float Settings
Cutterbar off ground
– draper header only
The optimum float setting and stabilizer wheel setting lets the header cut the crop evenly with minimal bouncing. Proceed as follows:
1.
Set center-link to mid-range position (5.0 on the Harvest
Performance Tracker [HPT]). For instructions, refer to
Adjusting Header Angle, page 186
.
2.
Set cutting height with header height controls on the GSL.
For instructions, refer to
4.6.5 Setting Cutting Height, page
3.
Press rotary scroll knob (A) on HPT to display the
QuickMenu system.
4.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight header float icon (B) and press scroll knob to select.
Figure 4.169: Header Float
–
Cutterbar off Ground
A
B
Figure 4.170: HPT Run Screen
215023
183
Revision B
5.
Turn scroll knob (A) to highlight left (B) or right (C) float and press knob (A) to activate selection.
6.
Turn scroll knob (A) to adjust float setting and press knob when finished.
IMPORTANT:
Float adjustments of 1.0 (out of 10) change the header weight at the cutterbar by approximately 91 kg (200 lb.).
Adjust float in increments of 0.05 to optimize field performance.
7.
The float is now set.
8.
Use soft key 3 (D) to remove/resume float and deck position to previous setting for the attached header.
B
C
D
Figure 4.171: HPT Left/Right Float Settings
Removing and Restoring Float
Follow these steps to remove and restore the header float settings:
1.
Press rotary scroll knob (A) on Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) to display the QuickMenu system or press F1 on the console.
2.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight header float icon (B) and press scroll knob to select.
A
A
3.
Press soft key 3 (A) to remove or restore the header float.
NOTE:
If the header float is active, the icon at soft key 3 will say
REMOVE FLOAT; if header float has been removed, the icon will say RESTORE FLOAT.
B
Figure 4.172: HPT Run Screen
A
Figure 4.173: HPT Display
–
Adjusting Float
4.6.3
Header Drive
All header controls are conveniently located on the operator
’ s console and on the ground speed lever (GSL) handle.
215023
184
Revision B
NOTE:
Some controls are optional equipment and may not be present in your unit. Some controls may be installed, but will be nonfunctional for certain headers.
Engaging and Disengaging the Header
The HEADER ENGAGE switch engages and disengages the header drive.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
To engage header: Push and hold HEADER ENGAGE switch (A) down, while pulling up on the collar (B).
To disengage header: Push HEADER ENGAGE switch (A) down.
A
B
Reversing the Header
NOTE:
R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers do NOT have any reverse capability.
When reversing, the following header functions will turn in reverse:
•
D1XL Series Draper Headers: knife
•
D1X Series Draper Headers: knife
•
A40DX Auger Headers: knife, conditioner, auger and reel
•
A40DX GSS Auger Headers: knife, auger and reel
Reverse the header as follows:
Figure 4.174: Header Engage Switch
215023
185
Revision B
1.
Press and hold the HEADER DRIVE REVERSE button (A).
2.
Press and hold HEADER ENGAGE switch (B). Pull up on collar (C), until switch (B) is in the ENGAGED position.
3.
When you are ready to return to forward operation, release
HEADER DRIVE REVERSE button (A) to stop the header.
4.
Push down HEADER ENGAGE switch (B) to OFF position. The header can now be restarted. For instructions, refer to
Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 185 .
A
B
C
Figure 4.175: Header Drive Controls
4.6.4
Adjusting Header Angle
Header angle is the angle between the ground and the drapers/cutterbar. It is adjustable to accommodate crop conditions and soil types.
Refer to the appropriate header operator
’ s manual for the range of adjustment and recommended settings for your particular header.
Figure 4.176: HPT Display and GSL
F
D
C
A
B
E
The header angle can be hydraulically adjusted from the cab without shutting down the windrower. A readout on the
Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display indicates the header height (A) and header angle (B).
1019570
215023
186
Revision B
IMPORTANT:
•
Changing header angle affects header float because it has the effect of making the header lighter or heavier. Adjust float as required. For instructions, refer to
.
•
To prevent excessive guard breakage when conditions are suited to lighter float (e.g., rocky), do NOT use the ground speed lever (GSL) tilt control (C) and (D) while in motion. Instead, use the header height (E) and (F) control.
Adjust the header angle as follows:
•
To decrease (flatten) header angle, operate the HEADER TILT UP switch (C) on the GSL to retract the cylinder.
•
To increase (steepen) header angle, operate the HEADER TILT DOWN switch (D) on the GSL to extend the cylinder.
NOTE:
The HEADER TILT switches (C) and (D) can be locked out to prevent unintentional header angle changes when pressing the header height control switches (E) and (F). For instructions, refer to
3.17.7 Activating Control Locks, page 98
.
Checking Self-Locking Center-Link Hook
Periodically check the operation of the hook locking mechanism as follows and ensure that it is working properly:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
If a header is attached to the windrower, lower header to the ground.
2.
Turn off the engine and remove the key from the ignition.
A
3.
Pull up on handle (A) to release the locking device, and lift the hook off the header pin.
4.
Lower handle (A) into the locked position.
5.
Push up on lock pin (B) only (not the actuator rod [C]).
Handle should catch on casting and pin should NOT lift.
Figure 4.177: Center-Link
B
C
Figure 4.178: Center-Link Hook
A
215023
187
Revision B
6.
Push up on the actuator rod. The lock pin should lift with the handle.
4.6.5
Setting Cutting Height
Cutting height is adjusted by raising or lowering the header with the HEADER UP (A) or HEADER DOWN (B) switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
Figure 4.179: Center-Link Hook
A
Cutting height (A) is always displayed on the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) screen.
B
Figure 4.180: GSL
Figure 4.181: HPT Display
A
1015172
215023
188
Revision B
4.6.6
Double Windrowing
The Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) allows two conditioned windrows from an A40DX Auger Header to be laid down side-by-side for faster pickup.
Conditioned crop is deposited onto the side delivery draper and delivered beside the windrower.
Raising the side delivery system shuts off the draper and allows the crop to be deposited between the windrower wheels
— as it would be without the side delivery system.
Refer to the MacDon Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) for
M1 Series Windrowers Manual for complete setup, operating, and maintenance instructions. The manual is shipped with the
DWA kit.
Figure 4.182: DWA
Double Windrow Attachment Deck Position
1.
Raise and lower the Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) deck with REEL UP (A) and REEL DOWN (B) switches on ground speed lever (GSL), or on the operator
’ s console.
NOTE:
This can also be done with the One-Touch-Return. For instructions, refer to
One-Touch-Return Buttons (A, B, C), page 73 .
B
A
Figure 4.183: GSL
215023
189
A
B
Figure 4.184: Operator
’ s Console Draper Controls
Revision B
Double Windrow Attachment Conveyor Speed
The Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) conveyor speed is adjustable from the operator
’ s console. Press button (A) to increase the speed or button (B) to decrease the speed.
NOTE:
When DWA is attached, the conveyor speed adjustment buttons also control header draper speeds.
The DWA conveyor speed is also adjustable with the reel foreaft switches on the GSL. Press switch (A) to increase speed or switch (B) to decrease speed.
Figure 4.185: Operator
’ s Console
A
B
A
B
4.6.7
One-Touch-Return
One-Touch-Return allows you to choose and apply three presets to the A, B, and C keys (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL). The presets can be set to control variables such as height, tilt, reel position, and speeds. For instructions, refer to
Return Buttons (A, B, C), page 73
.
Figure 4.186: GSL
A
Figure 4.187: GSL
A
215023
190
Revision B
4.6.8
Adjusting Header Raise and Lower Rates
To adjust header raise and lower rates, follow these steps:
1.
On the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) press soft key 5 (A) to display the Header Lower/Raise menu.
2.
Use the HPT scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown) to place the red cursor over the
SETTINGS icon (C).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the SETTINGS icon (C).
A
B
C
Figure 4.188: Opening the Main Menu
4.
Use the HPT scroll knob or the GSL scroll wheel to move the red cursor to the HEADER SETTINGS icon (A).
5.
Press the HPT scroll knob or GSL SELECT button to display the SET-UP HEADER menu list.
NOTE:
The F4 shortcut button on the operator
’ s console also will display the SET-UP HEADER menu list.
6.
Scroll to the HEADER LOWER/RAISE menu item (B), and press SELECT. A menu for adjusting header lower/raise rates opens with the last header setting as the default starting point.
A
B
Figure 4.189: Header Settings Icon and Set-Up Header
Menu List
215023
191
Revision B
Figure 4.190: Header Raise and Lower Rates
A
D
B
C
E
7.
The header lift/lower rate is adjustable in two stages. A half button press adjusts stage one: the slow rate, and a full button press adjusts stage two: the fast rate.
Scroll through the RAISE FIRST/RAISE SECOND and LOWER FIRST/LOWER SECOND menu selections, and program the following GSL buttons:
•
HEADER RAISE (D): half press adjusts first (slow rate) stage, full press adjusts second (fast rate) stage
•
HEADER LOWER (E): half press adjusts first (slow rate) stage, full press adjusts second (fast rate) stage
•
ONE-TOUCH-RETURN buttons (A), (B), and (C): trigger header raise or lower presets.
215023
192
Revision B
4.7
Operating with D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header
For attachment instructions, refer to
Attaching a D1X or D1XL Series Draper Header, page 155 .
4.7.1
Header Position
For instructions, refer to
4.6 Operating a Header, page 180
for procedures for controlling header height, header tilt, and float.
4.7.2
Adjusting Reel Fore-Aft Position
The reel fore-aft position is adjusted with the multi-function switches on the ground speed lever (GSL).
Press and hold the switch for the desired movement;
FORWARD (A) or AFT (B).
A
B
4.7.3
Adjusting Reel Height
Press and hold the switch for the desired movement of the reel;
UP (A) or DOWN (B).
Figure 4.191: Ground Speed Lever
B
A
Figure 4.192: Ground Speed Lever
4.7.4
Leveling the Header
The windrower lift linkages are factory-set to provide the proper header level, and should not normally require adjustment.
If leveling is required, follow these steps:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
193
Revision B
Before adjusting the header level, remove the float spring tension to ensure that lift linkages are not affected by the springs.
1.
Press rotary scroll knob (A) on Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) to display the QuickMenu system.
2.
Rotate scroll knob (A) to highlight the header float symbol (B) and press scroll knob to select. The SET-UP
FLOAT page displays.
A
Figure 4.193: HPT Display
B
3.
Press soft key 3 (A) to remove float.
A
4.
Park the windrower on level ground.
5.
Press the header raise button (A) on the ground speed lever (GSL) until the header reaches maximum height.
Continue to hold the header raise button for 3
–
4 seconds to rephase the lift cylinders.
Figure 4.194: HPT Display
A
Figure 4.195: GSL
215023
194
Revision B
6.
Lower the header to approximately 150 mm (6 in.) off the ground.
7.
Ensure that member (A) is against link (B).
8.
Stop engine and remove the key from the ignition.
9.
Measure the distance to the ground at both ends of the header to determine if the header is level.
A
B
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
10. If adjustment is necessary, start engine and resume float.
Lower the header onto the ground until member (A) lifts away from the link (B) on both sides.
11. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
Figure 4.196: Lift Linkage
A
B
Figure 4.197: Lift Linkage
12. On the side that is higher, remove nut, washer, and bolt (A) that attaches shims (B) to the linkage.
13. Remove one or both of the shims (B) and reinstall the hardware (A).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
14. Repeat Step
to Step
to rephase the cylinders and check the header level.
15. If additional adjustment is required, repeat Step
to Step
13, page 195 , and install one of the removed
shims on the opposite linkage.
16. Reset the header float. Refer to
.
NOTE:
Additional shims are available from your Dealer.
B
A
Figure 4.198: Lift Linkage Shims
215023
195
Revision B
4.7.5
Adjusting Reel Speed
Reel speed is displayed in either rpm, mph, or km/h (depending on the global units selection). The default reel speed is
60 rpm and can be set to auto or manual mode.
•
AUTO mode: Minimum reel speed and operating reel speed differential relative to ground speed are set, and reel speed is maintained relative to ground speed. For instructions, refer to
Setting Reel Speed in Auto Mode, page 196
.
•
MANUAL mode: Reel speed is set and is maintained regardless of ground speed. For instructions, refer to
Speed in Manual Mode, page 198
.
NOTE:
Both speed modes work with the One-Touch-Return feature. For example, button A on the GSL can be set for MANUAL mode and button B can be set for AUTO mode. For instructions, refer to
One-Touch-Return Buttons (A, B, C), page 73 .
Setting Reel Speed in Auto Mode
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key
1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.199: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
1014578
Figure 4.200: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
196
Revision B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on the QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
A
4.
Scroll to mode field (A) and select it.
5.
Scroll in pop-up window to AUTO and select it.
NOTE:
In AUTO mode, the speed is displayed in km/h or mph (B) which cannot be changed.
Figure 4.201: Header QuickMenu
B
A
Figure 4.202: Draper Header Reel Page
6.
Scroll to and select the MINIMUM REEL SPEED setting (A)
(this setting is grayed out in manual mode).
7.
Turn scroll knob to adjust reel minimum speed to
1.6
–
8 km/h (1
–
5 mph) with 5 km/h (3.0 mph) as the default. Press scroll knob to select desired setting.
8.
Scroll to INDEX value (C) and select it.
9.
Turn scroll knob to set index value. The index range is
+/- 8 km/h (5 mph) (zero, that is equal to ground speed, is the default). Press scroll knob to select desired setting.
NOTE:
The reel operates at reel minimum speed when the ground speed is less than the set minimum speed. Minimum reel speed is displayed (A) and MIN will replace the AUTO (B)
+1.7 (C).
B
C
Figure 4.203: Draper Header Reel Page
A
215023
197
Revision B
Setting Reel Speed in Manual Mode
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key
1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QUICKMENU PAGE.
Figure 4.204: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
Figure 4.205: HPT and GSL
A
1019523
215023
198
Figure 4.206: Header QuickMenu
Revision B
4.
Turn scroll knob to mode window (A) and press scroll knob to select it.
5.
Scroll in pop-up window to MANUAL and press scroll knob to select it.
6.
Scroll to units (B) and select desired unit (rpm, mph, or km/h).
7.
Proceed to next step to adjust reel speed (C).
C
B
A
8.
Use reel speed switches (A) on GSL to set reel speed. The desired speed increases 1 rpm (0.1 mph or 0.2 km/h if in mph / km/h) per momentary press, or continuous scrolling if switch is pressed and held.
Figure 4.207: Draper Header Reel Page
A
Figure 4.208: GSL
Adjusting Reel Alarm Pressure
Adjusting the reel alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the reel is operating at a desired pressure.
A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key
1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
215023
199
Figure 4.209: Header Run Screen 1
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
A
B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
1019523
Figure 4.210: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
Figure 4.211: Header QuickMenu
4.
Turn scroll knob to highlight reel pressure ALARM (A), and press knob to select it.
5.
Turn knob to change the ALARM set-point in window (A).
Scrolling past the highest setting turns the alarm off. When the alarm point is off, the digital value is replaced with three dashed lines.
6.
Adjust reel alarm pressure set-point to desired value, and press knob to select it. Factory setting is 19,995 kpa
(2900 psi).
A
1015205
Figure 4.212: Draper Header Reel Page
4.7.6
Adjusting Draper Speed
Draper speed is displayed in mph or km/h (depending on the global units selection); the default is rpm, and can be set to auto or manual mode.
•
AUTO mode: Draper speed is maintained relative to ground speed. For instructions, refer to
.
215023
200
Revision B
•
MANUAL mode: Draper speed is manually set and is maintained independently of ground speed. For instructions, refer to
Setting Draper Speed in Manual Mode, page 203
.
NOTE:
Both speed modes work with the One-Touch-Return feature. For example, button A on the GSL can be set for
MANUAL mode and button B can be set for AUTO mode. For instructions, refer to
One-Touch-Return Buttons (A, B, C), page 73
.
Setting Draper Speed in Auto Mode
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) while in any run screen to display the
QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.213: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
1019523
Figure 4.214: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
201
Revision B
3.
Turn knob and scroll to the DRAPER setting (A) on
QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
A
4.
Scroll to mode window (A) and select it.
5.
Scroll in pop-up window to AUTO and select it.
NOTE:
In AUTO mode, the speed is displayed in km/h or mph (B).
Figure 4.215: Header QuickMenu
B
A
Figure 4.216: Draper Header Draper Page
6.
Scroll to and select the MINIMUM DRAPER SPEED setting (A) (this setting is grayed out in manual mode).
7.
Turn scroll knob to adjust draper minimum speed to
1.6
–
8 km/h (1
–
5 mph) with 5 km/h (3.0 mph) as the default). Press knob to select desired setting.
8.
Scroll to INDEX value (C) and select it.
9.
Turn scroll knob to set index value. The index range is
+/- 8 km/h (5 mph) (zero, i.e. equal to ground speed, is the default). Press knob to select desired setting.
NOTE:
The draper operates at MINIMUM SPEED when the ground speed + the reel index value is less than the set minimum speed. Minimum reel speed is displayed (A) and MIN will replace the AUTO +1.7 (B).
B
A
C
Figure 4.217: Draper Header Draper Page
215023
202
Revision B
Setting Draper Speed in Manual Mode
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu page.
Figure 4.218: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
3.
Turn knob to scroll to DRAPER setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
1019523
Figure 4.219: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
Figure 4.220: Draper Header QuickMenu
215023
203
Revision B
4.
Turn scroll knob to mode window and press scroll knob to select it.
5.
Scroll in the pop-up window to MANUAL (A) and press scroll knob to select it.
A
6.
Set draper speed with console controls as follows: a.
Press and quickly release DRAPER SPEED switch (A) to increase draper speed in 0.2 km/h (0.1 mph) intervals.
b.
Press and hold DRAPER SPEED switch (A) to increase draper speed in 2 km/h (1 mph) intervals.
c.
Similarly decrease draper speed with switch (B).
Figure 4.221: Draper Header Draper Page
A
B
Figure 4.222: Operator
’ s Console Draper Controls
Adjusting Draper Alarm Pressure
Adjusting the draper alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the draper is operating at a desired pressure. A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
215023
204
Figure 4.223: Header Run Screen 1
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu page.
A
B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to DRAPER setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
1019523
Figure 4.224: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
4.
Scroll to the DEFAULT DRAPER ALARM PRESSURE (A), and select it.
5.
Change the alarm set-point by scrolling. Scrolling past the highest setting turns off the alarm. When the alarm point is off, the digital value is replaced with three dashed lines.
6.
Adjust draper alarm pressure set-point to desired value, and press knob to select it. Factory setting is 19,995 kpa
(2900 psi).
Figure 4.225: Draper Header QuickMenu
A
Figure 4.226: Draper Header Draper Page
215023
205
Revision B
Draper Slip Warning
If the left or right draper idler roller begins to slip, a warning tone will sound and one of the following messages (A) will appear on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) screen:
•
Left draper slipping. Disengage header.
•
Right draper slipping. Disengage header.
The Operator cannot cancel the message.
NOTE:
A slipping draper can severely damage the draper belts.
Slippage is typically caused by debris inside the draper.
NOTE:
A draper slip sensor failure will disable the sensor and a fault will appear on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) screen. Contact your MacDon Dealer for service.
NOTE:
Draper slip warning is disabled when a double draper drive kit is installed.
A
Figure 4.227: Draper Slip Warning
4.7.7
Knife Speed
The ideal cutting speed of the knife should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually influence the knife and forward speeds.
Table 4.4 Knife Speed
Header Description Knife Speed
Minimum Maximum
Type
Size m (ft.) rpm 6 spm 7
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
Draper with double knife
4.6 (15)
6.1 (20)
7.6 (25)
9.1 (30)
10.7 (35)
12.2 (40)
13.7 (45)
750
700
700
600
600
550
550
1500
1500
1400
1200
1200
1100
1100
950
850
850
800
700
700
700
1900
1900
1700
1600
1400
1400
1400
When the header is first attached to the windrower, the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed.
6.
Revolutions per minute is the speed of knife drive box pulley
7.
Strokes per minute of knife (rpm x 2)
215023
206
Revision B
The desired speed can be programmed and stored in the HPT so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
Refer to the header operator
’ s manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE:
The knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specified for each header.
Setting Knife Speed
Knife speed is displayed in strokes per minute (spm).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the
QuickMenu page.
Figure 4.228: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
1014578
Figure 4.229: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
207
Revision B
3.
Scroll to the KNIFE setting (A) on the QuickMenu page, and select it.
A
Figure 4.230: Draper Header QuickMenu
4.
Scroll to and select the KNIFE SPEED setting (A).
5.
Adjust knife speed using the HPT scroll knob.
6.
Press the scroll knob to select.
A
1015211
Figure 4.231: Setting Knife Speed
Adjusting Knife Alarm Pressure
–
Draper Header
Adjusting the knife alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the knife is operating at a desired pressure. A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
215023
208
Figure 4.232: Header Run Screen 1
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT, or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the
QuickMenu page.
A
B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to the KNIFE setting (A) on the
QuickMenu page, and press knob to select it.
1014578
Figure 4.233: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
4.
Scroll to the knife alarm pressure setting (A), and press knob to select it.
5.
Turn knob to change the ALARM set-point in window (A).
Scrolling past the highest setting turns the alarm off. When the alarm point is off, the digital value is replaced with three dashed lines.
6.
Adjust knife alarm pressure set-point to desired value, and press knob to select it. Factory setting is 23,442 kpa
(3400 psi).
Figure 4.234: Draper Header QuickMenu
A
Figure 4.235: Adjusting Knife Alarm Pressure
1015212
215023
209
Revision B
Adjusting Knife Speed Alarm
The knife speed alarm informs the operator when knife speed is outside the desired range. A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off less often; a higher setting will cause the alarm to be set off more frequently. The header must be in operation for this adjustment.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the
QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.236: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
3.
Turn knob to scroll to the KNIFE setting (A) on the
QuickMenu page, and press knob to select it.
1014578
Figure 4.237: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
210
A
Figure 4.238: Draper Header QuickMenu
Revision B
4.
Scroll to and select the KNIFE SPEED ALARM setting (A).
5.
Turn scroll knob to adjust knife speed alarm as desired.
Default is 70% and minimum value is 50%. For example, at a setting of 75%, an alarm will sound when knife speed decreases to 75% of preset knife speed due to overload.
A
1015213
Figure 4.239: Adjusting Knife Speed Alarm
4.7.8
Deck Shift Control
When connected to a draper header with the deck shift option, hydraulic deck shift control allows you to select the deck position and draper rotation of the header from the operator
’ s station. Deck shift allows you to select crop delivery from the left side, center, or right side of the header.
Shifting Decks
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
Shift decks as follows:
1.
Engage header by pushing and holding the HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A) down, and pulling up on collar (B).
A
B
Figure 4.240: Header Engage Switch
215023
211
Revision B
2.
Push the HEADER DECK SHIFT switch to the desired delivery position. Deck(s) will move and direction of drapers will change accordingly.
A
B
C
Figure 4.241: Header Deck Shift Switches
A - Right-Side Delivery
C - Left-Side Delivery
B - Center Delivery
Setting Float Options with Deck Shift
Header float should be set for each deck position. To program a float setting for each of the deck shift positions, follow these steps:
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
Start the engine, and use the HEADER TILT switches (A) and (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to set header tilt to the MID-RANGE position.
B
Figure 4.242: GSL
A
215023
212
Revision B
2.
Engage header by pushing and holding the HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A) down, and pulling up on the collar (B).
A
B
3.
Select one of the following deck positions using the DECK
SHIFT switches on the operator
’ s console:
•
Right-side delivery (A)
•
Center delivery (B)
•
Left-side delivery (C)
Figure 4.243: Header Engage Switch
A
B
C
4.
After deck(s) have stopped moving, disengage header with
HEADER ENGAGE switch (A).
5.
To adjust the float setting for the selected deck position refer to
6.
Repeat above procedure for the other deck positions.
Figure 4.244: Header Deck Shift Switches
A
Figure 4.245: Header Engage Switch
215023
213
Revision B
4.7.9
Draper Header Run Screens
Two draper header specific run screens are viewable when operating the windrower with a draper header attached. The screens are accessed by pressing the applicable soft keys on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT).
1.
Press soft key 1 (A) to access RUN SCREEN 1.
2.
Press soft key 2 (B) to access RUN SCREEN 2.
A
B
Run Screen 1
This is what Run Screen 1 looks like when operating a draper header.
Figure 4.247: Run Screen 1
–
Draper Header Display
Figure 4.246: Harvest Performance Tracker
A
G
D
B
C
E
F
H
H
H
A - Reel Speed
D - Reel Pressure
G - Indexing
215023
B - Draper Speed
E - Draper Pressure
H - Alarm Point
214
C - Knife Speed
F - Knife Pressure
Revision B
Run Screen 2
This is what Run Screen 2 looks like when operating a draper header.
Figure 4.248: Run Screen 2
–
Draper Header Display
A
D
E
B
C
A - Draper Speed
D - Reel Fore-Aft Position
B - Reel Speed
E - Reel Height
C - Indexing
4.7.10
Swath Compressor
The swath compressor is a large, formed polyethylene sheet designed to mount to the underside of the windrower. The swath compressor is designed for use with D1X and D1XL Series Draper Headers cutting canola.
The swath compressor shapes the windrow and anchors it into the stubble behind the header to help prevent shelling and swath damage from wind. Excessive compression by a swath compressor or roller can increase losses from crop shelling, and may increase drying time; inadequate compression can leave a windrow prone to wind damage.
Controlling the Swath Compressor
The following topic explains how the windrower controls the swath compressor, and describes the automated raise/lower functions.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of machine, always stop engine and remove key from ignition before leaving operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
215
Revision B
Swath compressor height (A) is displayed on the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) with a scale from 0
–
10.
NOTE:
The swath compressor icon (B) is displayed on the HPT when the swath compressor is activated in the attachments menu. If the sensor is disabled, the height number (A) is replaced by a sensor disabled icon. For instructions on enabling the sensor, refer to the Swath Compressor for M1 Series Windrowers Setup,
Operation, and Parts Manual.
B
A
1030790
Figure 4.249: HPT Display
Switches (A) and (B) on the operator
’ s console are used to adjust the position (height). Releasing the switch stops the movement.
NOTE:
Each momentary press of the switch changes the value by one.
Pressing and holding changes the value by one increment per second.
NOTE:
The last position set with the console switches becomes the target height. When an adjustment is made, the display shows the target value. The system immediately adjusts to attain the target position. After the last adjustment, the display shows target value for 5 seconds then reverts to the actual position.
Display functions
•
As the swath compressor moves up or down, the target value (A) changes, the windrower icon (B) appears as an outline, and the swath compressor icon (C) flashes.
•
Windrower icon (B) is solid when the target height is achieved.
•
Value (A) is 0, and image (B) is an outline with the swath compressor fully raised.
•
Icon (B) is not visible and automation is disabled without a header attached. Swath compressor height can still be adjusted.
A
B
Figure 4.250: Operator
’ s Console
A B
C
Figure 4.251: HPT Display
1021931
Swath compressor automated functions: header engaged
•
The swath compressor lowers to target height at a ground speed higher than 2.5 km/h (1.6 mph).
•
The swath compressor fully raises as the ground speed transitions through 1.6 km/h (1 mph) during deceleration.
•
The swath compressor fully raises when the header is disengaged at a ground speed higher than 1.6 km/h (1 mph).
215023
216
Revision B
•
An IMPORTANT message to raise the swath compressor appears on the HPT accompanied by a tone when the GSL is moved out of PARK in engine-forward mode if the swath compressor is not fully raised.
Engage the swath compressor lock when the swath compressor is not in use, or when the windrower is in engine-forward mode. For instructions, refer to
Locking and Unlocking the Swath Compressor, page 217
.
Locking and Unlocking the Swath Compressor
The swath compressor lock is located on the left cab-forward side of the swath compressor frame. When engaged, the lock prevents the compressor shield from lowering.
1.
Turn lock handle (A) clockwise to engage the swath compressor lock under the following conditions:
•
Swath compressor is not in use
•
Windrower is being serviced
•
Windrower is in engine-forward mode
2.
Turn handle (A) counterclockwise to disengage the lock before operating the swath compressor.
A
Figure 4.252: Swath Compressor Lock
215023
217
Revision B
4.8
Operating with an A40DX Auger Header
For attachment instructions, refer to
Attaching an A40DX Auger Header, page 143 .
4.8.1
Reel and Auger Speed
Reel speed is displayed in either rpm, mph, or km/h (depending on the global units selection). The default reel speed is
60 rpm, but it can be adjusted using either AUTO or MANUAL mode.
If the differential auger-reel control is enabled, you can adjust the auger speed separately from the reel speed. If the differential auger-reel control is not enabled, the reel and auger speeds are hydraulically linked and you cannot adjust the auger speed separately.
IMPORTANT:
Reel speed on an A40DX Auger Header MUST NOT EXCEED 85 rpm. Auger speed MUST NOT EXCEED 320 rpm.
•
AUTO mode: Minimum reel speed and operating reel speed differential relative to ground speed are set, and reel speed is maintained relative to ground speed. For instructions, refer to
Setting Reel Speed in Auto Mode, page 218
.
•
MANUAL mode: Reel speed is set and is maintained regardless of ground speed. For instructions, refer to
Speed in Manual Mode, page 220
.
•
Differential auger-reel control engaged: Auger speed is adjusted separately from reel speed. For instructions, refer to
.
NOTE:
Differential auger-reel control is a standard feature on A40DX GSS Auger Headers. If you are operating an A40DX Auger
Header without the grass seed option, it is optional. Order Reel Speed Control kit (MD #B6604).
Setting Reel Speed in Auto Mode
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display auger RUN SCREEN 1.
A
Figure 4.253: Header Run Screen 1
215023
218
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
A
B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next page opens.
1014578
Figure 4.254: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
4.
Scroll to mode window (A) and select it.
5.
Scroll to AUTO in the pop-up window, and select it.
NOTE:
In AUTO mode, the speed is displayed in km/h or mph (B) which cannot be changed.
Figure 4.255: Header QuickMenu Screen
B
A
Figure 4.256: Draper Header Reel Screen
215023
219
Revision B
6.
Scroll to the MINIMUM REEL SPEED setting (A) and select it
(this setting is grayed out in manual mode).
7.
Turn scroll knob to adjust minimum reel speed between
0
–
8 km/h (5 mph). Press knob to select desired setting.
8.
Scroll to INDEX value (C) and select it.
9.
Turn scroll knob to set index value. The index range is
+/- 8 km/h (5 mph) (zero, i.e. equal to ground speed, is the default). Press knob to select desired setting.
NOTE:
The reel operates at reel minimum speed when the ground speed is less than the set minimum speed. Minimum reel speed is displayed (A) and MIN will replace the AUTO
+1.7 (B).
Setting Reel Speed in Manual Mode
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display auger RUN SCREEN 1.
B
C
A
Figure 4.257: Auger Header Reel Screen
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.258: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
215023
220
1014578
Figure 4.259: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
Revision B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next screen opens.
A
4.
Scroll to mode window (A) and select it.
5.
Scroll in pop-up window to MANUAL and select it.
6.
Scroll to UNITS (B) and select desired unit (i.e., rpm, mph, or km/h).
7.
Scroll to SPEED VALUE (C) and select it.
Figure 4.260: Header QuickMenu Screen
C
B
A
8.
Use REEL SPEED switches (A) on GSL to set reel speed. The desired speed increases 1 rpm (0.1 mph or 0.2 km/h if set to mph or km/h) per momentary press, or continuous scrolling if switch is pressed and held.
Figure 4.261: Auger Header Reel Screen
A
Figure 4.262: GSL
Setting Auger Speed
The auger speed can only be adjusted independently if the differential auger-reel control is engaged. This is a standard feature on A40DX GSS Auger Headers, but an option on A40DX Auger Headers without the Grass Seed option. To acquire this option, order Reel Speed Control kit (MD #B6604) from your Dealer.
If the differential auger-reel control is not engaged, the auger speed is automatically adjusted when you adjust reel speed.
215023
221
Revision B
NOTE:
When the differential auger-reel control is engaged, the minimum/maximum reel speed is dependent on the auger speed.
In some cases, in order to have the reel run slower or faster, you may have to decrease or increase the auger speed.
1.
To adjust the auger speed, press soft key 2 on the HPT to display RUN SCREEN 2.
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the
Quick Menu system.
Figure 4.263: HPT Screen Display
A
B
3.
Scroll to the auger speed tile (A) and select it.
1014578
Figure 4.264: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
Figure 4.265: HPT Screen Display
215023
222
Revision B
4.
The auger speed (A) can now be adjusted between 150 and
340 rpm.
NOTE:
Auger speed can be displayed in rpm or mph / km/h
(depending on global Units selection) and can be switched by navigating the QuickMenu and selecting the speed symbol.
A
Figure 4.266: HPT Screen Display
Adjusting the Reel/Auger Alarm Pressure
Adjusting the reel/auger alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the reel is operating at a desired pressure. A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display auger RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.267: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
215023
223
1014578
Figure 4.268: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
Revision B
3.
Turn knob to scroll to REEL setting (A) on QuickMenu, and press knob to select it. The next screen opens.
A
Figure 4.269: Header QuickMenu Screen
4.
Turn scroll knob to highlight reel pressure ALARM (A), and press knob to select it.
5.
Turn knob to change the ALARM set-point in window (A).
Scrolling past the highest setting turns off alarm. When the alarm point is off, the digital value is replaced with three dashed lines.
6.
Adjust reel alarm pressure set-point to desired value, and press knob to select it. Factory setting is 19,995 kpa
(2900 psi).
A
1015205
Figure 4.270: Setting Reel Alarm Pressure
4.8.2
Knife Speed
The ideal cutting speed of the knife should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions usually influence the knife and forward speeds.
Table 4.5 Knife Speed Table
Header Description Knife Speed
Minimum Maximum
Type Size m (ft.) rpm 8 spm 9
Auger A40DX
Grass Seed
Auger A40DX
All
All
700
700
1400
1400
975
975
1950
1950
When the header is first attached to the windrower, the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) receives a code from the header that determines the knife speed range and the minimum speed.
The desired speed can be programmed and stored in the HPT so the knife will operate at the original set-point after the header is detached and reattached to the windrower.
8.
Revolutions per minute is the speed of knife drive box pulley.
9.
Strokes per minute of knife (rpm x 2).
215023
224
Revision B
Refer to the header operator
’ s manual for the suggested knife speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
NOTE:
The knife speed cannot be programmed outside the range specified for each header.
Setting Knife Speed
Knife speed is displayed in strokes per minute (spm).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the HPT or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the
QuickMenu page.
Figure 4.271: Header Run Screen 1
B
A
1014578
Figure 4.272: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
225
Revision B
3.
Scroll to the KNIFE setting (A) on the QuickMenu page, and select it.
A
Figure 4.273: Draper Header QuickMenu
4.
Scroll to and select the KNIFE SPEED setting (A).
5.
Adjust knife speed using the HPT scroll knob.
6.
Press the scroll knob to select.
A
1015211
Figure 4.274: Setting Knife Speed
Adjusting Knife Alarm Pressure
–
Auger Header
Adjusting the knife alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the knife is operating at a desired pressure. A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display auger RUN SCREEN 1.
A
215023
226
Figure 4.275: Header Run Screen 1
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
A
B
3.
Scroll to the KNIFE ALARM PRESSURE setting (A), and use the knob to select it.
4.
Turn knob to change the ALARM set-point in window (A).
Scrolling past the highest setting turns the alarm off. When the alarm point is off, the digital value is replaced with three dashed lines.
5.
Adjust reel alarm pressure set-point to desired value, and press knob to select it. Factory setting is 24,821 kPa
(3600 psi).
1014578
Figure 4.276: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
1015212
Figure 4.277: Knife Screen
Adjusting Knife Speed Alarm
This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
215023
227
Figure 4.278: Header Run Screen 1
Revision B
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
A
B
3.
Scroll to the KNIFE setting (A) on the QuickMenu screen, and select it.
1014578
Figure 4.279: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
A
4.
Scroll to and select the KNIFE SPEED ALARM setting (A), displayed as a % of the preset knife speed.
5.
Adjust knife speed alarm % as desired. Default is 70% and range is 50
–
90%.
Figure 4.280: Auger Header QuickMenu Screen
A
1015213
Figure 4.281: Knife Screen
215023
228
Revision B
4.8.3
Setting Float Options with Fixed Deck
When using an auger, the DECK SHIFT buttons can be used to store three different float settings. This is useful when cutting in varying ground conditions, or when having one side lighter is desirable (such as cutting along wheel tracks or irrigation borders).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
Start the engine and use the HEADER TILT switches (A) and (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to set header tilt to the MID-RANGE position.
2.
Engage header by pushing and holding the HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A) down, and pulling up on collar (B).
B
Figure 4.282: GSL
A
A
B
Figure 4.283: Header Engage Switch
215023
229
Revision B
3.
Select one of the following deck positions using the DECK
SHIFT switches on the operator
’ s console:
•
Right-side delivery (A)
•
Center delivery (B)
•
Left-side delivery (C)
A
B
C
4.
Disengage the header by pushing down on HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A).
5.
Adjust the float setting for the selected deck position. For instructions, refer to
6.
Repeat steps for the other deck positions.
Figure 4.284: Header Deck Shift Switches
A
Figure 4.285: Header Engage Switch
215023
230
Revision B
4.8.4
Auger Header Run Screens
Two auger header specific run screens are viewable when operating windrower with an auger header attached. The screens are accessed by pressing the applicable soft keys on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT).
Run Screen 1
This is what Run Screen 1 looks like when operating an auger header.
Figure 4.286: Run Screen 1
–
Auger Header Display
A
B
C
D
A - Reel/Auger Speed B - Knife Speed C - Reel/Auger Pressure D - Knife Pressure
215023
231
Revision B
Run Screen 2
This is what Run Screen 2 looks like when operating an auger header.
Figure 4.287: Run Screen 2
–
Auger Header Display
A
C
D
A - Knife Speed
D - Index Value
B - Knife Pressure
E - Engine Load
C - Reel/Auger Speed
B
E
215023
232
Revision B
4.9
Operating with an R1 Series Rotary Disc Header
An R1 Series Rotary Disc Header is shipped without the motor and hoses installed.
If necessary, obtain kit MD #B6621 from your MacDon Dealer.
Install the kit in accordance with the instructions supplied.
Figure 4.288: Kit MD #B6621
4.9.1
Disc Speed
The ideal disc speed should achieve a clean cut. Crop types and conditions affect disc and ground speeds.
Refer to the header operator
’ s manual for the suggested disc speed for a variety of crops and conditions.
Setting Disc Speed
Default disc speed is 2000 rpm. Follow these steps to adjust the disc speed.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
Engage the header. For instructions, refer to
Disengaging the Header, page 185 .
2.
Adjust the disc speed with the DISC SPEED INCREASE (A) or
DISC SPEED DECREASE (B) buttons on the ground speed lever (GSL).
NOTE:
Disc speed increases 50 rpm per momentary button push, or at a rate of 100 rpm/sec if the button is pushed and held.
A
B
Figure 4.289: GSL
215023
233
Revision B
Adjusting Disc Pressure Alarm
Adjusting the disc alarm allows the operator to set an alert to inform them that the disc is operating at a desired pressure.
A lower setting will cause the alarm to be set off more often; a higher setting will allow the alarm to be set off less frequently. This adjustment requires the header to be in operation.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
If RUN SCREEN 1 is not already displayed, press soft key 1 (A) on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) to display draper RUN SCREEN 1.
A
2.
Press the scroll knob (A) on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT) or the SELECT button (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to display the QuickMenu system.
Figure 4.290: Disc Header Run Screen 1
B
A
1014578
Figure 4.291: HPT Scroll Knob and GSL Select Button
215023
234
Revision B
3.
Scroll to the DISC SPEED setting (A) on the QuickMenu screen, and select it.
A
4.
Scroll to the DISC PRESSURE ALARM setting (A), and select it.
5.
Scroll to the desired alarm set-point or scroll past the highest setting to turn the alarm OFF. The digital value is replaced by three dashed lines, indicating that it is possible to adjust the alarm set-point value.
6.
Adjust disc alarm pressure set-point to desired value.
Factory setting is 310 bar (4500 psi).
Figure 4.292: Disc Header QuickMenu Screen
A
Figure 4.293: Disc Pressure Screen
4.9.2
Setting Float Options with Fixed Deck
When using an auger or rotary header, the DECK SHIFT buttons can be used to store three different float settings. This is useful when cutting in varying ground conditions, or when having one side lighter is desirable (such as cutting along wheel tracks or irrigation borders).
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
215023
235
Revision B
1.
Start the engine and use the HEADER TILT switches (A) and (B) on the ground speed lever (GSL) to set header tilt to the MID-RANGE position.
B
2.
Engage header by pushing and holding the HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A) down, and pulling up on collar (B).
Figure 4.294: GSL
A
3.
Select one of the following deck positions using the DECK
SHIFT switches on the operator
’ s console:
•
Right-side delivery (A)
•
Center delivery (B)
•
Left-side delivery (C)
Figure 4.295: Header Engage Switch
B
A
C
A
B
Figure 4.296: Header Deck Shift Switches
215023
236
Revision B
4.
Disengage the header by pushing down on HEADER
ENGAGE switch (A).
5.
Adjust the float setting for the selected deck position. For instructions, refer to
6.
Repeat steps for the other deck positions.
A
Figure 4.297: Header Engage Switch
4.9.3
Disc Header Run Screens
Two disc header specific run screens are viewable when operating windrower with an auger header attached. The screens are accessed by pressing the applicable soft keys on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT).
Run Screen 1
This is what Run Screen 1 looks like when operating a rotary disc header.
Figure 4.298: Run Screen 1
–
Rotary Disc Header Display
A
B
C
A - Disc Speed
215023
B - Disc Pressure
237
C - Engine Load Bar
Revision B
Run Screen 2
This is what Run Screen 2 looks like when operating a rotary disc header.
Figure 4.299: Run Screen 2
–
Rotary Disc Header Display
C
A
A - Disc rpm Digital
D - Hydraulic Oil Temperature
B - Disc Pressure Digital C - Engine Load Bar
B
D
215023
238
Revision B
Chapter 5: Maintenance and Servicing
The following section will guide you through the windrower
’ s basic maintenance and service requirements.
5.1
Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants
5.1.1
Storing Lubricants and Fluids
Your machine can only operate at top efficiency if clean fuel and lubricants are used.
•
Buy good quality, clean fuel from a reputable Dealer.
•
Use clean containers to handle fuel and lubricants.
•
Store in an area protected from dust, moisture, and other contaminants.
•
Avoid storing fuel over long periods of time. If you have a slow fuel turnover in the windrower or supply tank, add fuel conditioner and keep tank full to avoid condensation problems.
•
Store fuel in a convenient place away from buildings.
•
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) should be stored in a cool, dry, well ventilated area, out of direct sunlight, on lower shelf or on floor.
•
DEF is corrosive to some metals and should only be stored in polyethylene, polypropylene, or stainless steel containers.
•
DEF containers should be sealed to prevent contamination and the evaporation of water, which will affect the specified water to urea ratio.
•
Diesel fuel should NEVER be mixed with DEF.
NOTE:
DEF will degrade over time depending on temperature and exposure to sunlight. Shelf life specifications, as defined by ISO
Spec 22241-3, are the minimum expectations for shelf life when stored at constant temperatures. If stored between 12 to
32°C (10 to 90°F), shelf life will easily be one year. If the maximum temperature does not exceed approximately 24°C (75°F) for an extended period of time, the shelf life will be two years.
5.1.2
Fuel Specifications
Use only ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) from a reputable supplier. For most year-round service, No. 2 ULSD fuel meeting
ASTM specification D975 Grade S15 will provide good performance.
If the vehicle is exposed to extreme cold (below -7°C [20°F]) or is required to operate at colder-than-normal conditions for prolonged periods, use climatized No. 2 diesel fuel, or dilute the No. 2 ULSD fuel with 50% No. 1 ULSD fuel. This will provide better protection from fuel gelling or wax-plugging of the fuel filters.
Table 5.1 Fuel Specifications
Fuel Specification
Sulphur
(by weight)
Water and
Sediment
(by volume)
Cetane No.
°C (°F)
Lubricity
ULSD Grade
No. 2
ASTM D975 0.5% maximum 0.05% maximum
ULSD Grade No.
1 and 2 mix 10 n/a
1% maximum
0.5% maximum preferred
0.1% maximum
40 (104) minimum 520 Microns
45
–
55 (113
–
130) cold weather / high altitude
460 Microns
10. Optional when operating temperature is below 0°C (32°F) .
215023
239
Revision B
In extreme situations, when available fuels are of poor quality or problems exist which are particular to certain operations, additives can be used; however, the engine manufacturer recommends consultation with the fuel supplier or engine manufacturer before using fuel additives. Situations where additives are useful include:
•
A cetane improver additive can be used with low cetane fuels.
•
A wax crystal modifier can help with fuels with high cold filter plugging points (CFPP).
•
An anti-icer can help prevent ice formation in wet fuel during cold weather.
•
An antioxidant or storage stability additive can help with fuel system deposits and poor storage stability.
•
Diesel fuel conditioner can be used to increase the lubricity of fuels so that they meet the requirements given in Table
. Diesel fuel conditioner is available from your Dealer.
5.1.3
Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities
WARNING
To avoid injury or death, do NOT allow ANY machine fluids to enter the body.
Table 5.2 System Capacities
Lubricant/Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
Grease
Diesel fuel
Hydraulic oil
Gear lubricant
Gear lubricant
Location
Diesel exhaust fluid tank
Description
Must meet ISO 22241 requirements.
As required unless otherwise specified
Fuel tank
SAE multi-purpose high temperature extreme pressure (EP2) performance with 1% max molybdenum disulphide (NLGI Grade 2) lithium base
Ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) Grade No. 2, or
ULSD Grade No. 1 and 2 mix 11 ; refer to
for more information
Single grade transmission/hydraulic fluid (THF)
Hydraulic reservoir
Gearbox
Recommend Viscosity:
•
60.1 cSt @ 40°C
•
9.5 cSt @ 100°C
Recommended brands:
•
AGCO Power Fluid 821XL
•
Case HY-TRAN ULTRACTION
•
John Deere Hy-Gard J20C
•
Petro-Canada Duratran
SAE 75W-140 or 80W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant (SAE J2360 preferred)
Standard Wheel drive
SAE 75W-140 or 80W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant (SAE J2360 preferred)
Capacity
28 liters
(7.5 U.S. gallons)
As required unless otherwise specified
518 liters
(137 U.S. gallons)
60 liters
(15.8 U.S. gallons) 12
2.3 liters
(2.4 U.S. quarts)
1.4 liters
(1.5 U.S. quarts)
11. Optional when operating temperature is below 0°C (32°F).
12. Denotes capacity of a dry system. Refill capacity is 58 liters (15 U.S. gallons).
215023
240
Revision B
Table 5.2
System Capacities (continued)
Lubricant/Fluid
Gear lubricant
Antifreeze
Engine oil
Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning refrigerant oil
Windshield washer fluid
Location
High Torque Wheel drive
Engine cooling system
Description
SAE 85W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant
ASTM D-6210 and Fleetguard ES Compleat
®
Engine oil pan
SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API
Class SJ and CJ-4 engine oil
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning system total capacity
Windshield washer fluid tank
R134A
PAG SP-15
SAE J942 compliant
Capacity
4.5 liters
(4.8 U.S. quarts)
31 liters
(8.2 U.S. gallons)
11 liters
(11.6 U.S. quarts)
2.38 kg (5.25 lb.)
240 cc (8.1 fl. oz.)
4 liters (1 U.S. gallon)
If Fleetguard ES Compleat
® is unavailable, use a coolant concentrate or prediluted coolant intended for use with heavy duty diesel engines and with a minimum of the following chemical and physical properties:
•
Provides cylinder cavitation protection according to fleet study run at or above 60% load capacity.
•
Protects the cooling system metals (cast iron, aluminum alloys, and copper alloys such as brass) from corrosion.
The additive package must be part of one of the following coolant mixtures:
•
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base prediluted (40
–
60%) heavy duty coolant.
•
Ethylene glycol or propylene glycol base heavy duty coolant concentrate in a 40
–
60% mixture of concentrate with quality water.
Water quality is important to the performance of the cooling system. Distilled, deionized, or demineralized water is recommended for mixing with ethylene glycol and propylene glycol base engine coolant concentrate.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use cooling system sealing additives or antifreeze that contains sealing additives.
5.1.4
Filter Part Numbers
Table 5.3 M1170 Filter Part Numbers
Filter
Engine oil filter
Hydraulic charge oil filter
Hydraulic return oil filter
Primary fuel filter element
Secondary fuel filter element
Fuel strainer (fuel tank vent line) filter
Primary element (cab)
Primary air filter element
Secondary air filter element
Return air filter
Part Number
MD #111974
MD #201713
MD #202986
MD #205028
MD #205029
MD #111608
MD #111060
MD #111954
MD #111955
MD #109797
215023
241
Revision B
Table 5.3
M1170 Filter Part Numbers (continued)
Filter
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
– suction filter
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
– vent hose filter
DEF supply module filter kit
Part Number
MD #207478
MD #111608
MD #207510
215023
242
Revision B
5.2
Windrower Break-In Inspections and Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance schedule specifies the recommended periodic maintenance procedures and service intervals. Regular maintenance is the best insurance against early wear and untimely breakdowns. Follow this schedule to maximize machine life.
For detailed instructions, refer to the various procedures in this chapter. Use the fluids and lubricants specified in
Recommended Fuel, Fluids, and Lubricants, page 239
.
Service Intervals: The recommended service intervals are in hours of operation. Where a service interval is given in more than one time frame, for example 100 hours or annually, service the machine at whichever interval is reached first.
IMPORTANT:
Recommended intervals are for average conditions. Service the machine more often if operated under adverse conditions
(severe dust, extra heavy loads, etc.).
CAUTION
Carefully follow safety messages given in
.
5.2.1
Break-in Inspection Schedule
Hours
1
5
10
50
50
50
50
50
50
5
5
5
50
50
50
Drive wheel nuts
A/C compressor belt
Caster wheel nuts
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Drive wheel nuts
Item
Break-in Inspections
Check
Torque: 510 Nm (375 lbf·ft) dry
Repeat checks at one hour intervals until torque stabilizes at two consecutive checks
Tension
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener bolts
Torque: 170 Nm (125 lbf·ft)
Inboard bolt torque: 136 Nm (100·lbf·ft)
Outboard bolt torque: 244 Nm (182 lbf·ft)
Outboard jam nut: 136 Nm (100 lbf·ft)
Torque: 759 Nm (560 lbf·ft)
Torque: 759 Nm (560 lbf·ft)
Torque: 510 Nm (375 lbf·ft) dry
Repeat checks at one hour intervals until torque stabilizes at two consecutive checks
Hose clamps: air intake / radiator / heater / hydraulic
Walking beam width adjustment bolts
Caster wheel nuts
Caster wheel anti-shimmy dampener bolts
Hand-tighten unless otherwise noted
Torque: 759 Nm (560 lbf·ft)
Torque: 170 Nm (125 lbf·ft)
Inboard bolt torque: 136 Nm (100 lbf·ft)
Outboard bolt torque: 244 Nm (182 lbf·ft)
Outboard jam nut: 136 Nm (100 lbf·ft)
Change Main gearbox oil
Drive wheel lubricant
Charge system oil filter
Return oil filter
Change
Change
Change
215023
243
Revision B
5.2.2
Maintenance Schedule/Record
Windrower serial number: ___________________
Combine this record with the record in the header operator
’ s manual. Make copies of this page to continue the record.
Refer to
5 Maintenance and Servicing, page 239
for information about each maintenance procedure.
Maintenance
Record
Hour meter reading
Date
Serviced by
Action:
ü
- Check
SS
- Lubricate
FIRST USE, refer to
5.2.1 Break-in Inspection Schedule, page 243
10 Hours or Daily
13
ü
Engine oil level 14
ü
ü
Engine coolant level at reserve tank
ü
ü
Drain fuel filter water trap
ü
Hydraulic hoses and lines for leaks
ü
ü
Tire inflation
ü
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level 14
Annually
15
ü
A/C blower
ü
Antifreeze concentration
ü
Battery charge
ü
Battery fluid level
ü
Steering linkages
50 Hours
®
Cab fresh air intake filter
S
Caster pivots
S
Forked caster wheel bearings
ü
Engine-to-pumps gearbox oil level
S
Top lift link pivots on lift arms (2 places on both sides [x4]) p
- Change
®
- Clean
É
- Add
13. Whichever occurs first.
14. A record of daily maintenance is not normally required but is at the Owner/Operator
’ s discretion.
15. Perform annual maintenance prior to start of operating season.
215023
244
Revision B
100 Hours or Annually
®
A/C condenser
®
Charge air cooler
®
Hydraulic oil cooler
®
Radiator
®
Cab air return filter
250 Hours or Annually
p
Engine oil and filter p
Engine air cleaner primary filter element
S
Single-sided caster wheel hub bearings
ü
Drive wheel lubricant level
S
Mud caster wheel hub bearings
ü
Exhaust system (visually inspect for leakage point, loose clamps or loose hose) p
Engine gearbox oil
500 Hours or Annually
p
Primary and secondary fuel filters p
Hydraulic return filter and charge filter
ü
Safety systems
1000 Hours
®
DEF supply module filter
1000 Hours or Annually
p
Fuel tank vent line filter p
Wheel drive lubricant
2000 Hours p
Crankcase breather filter and gasket p
DEF tank vent hose filter
215023
245
Revision B
2000 Hours or Every Two Years 13
p
Engine coolant
ü
General inspection
2000 Hours or Every Three Years 13
p
Hydraulic oil
4500 Hours or Every Three Years 13
p
DEF supply module filter
ü
Engine valve tappet clearance
5.2.3
Electronic Maintenance Tool
The Electronic Maintenance Tool contains a list of items requiring service after 250 hours or more of windrower operation.
To access the maintenance tool, use the following procedure:
1.
Press soft key 5 (A) to display the main menu.
2.
To select the MAINTENANCE icon (C), use the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) scroll knob (B) or the ground speed lever (GSL) scroll wheel (not shown).
3.
Press the HPT scroll knob (B) or the GSL SELECT button (not shown) to select the icon.
B
C
A
4.
Select the MAINTENANCE icon (A) to open the maintenance menu (B). The following information can be viewed:
•
Completed maintenance
•
Selected maintenance notifications
•
Maintenance log
Figure 5.1: Opening the Main Menu
A
B
Figure 5.2: Maintenance Icon and Menu
215023
246
Revision B
5.3
Engine Compartment
CAUTION
•
NEVER operate engine in a closed building. Proper ventilation is required to avoid exhaust gas hazards.
•
Keep the engine clean. Straw and chaff on a hot engine are a fire hazard.
•
NEVER use gasoline, naphtha, or any other volatile material for cleaning purposes. These materials are toxic and/or flammable.
5.3.1
Opening Hood
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Move latch (A) towards right cab-forward side of the windrower.
3.
Grasp louver (B), and lift hood to open.
B
A
NOTE:
If the optional High Debris Cooler Intake kit (A) is installed, a louver can still be used to open the hood.
Figure 5.3: Hood
A
Figure 5.4: Hood with Optional High Debris Cooler
Intake Kit
215023
247
Revision B
5.3.2
Closing Hood
1.
Grasp hood by louver (A) and lower until hood engages latch.
NOTE:
Check that latch lever is not tilted to ensure hood is latched.
A
Figure 5.5: Engine Compartment
215023
248
Revision B
5.4
Platform
Swing-away platform and stair units are provided on the windrower for access to the operator
’ s station and engine bay maintenance.
5.4.1
Opening Platform
Only the left cab-forward side platform can be opened.
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
1.
Approach platform/stair unit (A) on the left cab-forward side of the windrower and ensure the cab door is closed.
2.
Push latch (B), and pull platform (A) toward the walking beam until it stops and the latch engages.
B
A
Figure 5.6: Left Cab-Forward Platform
5.4.2
Closing Platform
CAUTION
Do NOT stand on an unlocked platform. It is unstable and may cause you to fall.
1.
Push latch (A) to unlock platform (B).
1015479
A
B
Figure 5.7: Left Cab-Forward Platform
1015478
215023
249
Revision B
2.
Pull platform (A) towards the cab until it stops and latch engages.
A
Figure 5.8: Left Cab-Forward Platform
5.4.3
Adjusting the Platform
To achieve proper gap between platform and frame, latch adjustment may be required.
1.
Locate latch (B) beneath the platform.
2.
Adjust the latch position by loosening bolts (A) and moving the latch (B).
3.
Retighten bolts (A) and close the platform.
B
A
4.
The rubber bumper (B) at the cab end of the platform should measure 52
–
60 mm (2
–
2 3/8 in.) when properly compressed against the frame. Platform should also sit firmly against the front guide (A).
NOTE:
Top plate of platform removed for clarity.
5.
If adjustment is required, loosen two bolts (C) and slide support as required.
6.
Tighten bolts (C) to 39.5 Nm (29.1 lbf·ft).
Figure 5.9: Left Platform
B
A
Figure 5.10: Left Platform
C
215023
250
Revision B
7.
To adjust the horizontal position of the platform, loosen bolts (A) and adjust bolt (B).
8.
Tighten bolts (A) to 68.5 Nm (50.5 lbf·ft).
9.
Use bolts (C) to adjust the platform angle. Tighten bolts (C) to 68.5 Nm (50.5 lbf·ft) after adjustment is complete.
A
B
Figure 5.11: Left Platform
5.4.4
Accessing Tool Box
A tool box is located inside a storage compartment under the left cab-forward platform.
1.
Grasp the handle on storage compartment (A) and press latch (B). Pull the unlatched handle to open the compartment.
A
B
2.
The tool box (A) is located inside storage compartment (B).
3.
Swing compartment (B) under the platform to close it, and push on the handle to secure the latch.
NOTE:
The ignition key also locks the storage compartment.
Figure 5.12: Tool Box
A
B
Figure 5.13: Tool Box
215023
251
Revision B
5.5
System Maintenance Overviews
5.5.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid System
IMPORTANT:
If the windrower is going to be in storage for longer than six months, the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank should be drained to avoid damaging the tank. For instructions, refer to
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank, page 253
.
IMPORTANT:
If the windrower temperature is going to be below 0°C (32°F), do NOT fill the DEF tank to a full level. It should be less than
75% full. When freezing, the DEF fluid will expand by approximately 7%.
NOTE:
For DEF fluid specifications, refer to this manual
’ s inside back cover.
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
It is necessary to drain the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank when the DEF is contaminated or if storing the windrower for a period greater than six months.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Place a drain pan under the DEF tank (B). The drain pan should be large enough to hold 28 liters (7.5 U.S. gallons).
IMPORTANT:
Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by noncombustible absorbent material like sand and then shovelled into a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water as DEF is corrosive.
B
A
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
3.
Remove the drain plug (A) from under the tank (B) and drain.
4.
Add some distilled water to the tank (B) to flush out remaining contaminants.
5.
Drain the distilled water that was used to clean the tank.
6.
Reinstall drain plug (A) into the tank (B).
7.
Refill DEF tank. For instructions, refer to
Exhaust Fluid Tank, page 254 .
NOTE:
Do NOT refill if storing for six months or longer.
Figure 5.14: View from beneath Tank
215023
253
Revision B
Filling the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
The symbol inside the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) gauge on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display will signal the
Operator when DEF level is low.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Clean around filler cap (A).
3.
Turn cap (A) counterclockwise until loose and remove cap.
NOTE:
Filler cap for DEF tank is blue and the nozzle dispenser is smaller than that of the fuel tank.
A
Figure 5.15: DEF Tank
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
4.
Fill tank with approved DEF. For specifications, refer to the inside back cover.
IMPORTANT:
DEF is corrosive. Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shovelled into a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
IMPORTANT:
If the windrower temperature is going to be below 0°C
(32°F), do NOT fill the DEF tank more than 75% full. When freezing, the DEF fluid will expand by approximately 7%. For storage information, refer to
5.
Replace filler cap (A) and turn clockwise until tight.
A
Figure 5.16: DEF Tank
215023
254
Revision B
5.5.2
Twin-Flow Cooling System
Figure 5.17: Twin-Flow Cooling System
A
E
B
D
C
A - Air Conditioning Condenser
D - Air Conditioning Box
B - Charge Air Cooler
E - Engine Radiator
C - Hydraulic Oil Cooler
NOTE:
Antifreeze is essential in any climate. It broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant freezing point and by raising its boiling point. Antifreeze also contains rust inhibitors and other additives to prolong engine life.
IMPORTANT:
If antifreeze strength is not adequate, do NOT drain cooling system to protect against freezing. System may not drain completely, and damage from freezing could still result.
Refer to
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 240
for detailed information.
215023
255
Revision B
Engine Cooling
Figure 5.18: Engine Cooling
A
D
C
B
A - Pressurized Coolant Tank
C - Engine Outlet Hose
B - Engine Inlet Hose
D - Vent Hoses
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank Cap
The pressurized coolant tank cap must fit tightly, and the cap gasket must be in good condition to maintain the 97
–
124 kPa
(14
–
18 psi) pressure in the cooling system.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
215023
256
Revision B
3.
Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
4.
Turn the cap (A) again and remove.
5.
Check the gasket for cracks or deterioration, and replace the cap if necessary.
6.
Check that the spring in the cap moves freely.
7.
Replace the cap if spring is stuck.
8.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
Figure 5.19: Coolant Tank
A
Charge Air Cooler
Figure 5.20: Charge Air Cooler (CAC)
B
A
C
D
A - Turbocharger
C - Charge Air Cooler
B - Charge Air Inlet Duct
D - Charge Air Outlet Duct
215023
257
Revision B
Charge Air Cooling
After the intake air passes through the air filter, it passes through the turbocharger (A), which boosts the air pressure.
This process heats the air so it is passed through pipe (B) to a cooler (C) before entering the engine intake (D).
The cooler is located in the cooling box behind the cab. The cooler screens and components should be cleaned with compressed air every 100 hours of operation. Daily cleaning may be required if operating in heavy crop conditions. For instructions, refer to
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page 293
.
A
D
B
C
Figure 5.21: Engine Air Intake System
Hydraulic Oil Cooler
The hydraulic oil cooler is located inside the cooling box behind the radiator.
Clean cooler (A) with compressed air every 100 hours of operation. Daily cleaning may be required if operating in heavy debris conditions. For instructions, refer to
.
A
Figure 5.22: Hydraulic Oil Cooler
215023
258
Revision B
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Figure 5.23: Air Conditioning
A
E
C
F
D
A - Condenser
D - Drier
B
B - Compressor
E - HVAC Unit
C - HVAC Drain Lines
F - Cab Heater Lines
Condenser
The air conditioning condenser should be cleaned with compressed air every 100 hours of operation. More frequent cleaning may be necessary in severe conditions.
Cleaning the condenser can be done at the same time as the radiator, oil cooler, and charge air cooler. For instructions, refer to
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Screens and Components, page 293 .
5.5.3
Air Intake System
The air intake system filters air used by the engine.
IMPORTANT:
•
Do NOT run engine with air cleaner disconnected or disassembled.
•
Over-servicing the filter element increases the risk of dirt being ingested by the engine and severely damaging the engine.
•
Filter servicing should only be performed when the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) indicates ENGINE AIR FILTER or at the specified interval. Refer to
5.2.2 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 244
.
215023
259
Revision B
Figure 5.24: Air Intake System
A
E
D
F
C
B
A - Air Intake
D - Air Cleaner
B - Air Duct to Air Cleaner
E - Turbocharger Intake
Message (A) appears on the HPT when the engine air filter requires servicing.
C - Air Cleaner Intake
F - Aspirator Duct
A
Figure 5.25: Filter Service Required Message
1019750
215023
260
Revision B
5.5.4
Hydraulic System
The M1170 Windrower hydraulic system operates the windrower drive system, header lift, header drive systems, cooling systems fan, and other lift systems.
WARNING
•
Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury. Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines.
•
Tighten all connections before applying pressure. Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject fluids under high pressure.
WARNING
•
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
•
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a Doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
Figure 5.26: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
Figure 5.27: Checking Hydraulic Leaks
IMPORTANT:
Foreign material such as dirt, dust, and water is the major cause of damage in the hydraulic system.
If hydraulic system components must be disconnected for service, protect the ends of hoses, tubing, and ports of components from contamination with clean, lint-free towels, or clean plastic bags.
Before installing any replacement hose, flush the inside with unused diesel fuel or unused commercial petroleum cleaning solvent for ten seconds minimum. Do NOT use water, water soluble cleaners, or compressed air.
The hydraulic system components are built to very close tolerances and have been adjusted at the factory. Do NOT attempt to service these components except to maintain proper oil level, to change oil, and to change oil filters as described in this manual.
See your MacDon Dealer for all other service.
Hydraulic Oil Cooler
The hydraulic oil cooler is located inside the cooling box behind the radiator.
It should be cleaned with compressed air every 100 hours of operation. Daily cleaning may be required if operating in heavy debris conditions. For instructions, refer to
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page 293 .
215023
261
Revision B
Knife/Disc Drive Hydraulics
A single piston hydraulic pump works in a closed-loop circuit providing oil to the knife/disc circuit.
The pump will maintain knife/disc speed at all normal operating engine speeds (>1500 rpm), regardless of varying loads on the header.
The pump requires charge flow in order to:
•
Replace oil from internal leakages
•
Fill and maintain positive pressure in the work circuit
•
Provide flushing flow for cooling, and introduce clean oil into the circuit
Reel and Draper Hydraulics
The reel and draper circuits are powered by a gear pump. This allows independent oil flow to the reel and draper circuit and separates oil flow from the knife pump.
The header drive manifold manages flow control and relief for these circuits.
Traction Drive Hydraulics
The windrower traction drive consists of two variable displacement axial piston hydraulic pumps, one for each drive wheel.
The pump
’ s speeds are increased through a gearbox from the engine. Each pump requires charge flow in order to:
•
Replace oil from internal leakages
•
Fill and maintain positive pressure in the work circuit
•
Provide flushing flow for cooling (occurs at the motors), and introduce clean oil into the circuit
215023
262
Revision B
5.5.5
Electrical System
Module Layout
215023
263
Revision B
Module Locations
215023
C
B
A
F
D
E
G
265
H
J
Revision B
Module Locations Legend
A - Console Module (MD #208808)
D - Master Control Module (MD #205941)
G - HVAC Controller Module (MD 208110) 16
B - Harvest Performance Tracker Display (MD #306001)
E - Firewall Extension Module (MD #201396)
H - Chassis Relay Module (MD #208160)
C - Roof Relay Module (MD #208160) 16
F - Chassis Extension Module (MD #201396)
J - Engine ECM
16.
Fuse Panel and Relay Module Decals, page 363
215023
266
Revision B
Master Controller
The master controller houses the windrower software and communicates with all other electrical modules on the windrower.
Extension Modules
The M1170 Windrower
’ s has two extension modules. One is behind the cab, next to the master controller, and the other is located inside the left frame rail. They are used to provide inputs and outputs to various sensors and valve solenoids throughout the windrower.
Figure 5.28: Master Controller
Relay Modules
The M1170 Windrower has two relay modules. One is located on the chassis and the other inside the cab headliner. There are fuses and relays located in both relay modules.
The chassis relay module is located on the left (cab-forward) frame rail.
Figure 5.29: Extension Modules
215023
267
Figure 5.30: Chassis Relay Module
Revision B
The roof relay module is located inside the cab
’ s headliner.
Figure 5.31: Roof Relay Module
Preventing Electrical System Damage
To prevent electrical system damage, take the following precautions:
•
Carefully observe polarity when attaching booster battery.
•
Do NOT short across battery or alternator terminals or allow battery positive (+) cable (B) or alternator wire to become grounded.
•
Be sure alternator connections are correct before connecting the cables to the battery.
•
When welding on any part of the machine, disconnect battery cables. For instructions, refer to
B
A
•
Always disconnect battery ground cables when working with the alternator or regulator.
Figure 5.32: Alternator
A - Negative Terminal B - Positive Terminal
•
Never attempt to polarize alternator or regulator.
•
If wires are disconnected from the alternator, refer to Figure
to ensure proper connection.
•
Never ground the alternator field terminal or field.
•
Never connect or disconnect alternator or regulator wires with battery connected or alternator operating.
•
Always disconnect cables from the battery when using a charger to charge battery in windrower.
•
Ensure all cables are securely connected before operating engine.
•
To avoid damage to circuit boards by static electricity, disconnect negative battery terminals when replacing electronic control modules. Furthermore, when handling electronic control modules, avoid touching the connector pins directly.
215023
268
Revision B
5.6
Break-In Inspection Procedures
For the break-in schedule, refer to
5.2.1 Break-in Inspection Schedule, page 243 .
5.6.1
Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts
To tighten the drive wheel nuts, follow these steps:
IMPORTANT:
•
To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, tighten nuts by hand. Threads must be clean and dry, do NOT apply any lubricant or anti-seize compound. Do NOT use an impact gun, and do NOT overtighten wheel nuts.
•
Use only genuine, manufacturer specified nuts.
1.
Locate the drive wheels (A).
A
Figure 5.33: Drive Wheel Location
2.
Torque each nut (A) to 510 Nm (375 lbf·ft) using the tightening sequence shown at right.
3.
Repeat tightening sequence two additional times, ensuring the specified torque is achieved each time.
4.
Repeat torque procedure every hour until two consecutive checks confirm that there is no movement of the nuts (A).
10
1
3
A
5
2
7
Figure 5.34: Drive Wheel
—
10 Bolt
8
9
6
4
215023
269
Revision B
1
9
12
8
6
4
3
5
7
11 10
2
Figure 5.35: Drive Wheel
–
12 Bolt (Optional)
A
5.6.2
Tightening Caster Wheel Nuts
At first use or when a wheel is removed, check wheel nut/bolt torque every 15 minutes on the road or 1 hour in the field until the specified torque is maintained. Once specified torque is maintained, check wheel nut/bolt torque after 10 and 50 hours (field or road operation), and then every 200 hour intervals thereafter.
1.
Locate the caster wheel assemblies (A).
A
Figure 5.36: Caster Wheel Location
2.
Tighten wheel nuts (A) to 163 Nm (120 lbf·ft) using the tightening sequence shown at right. Repeat the tightening sequence three times.
3
6
A
8
5
1
4
7
2
Figure 5.37: Forked Casters With Suspension
215023
270
Revision B
A
6
1
4
2
Figure 5.38: Single-Sided Caster
5
3
5.6.3
Tightening Caster Wheel Anti-Shimmy Dampeners
Each caster is equipped with two fluid-filled anti-shimmy dampeners (A).
The mounting bolts (B) and (C) need to be checked periodically for security. Refer to
5.2.2 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page
•
Two inboard bolts (B) should be tightened to 136 Nm
(100 lbf·ft)
•
Outboard bolt (C) should be tightened to 244 Nm (182 lbf·ft)
•
Outboard jam nut (D) should be tightened to 136 Nm
(100 lbf·ft)
B
D
A
Figure 5.39: Anti-Shimmy Dampener
C
5.6.4
Tightening Walking Beam Adjustment Bolts
Check walking beam adjustment bolt torque after 5, 10, and 50 hours of field or road operation.
1.
Tighten and torque back bolts (A) to 759 Nm (560 lbf·ft).
2.
Tighten and torque bottom bolts (B) to 759 Nm (560 lbf·ft).
3.
Repeat on opposite side.
A
B
215023
271
Figure 5.40: Walking Beam Adjustment Bolts
Revision B
5.6.5
Tensioning Air Conditioner Compressor Belts
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Loosen compressor mounting hardware (A).
4.
Pry compressor (B) away from engine so that a force of
45 N (10 lbf) deflects the belts (C) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
NOTE:
The tab (D) on bracket can be used as support for prying.
5.
Tighten compressor mounting hardware (A).
6.
Recheck tension and readjust as required.
7.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
C
D
A
B
Figure 5.41: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
5.6.6
Changing Engine Gearbox Lubricant
Change engine gearbox lubricant after the first 50 hours, and then at every 250 hours or annually as follows:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
NOTE:
The engine should be warm when changing the lubricant.
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Place a 4 liter (1 U.S. gallon) drain pan under the gearbox.
215023
272
Revision B
4.
Remove drain plug (A) and allow lubricant to completely finish draining.
5.
Inspect the drain plug. Small metal shavings are normal. If there are any larger metal pieces, an inspection of the gearbox will be required.
6.
Install drain plug (A) and remove check plug (B).
7.
Add lubricant until the oil level reaches check plug (B). For lubricant specifications, refer to
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 240
.
8.
Replace check plug (B).
9.
Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the check plug and drain plug.
B
Figure 5.42: Engine Gearbox
A
5.6.7
Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
–
10 Bolt
The wheel drive lubricant should be changed after the first 50 hours and every 1000 hours or annually, whichever occurs first. Change the lubricant when it is warm.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Park windrower on level ground and position windrower so drain plug (B) is at the lowest point.
A
2.
Shut down the windrower and remove key from ignition.
3.
Place a container (about 2 liters [2 quarts]) under the lower drain plug (B).
4.
Remove plugs (A) and (B), and drain lubricant into container.
5.
Dispose of oil in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
B
Figure 5.43: Drive Wheel
215023
273
Revision B
6.
After the lubricant has drained completely, position the windrower so that ports (A) and (B) on wheel are horizontally level with the center of the hub (C) as shown.
7.
Add lubricant. For instructions, refer to
8.
Reinstall all plugs.
A
C
B
Figure 5.44: Drive Wheel
5.6.8
Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
–
12 Bolt (Optional)
The wheel drive lubricant should be changed after the first 50 hours and every 1000 hours or annually, whichever occurs first. Change the lubricant when it is warm.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Park the windrower on level ground and position the drive wheel so fill/drain plug (A) is at the lowest point.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Place a container (about 5 liters [5.3 quarts]) under the fill/ drain plug (A).
4.
Remove fill/drain plug (A) and check plug (B), and drain lubricant into container.
5.
Dispose of oil in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
B
A
Figure 5.45: Wheel Drive
—
12 Bolt
215023
274
Revision B
6.
After the lubricant has drained completely, rotate the wheel drive until fill/drain plug (A) is vertically centered with the hub, and check port (B) on wheel drive is horizontally level with the center of the hub.
7.
Add lubricant. For instructions, refer to
12 Bolt (Optional), page 306 .
8.
Reinstall check plug (B) and torque to 7.5 Nm (6 lbf·ft).
9.
Reinstall fill/drain plug (A) and torque to 22 Nm (18 lbf·ft).
A
B
Figure 5.46: Wheel Drive
—
12 Bolt
5.6.9
Return Oil Filter
The return filter removes particulate contaminants from the return oil from the fan drive, lift circuits, and the drive circuits.
It must be changed after the first 50 hours and then at 500-hour intervals. Follow the service schedule on the Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) display.
Removing Return Oil Filter
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
DANGER
Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Locate the return filter (A) under the left platform.
3.
Clean around head of the filter (A).
4.
Place a container beneath the filter (A) to collect any oil that may leak out.
5.
Unscrew filter (A) with a filter wrench.
6.
Dispose of used oil and filter in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
A
Figure 5.47: Return Filter
215023
275
Revision B
NOTE:
Image showing filter head removed to show component clarity.
7.
Remove and discard gasket (C) from groove (B) in filter head (A).
NOTE:
Filter (D) is shown to provide context.
B
D
Figure 5.48: Return Filter
Installing Return Oil Filter
NOTE:
For filter specifications, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
.
NOTE:
Image shows filter head removed for component clarity.
1.
Clean the gasket groove (B) in the filter head (A).
2.
Apply a thin film of clean oil to the new filter gasket (C).
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT pre-fill filter before installation as this may potentially introduce unfiltered oil into the system.
3.
Install new gasket (C) into the groove (B) in the filter head (A).
4.
Screw the new filter (D) onto the filter head until the gasket just contacts the filter.
B
D
Figure 5.49: Return Filter
5.
Tighten filter (A) an additional 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install oil filter.
Overtightening can damage gasket and filter.
6.
Check hydraulic fluid levels. For instructions, refer to
Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281 . For capacity level, refer to
the inside back cover.
A
Figure 5.50: Return Filter
215023
276
A
C
A
C
Revision B
5.6.10
Charge Filter
The charge filter removes particulate contaminants from the oil before the oil is directed into the traction and header drive pumps. The oil maintains a positive pressure and is continuously supplied in these closed circuits during operation. The charge filter has a high-pressure bypass of 345 kPa (50 psi) that allows oil to bypass the filter element during cold temperatures and when the filter element is heavily loaded.
The charge filter must be replaced at regular intervals. The filter telltale is displayed on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT). The charge filter must be changed after first 50 hours and every 500 hours thereafter. Follow the service schedule on the HPT.
Refer to the following procedures to change the charge filter:
•
Removing Charge Filter, page 277 .
•
Installing Charge Filter, page 277
.
Removing Charge Filter
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
DANGER
Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
5.4.1 Opening Platform, page 249 .
3.
Clean around head of the filter.
4.
Place a container beneath the filter to collect any oil that may leak out.
5.
Unscrew filter (A) with a filter wrench.
6.
Dispose of used oil and filter in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
A
Figure 5.51: Charge Filter
Installing Charge Filter
NOTE:
For charge filter replacement part number, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
.
1.
Clean the gasket surface of the filter head.
2.
Apply a thin film of clean oil to the filter gasket.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT pre-fill filter before installation as this may potentially introduce unfiltered oil into the system.
215023
277
Revision B
3.
Screw the new filter (A) onto the mount until the gasket just contacts the filter head.
4.
Tighten filter an additional 1/2 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install oil filter.
Overtightening can damage gasket and filter.
5.
Check hydraulic fluid levels. For instructions, refer to
Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281 . For capacity level, refer to
the inside back cover.
Figure 5.52: Charge Filter
A
215023
278
Revision B
5.7
Every 10 Hours or Daily
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 10 hours of operation or daily, whichever occurs first.
•
Check engine oil level. For instructions, refer to
5.7.1 Checking Engine Oil Level, page 279
.
•
Check engine coolant level. For instructions, refer to
5.7.5 Checking Engine Coolant Level, page 285 .
•
Check hydraulic oil level. For instructions, refer to
5.7.3 Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281
.
•
Check tire inflation. For instructions, refer to
5.7.4 Checking Tire Pressures, page 282 .
•
Check hydraulic hoses and lines for leaks. For instructions, refer to
5.7.6 Hoses and Lines, page 285
.
•
Drain fuel filter water trap. For instructions, refer to
5.7.2 Fuel/Water Separator, page 281 .
•
Clean radiator, hydraulic oil cooler, charge air cooler, and A/C condenser. For instructions, refer to
•
Fill fuel tank. For instructions, refer to
.
•
Check diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) level. For instructions, refer to
3.17 Harvest Performance Tracker Display, page 77
.
5.7.1
Checking Engine Oil Level
Check engine oil level frequently and watch for any signs of leakage.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
NOTE:
During the break-in period, a higher than usual oil consumption should be considered normal.
NOTE:
Oil can be checked without opening the hood.
1.
Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the filter and drain plug.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Wait about 5 minutes.
4.
Remove dipstick (A) by turning it counterclockwise to unlock.
5.
Wipe dipstick clean and reinsert it into engine.
A
Figure 5.53: Dipstick Location
215023
279
Revision B
6.
Remove dipstick again and check oil level. Oil level should be between LOW (L) and HIGH (H). If below the LOW mark, add oil.
NOTE:
Adding 1.9 liters (2 U.S. quarts) will raise the level from
LOW to HIGH. To add oil, refer to
7.
Replace dipstick and turn it clockwise to lock.
8.
Grasp hood by louver (A) and lower until hood engages latch.
NOTE:
Check that latch lever is not tilted to ensure hood is latched.
Figure 5.54: Engine Oil Level
A
Figure 5.55: Engine Compartment
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
2.
Clean around filler cap (A) and remove by turning it counterclockwise.
3.
Carefully pour in 11 L (11.6 US qts) of new oil. A funnel is recommended to avoid spillage. Refer to the inside back cover for oil specifications.
CAUTION
Do NOT fill above the HIGH mark.
4.
Replace oil filler cap (A) and turn it clockwise until snug.
5.
Check the oil level. For instructions, refer to
A
Figure 5.56: Oil Filler Cap
215023
280
Revision B
6.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
5.7.2
Fuel/Water Separator
A fuel/water separator is incorporated into the primary fuel filter. The separator is equipped with a drain and a sensor that detects water in the fuel and displays an alert on the HPT display. Drain the water and sediment from the separator daily or at any time the Water In Fuel (WIF) light illuminates on the HPT display.
To remove water from the fuel system, refer to
Removing Water from Fuel System, page 281
.
Removing Water from Fuel System
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
3.
Place a container under the filter (A) to catch spilled fluid.
4.
Turn drain valve (C) by hand 1 1/2 to 2 turns counterclockwise until draining occurs.
5.
Drain the filter sump of water and sediment until clear fuel is visible.
6.
Turn the valve clockwise to close the drain.
7.
Dispose of fluid safely.
8.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
A
C
B
Figure 5.57: Fuel System
A - Primary Fuel Filter
B - Water in Fuel (WIF) Sensor
C - Drain Valve
5.7.3
Checking Hydraulic Oil
Hydraulic oil is used to transmit force under high pressure. The oil also lubricates, cools, and cleans the system, therefore the cleanliness and quality of the oil is highly important to ensure long system life. It is extremely important to avoid contamination when service and regular maintenance is performed.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
WARNING
Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
215023
281
Revision B
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Lower the header fully.
3.
Lower the reel fully.
4.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
5.
Locate sight glass (A) on the right side of the tank. It indicates the oil level and any signs of contamination.
NOTE:
No oil in the sight glass indicates that the oil level is below the add mark on the dipstick. The sight glass is viewable with hood open or closed.
6.
Ensure the hydraulic oil level is between the low and full indicator marks.
7.
If more oil is required to maintain the level between low and full indicator marks, refer to
5.13.3 Filling Hydraulic Oil, page 323 .
A
Figure 5.58: Hydraulic Oil Sight Glass
5.7.4
Checking Tire Pressures
Check tire pressures with a gauge.
Caster Wheel Tires: Inflate all caster wheel tires (B) to 110 kPa
(16 psi).
Drive Wheel Tires: For optimal performance, drive wheel (A) tire pressures are determined by tire type, header size, and additional options. Refer to the following table:
Table 5.4 Drive Tire Inflation Specifications
Header Type Description
Draper Header
D115X single reel
D115X single reel
D120X single reel
4.6 m (15 ft.), double knife, timed
4.6 m (15 ft.), double knife, timed
6.1 m (20 ft.), double knife, timed
Installed Options
—
—
—
215023
282
A
Figure 5.59: Windrower Tires
Weight Kit Tire Type
—
—
—
Bar
Turf
Bar
B
Pressure kPa (psi)
138 (20)
138 (20)
138 (20)
Revision B
Table 5.4
Drive Tire Inflation Specifications (continued)
Header Type
D120X single reel
D125X single reel
D125X single reel
D130XL single reel
D130XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL double reel
D135XL double reel
D135XL double reel
D135XL double reel
D130XL single reel
D130XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL single reel
D135XL double reel
D135XL double reel
D140XL double reel
D140XL double reel
Description Installed Options
6.1 m (20 ft.), double knife, timed
7.6 m (25 ft.), double knife, timed
7.6 m (25 ft.), double knife, timed
9.1 m (30 ft.), double knife, timed
9.1 m (30 ft.), double knife, timed
9.1 m (30 ft.), double knife, timed
9.1 m (30 ft.), double knife, timed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
10.7 m (35 ft.), double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
—
—
—
Transport
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Base
Transport
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Base
Transport
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Base
Weight Kit
—
—
—
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
2
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Tire Type
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
215023
283
241 (35)
241 (35)
283 (41)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
221 (32)
241 (35)
Pressure kPa (psi)
138 (20)
159 (23)
159 (23)
200 (29)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
200 (29)
241 (35)
Revision B
Table 5.4
Drive Tire Inflation Specifications (continued)
Header Type Description Installed Options
D140XL double reel
D140XL double reel
D140XL double reel
D140XL double reel
D145XL double reel
D145XL double reel
D145XL double reel
D145XL double reel
D145XL double reel
D145XL double reel
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
13.7 m (45 ft.), double knife, untimed
Rotary Disc Header
R113/R116
4 m (13 ft.) /
4.9 m (16 ft.)
R113/R116
R113/R116
4 m (13 ft.) /
4.9 m (16 ft.)
4 m (13 ft.) /
4.9 m (16 ft.)
Auger Header
A40DX
A40DX
A40DX GSS
A40DX GSS
A40DX
A40DX
4.9 m (16 ft.)
4.9 m (16 ft.)
4.9 m (16 ft.)
(Grass Seed)
4.9 m (16 ft.)
(Grass Seed)
5.5 m (18 ft.)
5.5 m (18 ft.)
Transport
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Base
Transport
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
No Conditioner
Steel or Poly Roll
Steel or Poly Roll
—
—
—
—
—
—
Weight Kit
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
3
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bar or Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Tire Type
Bar
Turf
Bar
Turf
Bar
138 (20)
179 (26)
159 (23)
200 (29)
200 (29)
159 (23)
159 (23)
200 (29)
220 (32)
Pressure kPa (psi)
241 (35)
241 (35)
283 (41)
241 (35)
241 (35)
241 (35)
262 (38)
241 (35)
283 (41)
241 (35)
215023
284
Revision B
5.7.5
Checking Engine Coolant Level
Check coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank daily.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
NOTE:
Ensure the engine has cooled down prior to checking.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Locate the coolant tank.
4.
The tank has a MAX and MIN COLD line marker. Check to make sure the coolant level is at the MAX COLD line (A). If it is too low, add coolant. For specifications, refer to the inside back cover.
NOTE:
When checking coolant level, use the MAX COLD line on the side of tank that faces cab for an accurate measurement.
5.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
A
Figure 5.60: Coolant Tank
5.7.6
Hoses and Lines
Check hydraulic hoses and lines daily for signs of leaks.
WARNING
•
Avoid high-pressure fluids. Escaping fluid can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
•
Relieve pressure before disconnecting hydraulic lines.
Tighten all connections before applying pressure.
•
Keep hands and body away from pin-holes and nozzles which eject fluids under high pressure.
•
If ANY fluid is injected into the skin, it must be surgically removed within a few hours by a Doctor familiar with this type of injury or gangrene may result.
•
Use a piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
•
Any service components must be genuine MacDon parts.
•
All connections must be properly torqued. Refer to
Torque Specifications, page 401
.
Figure 5.61: Hydraulic Pressure Hazard
215023
285
Revision B
IMPORTANT:
•
Keep hydraulic coupler tips and connectors clean. Dust, dirt, water, and foreign material are the major causes of hydraulic system damage.
•
DO NOT attempt to service hydraulic system in the field. Precision fits require WHITE ROOM CARE during overhaul.
5.7.7
Checking Engine Gearbox Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant
Check lubricant level every day.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
1.
Park the windrower on level ground, shut down engine, and remove key.
NOTE:
If engine is hot, wait 10 minutes before checking level to allow lubricant to cool and settle in the sump.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
3.
Remove dipstick (A) and check lubricant level.
B
A
Figure 5.62: Gearbox Lubricant Dipstick
215023
286
Revision B
5.8
Every 50 Hours
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 50 hours of operation.
•
Clean the cab fresh air intake filter. For instructions, refer to
5.8.1 Fresh Air Intake Filter, page 287
.
•
Check gearbox oil level. For instructions, refer to
5.7.7 Checking Engine Gearbox Lubricant Level and Adding Lubricant, page 286
.
•
Grease caster bearings and pivots. For instructions, refer to
5.8.2 Greasing the Windrower, page 289
.
•
Grease top lift link pivots. For instructions, refer to
5.8.2 Greasing the Windrower, page 289 .
5.8.1
Fresh Air Intake Filter
The fresh air intake filter is located outside the lower right rear of the cab (A), and should be serviced every 50 hours under normal conditions and more frequently in severe conditions.
Refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
for the appropriate part number.
A
Figure 5.63: Fresh Air Intake Filter Location
Removing Fresh Air Intake Filter
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
3.
Rotate latch (A) counterclockwise to loosen, and remove fresh air filter door (B).
B
A
215023
287
Figure 5.64: Fresh Air Filter Door
Revision B
4.
Turn knob (A) counterclockwise, and remove it.
5.
Remove air filter retainer (B).
6.
Remove air filter (C).
C
B
A
Figure 5.65: Fresh Air Intake Filter
Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air Intake Filter Element
1.
Tap the sides of the filter element gently to loosen dirt. Do NOT tap element against a hard surface.
2.
Using a dry element cleaner gun, clean element with compressed air.
IMPORTANT:
Air pressure must NOT exceed 414 kPa (60 psi). Do NOT direct air against outside of element, as dirt might be forced through to the inside.
3.
Hold the air nozzle next to the filter element
’ s inner surface and move up and down the pleats.
4.
Repeat previous steps to remove additional dirt as required.
5.
Hold a bright light inside the element and check carefully for holes. Discard any element that shows the slightest hole.
6.
Check outer screen for dents. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the filter.
7.
Check filter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage. If gasket is damaged or missing, replace element.
Installing Fresh Air Intake Filter
Refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
for part number.
1.
Clean interior of fresh air intake box (A).
A
Figure 5.66: Fresh Air Intake Box
215023
288
Revision B
2.
Install air filter (A) onto fresh air box panel (B).
B
A
3.
Secure air filter (C) with retainer (B).
4.
Install knob (A), and turn clockwise to tighten.
Figure 5.67: Fresh Air Intake Filter
C
B
A
5.
Insert tabs on fresh air filter door into slots on fresh air box, and rotate latch (A) clockwise to secure door (B).
Figure 5.68: Fresh Air Intake Filter
B
A
Figure 5.69: Fresh Air Intake Filter Cover
5.8.2
Greasing the Windrower
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, before servicing the windrower or opening drive covers, follow procedures in the SAFETY section. Refer to
.
215023
289
Revision B
The greasing points are marked on the machine by decals showing a grease gun and grease interval in hours of operation.
Log hours of operation and use the Maintenance Checklist provided to keep a record of scheduled maintenance. Refer to
5.2.2 Maintenance Schedule/Record, page 244
.
Figure 5.70: Greasing Interval Decal
Greasing Procedure
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
To avoid injecting dirt and grit, wipe grease fitting with a clean cloth before greasing.
2.
Inject grease through fitting with grease gun until grease overflows fitting, except where noted. Refer to the inside back cover.
3.
Leave excess grease on fitting to keep out dirt.
4.
Replace any loose or broken fittings immediately.
5.
If fitting will NOT take grease, remove and clean thoroughly. Also clean grease passageway. Replace fitting if necessary.
215023
290
Revision B
Grease Points
Figure 5.71: Grease Points
B
A
A - Top Link (2 Places) (Both Sides) B - Caster Pivot (Both Sides) C - Caster Wheel Hub (Both Sides)
17
C
17. Do NOT overgrease. Use 1 pump of grease.
215023
291
Revision B
5.9
Every 100 Hours
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 100 hours of operation.
•
Clean cab air return filter. For instructions, refer to
5.9.1 Servicing Return Air Filter, page 292 .
•
Clean radiator, hydraulic oil cooler, charge air cooler, and A/C condenser. Refer to
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page
.
5.9.1
Servicing Return Air Filter
The return air filter is located behind the operator
’ s seat on the cab wall and should be serviced every 100 hours.
1.
Unscrew two knobs (A) attaching cover and filter to cab wall, and remove cover and filter assembly (B).
B
Figure 5.72: Return Air Filter
2.
Separate the filter (B) from the cover (A).
3.
Clean the electrostatic filter as follows: a.
Mix a solution of warm water and detergent in a suitable container so that the filter (B) can soak for a few minutes.
b.
Agitate to flush out the dirt.
c.
Rinse with clean water, and then dry with compressed air.
d.
Inspect filter for damage, separation, and holes.
Replace if damaged. Refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
for part number.
4.
Assemble the cleaner (B) and cover (A), and position on cab wall over opening.
A
Figure 5.73: Return Air Filter
B
215023
292
Revision B
5.
Secure filter assembly (B) to cab wall with knobs (A).
B
Figure 5.74: Return Air Filter
5.9.2
Cleaning Cooler Module
The cooling module should be cleaned every 100 hours of operation. Daily cleaning may be required if operating in heavy crop conditions.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Proceed to the cleaning procedures. For instructions, refer to
Cleaning Right Cooling Module, page 296
or
.
Cleaning Left Cooling Module
This procedure is for cleaning the engine radiator, air conditioning condenser, and screen in the left cab-forward cooling module.
1.
At left cab-forward side cooler module, push latch (A) and open engine radiator door (B).
B
A
215023
293
Figure 5.75: Left Cooler Module
Revision B
2.
Lower lever (A) to release screen/condenser door (B) from radiator (C), and open screen/condenser door (B).
C
B
A
3.
Pull lever (A) up to partially-open condenser (B) away from screen (C).
Figure 5.76: Left Cooler Module
A
4.
Secure condenser (A) with bracket (B).
5.
Clean debris from radiator (D), condenser (A), and screen (C) with compressed air.
Figure 5.77: Left Cooler Module
C
B
C
B
D
Figure 5.78: Left Cooler Module
A
215023
294
Revision B
6.
Close condenser (B) into screen (C) and secure with bracket (A).
A
7.
Close screen/condenser door (B) onto radiator door (C) and secure with lever (A).
Figure 5.79: Left Cooler Module
C
B
A
8.
Close radiator door (B) and push until latch (A) secures door (B).
Figure 5.80: Left Cooler Module
B
A
C
B
Figure 5.81: Left Cooler Module
215023
295
Revision B
Cleaning Right Cooling Module
This procedure is for cleaning the coolers at the right cab-forward side of the windrower.
1.
At the right (cab-forward) side cooler module, pull latch handle (A) and open screen (B).
B
A
2.
At the left (cab-forward) side cooler module, push latch (A) and open engine radiator door (B) to allow access inside cooler module.
Figure 5.82: Right Cooler Module
B
A
3.
Use compressed air to clean debris from inside the cooler box (A), charge air cooler (B), and hydraulic oil cooler (C).
Figure 5.83: Engine Radiator Door
A
C
B
Figure 5.84: View from Inside Module
–
Left Side
215023
296
Revision B
4.
At right side cooler module, with screen door open, clean debris from screen (A) with compressed air.
5.
Close screen door (B) and secure with latch (A).
A
Figure 5.85: Right Cooler Module
B
A
Figure 5.86: Right Cooler Module
215023
297
Revision B
5.10
Every 250 Hours or Annually
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 250 hours of operation or annually, whichever occurs first:
•
Change engine oil and filter. For instructions, refer to
5.10.1 Changing Engine Oil, page 298
.
•
Change engine primary air filter. For instructions, refer to
5.10.2 Maintaining Engine Air Filters, page 299 .
•
Check wheel drive lubricant level. For instructions, refer to
5.10.3 Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level, page 304 .
•
Inspect exhaust system. For instructions, refer to
5.10.7 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 306
.
•
Change engine gearbox oil. For instructions, refer to
5.10.8 Changing Engine Gearbox Lubricant, page 308 .
5.10.1
Changing Engine Oil
Draining Engine Oil
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
NOTE:
The engine should be warm prior to changing the oil.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Place a drain pan with a capacity of about 24 liters (6 U.S. gallons) under the engine oil drain.
3.
Remove oil drain plug (A) and allow the oil to completely finish draining.
4.
Replace drain plug (A).
5.
Check the condition of the used oil. If either of the following is evident, have your Dealer correct the problem before starting the engine:
•
Thin black oil indicates fuel dilution
•
Milky discoloration indicates coolant dilution
6.
Dispose of used oil properly.
A
Figure 5.87: Engine Oil Drain Plug
Replacing Engine Oil Filter
NOTE:
Replace oil filter each time engine oil is changed.
1.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
2.
Place oil pan below filter.
215023
298
Revision B
3.
Clean around the filter head (A) and remove filter.
NOTE:
Check that gasket is removed from filter head.
4.
Clean gasket mating surface.
5.
Apply a thin film of clean oil to the gasket on the new filter.
Refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
for recommended oil filter.
6.
Screw the new filter onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
7.
Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the oil filter.
Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
8.
Properly dispose of used oil filter.
A
Figure 5.88: Engine Oil Filter
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
2.
Clean around filler cap (A) and remove by turning it counterclockwise.
3.
Carefully pour in 11 L (11.6 US qts) of new oil. A funnel is recommended to avoid spillage. Refer to the inside back cover for oil specifications.
CAUTION
Do NOT fill above the HIGH mark.
4.
Replace oil filler cap (A) and turn it clockwise until snug.
5.
Check the oil level. For instructions, refer to
6.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
Figure 5.89: Oil Filler Cap
5.10.2
Maintaining Engine Air Filters
Removing Engine Primary Air Filter
1.
Stand on right service platform.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
A
215023
299
Revision B
3.
Slightly lift catch (A) at side of end cap (B). Rotate end cap counterclockwise until it stops.
A
4.
Make sure arrow (A) lines up with the UNLOCK symbol on end cap.
5.
Pull off the end cap.
Figure 5.90: Air Filter Housing
A
B
6.
Check the aspirator duct opening (A) for obstructions or damage. Clean if necessary.
7.
Place cover on platform.
NOTE:
Hoses can be left connected to the cover.
Figure 5.91: Air Filter
Figure 5.92: Air Filter
A
215023
300
Revision B
8.
Pull out the primary filter element (A).
IMPORTANT:
Be extremely careful with the dirty element until it is completely out of the housing. Accidentally bumping it while still inside may cause dirt and dust to contaminate the clean side of filter housing.
A
9.
If necessary, also change the secondary filter (B). For instructions, refer to
Replacing Secondary Air Filter, page
B
IMPORTANT:
•
Do NOT remove the secondary filter unless it needs replacing. It must never be cleaned.
•
Replace secondary filter annually or after every third primary filter change, even if it looks clean.
•
If the secondary filter looks dirty, a further inspection will be required.
•
Examine filter canister for cracks and replace as necessary.
•
Ensure canister retaining latches are secure.
Figure 5.93: Air Filter
IMPORTANT:
Clean the inside of the housing and cover carefully. Dirt left in the air cleaner housing may be harmful to your engine.
•
Use a clean, water-dampened cloth to wipe every surface clean.
•
Check it visually to make sure it is clean before putting in a new element.
•
Always clean the gasket sealing surfaces of the housing. An improper gasket seal is one of the most common causes of engine contamination.
•
Make sure that all hardened dirt ridges are completely removed wherever filter gaskets contact the cleaner housing.
Check for uneven dirt patterns on your old element. Your old element is a valuable clue to potential dust leakage or gasket sealing problems.
•
A pattern on the element clean side is a sign that the old element was not firmly sealed or that a dust leak exists.
•
Make certain the cause of that leak is identified and rectified before replacing the element.
•
Recheck to see if the sealing surface in the housing is clean.
Installing Engine Primary Air Filter
NOTE:
For primary air filter replacement part number, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241
.
215023
301
Revision B
1.
Insert new primary filter (A) into canister and push into place, ensuring that element is firmly seated in canister.
A
2.
Align arrow (A) to UNLOCK position on end cap, and push end cap fully onto housing.
3.
Rotate end cap clockwise until catch (A) engages housing to prevent end cap from turning.
Figure 5.94: Air Filter
A
4.
Position end cap (B) onto filter housing with aspirator pointing approximately down.
5.
Secure end cap onto filter housing by closing latch (A).
6.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
7.
Close the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
Figure 5.95: Air Filter
Figure 5.96: Air Filter
A
B
215023
302
Revision B
Cleaning Primary Air Filter
The engine air cleaner
’ s primary filter should be replaced after three cleanings or at the specified interval. The secondary element should be replaced every third time the primary element is changed. Refer to
5.2 Windrower Break-In Inspections and Maintenance Schedule, page 243
for the required interval.
1.
Hold a bright light inside element and check carefully for holes. Vibration would quickly wear a hole in the filter.
2.
Check filter gasket for cracks, tears, or other signs of damage.
3.
Check element for oil or soot contamination.
4.
Check the secondary element for cleanliness. If there is visible dirt on the secondary element, replace both primary and secondary elements. Do NOT clean.
IMPORTANT:
•
The secondary filter element should NEVER be cleaned, only replaced.
•
Air filter element cleaning is NOT recommended due to the possible degradation of the element material.
If cleaning is performed, there are several risks involved and the following steps should be followed. If any of the conditions described in these steps are found, the filter element MUST be replaced.
5.
If secondary element passes inspection, use compressed air not exceeding 270 kPa (40 psi) and a dry element cleaner gun to clean the primary element. Hold nozzle next to inner surface only and move up and down on pleats.
NOTE:
After three cleanings (or at the specified interval), replace the primary element.
6.
Repeat inspection before installing. For instructions, refer to
Installing Engine Primary Air Filter, page 301 .
Replacing Secondary Air Filter
IMPORTANT:
•
The secondary filter element (A) should NEVER be cleaned, only replaced. Do NOT remove the secondary filter element unless it needs replacing.
•
Replace secondary element annually or after every third primary filter change, even if it appears clean.
•
If replacing secondary element, a further inspection may be necessary.
•
Examine filter canister for cracks and replace as necessary.
•
Ensure canister retaining latches are secure. Ensure filter sealing surfaces are soft, flexible and sealing, not hard and allowing debris through to secondary filter.
1.
Remove the primary filter. For instructions, refer to
Removing Engine Primary Air Filter, page 299 .
IMPORTANT:
When replacing secondary filter (A), reinsert new filter as soon as possible to prevent dirt from entering engine intake.
A
215023
303
Figure 5.97: Secondary Air Filter
Revision B
2.
Remove the secondary filter element (A) from canister.
NOTE:
If replacing filter, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page
3.
Insert new secondary filter element (A) into canister, seal first, and push until seal is seated inside canister.
4.
Install the primary filter. For instructions, refer to
Engine Primary Air Filter, page 301 .
A
Figure 5.98: Secondary Air Filter
5.10.3
Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level
Check the wheel drive lubricant level every 250 hours or annually.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Park the windrower on level ground.
2.
Position windrower so that plugs (A) and (B) are horizontally aligned with the center (C) of the hub.
B
WARNING
Use caution when removing plug as there may be pressure in the drive.
3.
Remove plug (A) or (B). The lubricant should be visible through the port or running out slightly. If lubricant needs to be added, refer to
5.10.5 Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
.
NOTE:
The type of lubricant used after the first lubricant change is different from the factory supplied lubricant.
4.
Reinstall plugs and tighten.
A
Figure 5.99: Drive Wheel
C
5.10.4
Checking Wheel Drive Lubricant Level
–
12 Bolt (Optional)
Check the wheel drive lubricant level every 250 hours or annually.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
304
Revision B
1.
Park the windrower on level ground.
2.
Rotate the wheel drive until fill/drain plug (A) is vertically centered with the hub, and check plug (B) is horizontally aligned with the center of the hub.
3.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
WARNING
Use caution when removing plug as there may be pressure in the drive.
4.
Remove check plug (B). The lubricant should be visible through the port or running out slightly. If lubricant needs to be added, refer to
5.10.6 Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
.
NOTE:
The type of lubricant used after the first lubricant change is different from the factory supplied lubricant.
5.
Reinstall check plug (B) and torque to 7.5 Nm (6 lbf·ft).
6.
Reinstall fill/drain plug (A) and torque to 22 Nm (18 lbf·ft).
Figure 5.100: Wheel Drive
–
12 Bolt
5.10.5
Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
–
10 Bolt
NOTE:
Do NOT mix lubricants of different brands or characteristics.
NOTE:
For lubricant specifications, refer to
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 240
.
B
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Rotate the wheel drive so plugs (A) and (B) are horizontally aligned with the center (C) of the hub.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
B
3.
Remove either plug (A) or (B).
NOTE:
PRIOR TO FIRST CHANGE: Use SAE 85W-140, API service, class GL-5, extreme pressure gear lubricant (non-synthetic).
NOTE:
AFTER FIRST CHANGE: Use SAE 75W-140 or 80W-140, API service, class GL-5, fully synthetic transmission lubricant
(SAE J2360 preferred).
4.
Add lubricant through one of the ports until the lubricant reaches the bottom of the ports and begins to run out.
5.
Reinstall and tighten plug (A) or (B).
A
Figure 5.101: Wheel Drive
C
215023
305
Revision B
6.
Start up and operate the windrower for a few minutes, then stop and check the oil level. Refer to the inside back cover. If necessary, add more oil.
5.10.6
Adding Wheel Drive Lubricant
–
12 Bolt (Optional)
NOTE:
Do NOT mix lubricants of different brands or characteristics.
NOTE:
For lubricant specifications, refer to
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 240
.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Rotate the wheel drive until fill/drain plug (A) is vertically centered with the hub, and check plug (B) is horizontally aligned with the center of the hub.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
3.
Remove plugs (A), and (B).
B
NOTE:
Use SAE 85W-140, API service, class GL-5, extreme pressure gear lubricant (non-synthetic).
4.
Add lubricant through port (A) until the lubricant runs out of check port (B).
5.
Reinstall check plug (B) and torque to 7.5 Nm (6 lbf·ft).
6.
Reinstall fill/drain plug (A) and torque to 22 Nm (18 lbf·ft).
Figure 5.102: Wheel Drive
—
12 Bolt
7.
Start up and operate the windrower for a few minutes, then stop and check the oil level. Refer to the inside back cover. If necessary, add more oil.
5.10.7
Inspecting Exhaust System
The system consists of two main canisters for exhaust treatment. Between the two exhaust canisters is a tube with a dosing module (DM) for diesel exhaust fluid (DEF).
CAUTION
Engine exhaust stack may be hot. To avoid burns, do NOT touch exhaust canister when engine is running. Allow sufficient cooling time after shut-down.
The exhaust system requires no regular maintenance, but it should be inspected periodically as follows:
1.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the exhaust system is secure to eliminate vibration.
215023
306
Revision B
2.
Check the following: a.
Exhaust canisters (A) and bellow tube (B) for dents, cracks, and wear b.
Straps (C) for tightness c.
U-bolt (D) and band clamps (E) for breakage, cracks, and rust
IMPORTANT:
Damaged exhaust piping, clamps, or components can lead to exhaust leaks and engine derate.
A
D
B
E
Figure 5.103: Exhaust System
3.
Check the three band clamps (A) securing the tubes in between the two exhaust canisters.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT change exhaust canister type, piping sizes, or exhaust configuration. See your Dealer for proper replacement parts.
4.
Inspect the area around clamps (A) for breakage, cracks, and rust-through.
IMPORTANT:
If exhaust is leaking, tighten clamps to 12
–
15 Nm
(9
–
11 lbf·ft). If leaking at band connection, replace seals.
Contact your Dealer if exhaust leak persists.
5.
Check tubing for dents or crushed areas.
IMPORTANT:
Dents or crushed portions of any tubing create exhaust flow restriction and increase back pressure significantly. Even relatively small dents will cause decreased fuel economy and increased turbo wear. If dents are relatively large, increased bearing and cylinder wear will occur due to increased exhaust temperature.
Figure 5.104: Exhaust Canister
E
A
E
215023
307
Revision B
5.10.8
Changing Engine Gearbox Lubricant
Change engine gearbox lubricant after the first 50 hours, and then at every 250 hours or annually as follows:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
NOTE:
The engine should be warm when changing the lubricant.
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Place a 4 liter (1 U.S. gallon) drain pan under the gearbox.
4.
Remove drain plug (A) and allow lubricant to completely finish draining.
5.
Inspect the drain plug. Small metal shavings are normal. If there are any larger metal pieces, an inspection of the gearbox will be required.
6.
Install drain plug (A) and remove check plug (B).
7.
Add lubricant until the oil level reaches check plug (B). For lubricant specifications, refer to
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities, page 240
.
8.
Replace check plug (B).
9.
Operate the engine at low idle and check for leaks at the check plug and drain plug.
B
Figure 5.105: Engine Gearbox
A
215023
308
Revision B
5.11
Every 500 Hours or Annually
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 500 hours of operation or annually, whichever occurs first.
•
Change primary and secondary fuel filters. For instructions, refer to
5.11.1 Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 309
.
•
Change hydraulic return filter and charge filter. For instructions, refer to
5.6.9 Return Oil Filter, page 275
and
.
•
Check safety systems. For instructions, refer to
5.11.2 Safety Systems, page 312
.
5.11.1
Maintaining Fuel Filters
The windrower
’ s fuel system is equipped with primary (A) and secondary (B) screw-on cartridge type filters. The primary filter (A) is equipped with a separator that separates sediment and water from the fuel.
NOTE:
Bottom part of image was made transparent to show the primary filter (A).
B
A
Figure 5.106: Fuel System
Removing Primary Fuel Filter
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Locate the primary fuel filter (A) on the right cab-forward side of the windrower.
NOTE:
Bottom part of the image made transparent to show location of the primary filter.
4.
Clean around the primary filter (A) head.
5.
Disconnect the water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B) from bottom of filter.
6.
Turn drain valve (C) by hand counterclockwise until draining occurs, and drain filter into a container.
7.
Remove filter (A) with a filter wrench.
8.
Clean gasket mating surface.
A
C
Figure 5.107: Fuel System
B
215023
309
Revision B
Installing Primary Fuel Filter
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. Pre-filling can contaminate the fuel system.
NOTE:
If replacing filter, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241 .
1.
Apply some diesel fuel to the filter gasket, and screw the new filter (A) onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
2.
Reconnect water in fuel (WIF) sensor (B).
3.
Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the filter.
Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
A
Figure 5.108: Fuel System
B
Removing Secondary Fuel Filter
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Clean around the secondary filter head (A).
4.
Place a container under the filter to catch spilled fluid.
5.
Remove filter (B) with a filter wrench.
6.
Clean gasket mating surface.
A
B
Figure 5.109: Fuel System
Installing Secondary Fuel Filter
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT pre-fill filter with fuel. Pre-filling can contaminate the fuel system.
215023
310
Revision B
NOTE:
If replacing filter, refer to
5.1.4 Filter Part Numbers, page 241 .
1.
Screw the new secondary filter (A) onto the filter mount until the gasket contacts the filter head.
2.
Tighten the filter an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn by hand.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT use a filter wrench to install the filter.
Overtightening can damage the gasket and filter.
3.
Prime the fuel system, refer to
A
Figure 5.110: Fuel System
Priming Fuel System
Controlled venting of air is provided at the injection pump through the fuel drain manifold. Small amounts of air introduced by changing filters or injection pump supply line will be vented automatically if the fuel filters are changed in accordance with instructions.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT bleed the fuel system. Manual priming will be required if:
•
Fuel filter is replaced
•
Injection pump is replaced
•
High-pressure fuel lines are replaced
•
Engine is run until fuel tank is empty
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
WARNING
The fuel pump high-pressure fuel lines and fuel rail contain extremely high-pressure fuel. Never loosen any fittings.
Personal injury and property damage can result.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
215023
311
Revision B
3.
Locate the primary fuel filter assembly (A).
4.
Turn the priming knob (B) counterclockwise to unlock the plunger on the primary filter head.
5.
Pump until hand pump becomes firm.
6.
Push the plunger in and lock it by turning knob (B) clockwise until snug.
7.
Try starting engine. If engine does NOT start, or starts then shuts down, repeat priming procedure.
8.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
A
B
Figure 5.111: Primary Fuel Filter
5.11.2
Safety Systems
Checking Operator Presence System
The operator presence system is designed to function as described in
3.2 Operator Presence System, page 41 .
Perform the following checks on the Operator Presence System every year or every 500 hours
— whichever occurs first.
Checking the Operator Presence System switch status on the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display:
1.
Turn the key in the windrower ignition to the ON position.
2.
Access the windrower menus by pressing soft key 5 (A).
3.
Access the diagnostic menu by pressing soft key 4 (B).
4.
Access the Input/Output list by pressing soft key 3 (C).
NOTE:
The screen will display two options: ABNORMAL STATUS and SYSTEM.
5.
Scroll to SYSTEM and press scroll knob to select.
C
B
A
1026677
Figure 5.112: HPT Soft Keys
215023
312
Revision B
6.
Scroll to INTERLOCK-NEUTRAL (A) in the Input/Output List and press scroll knob to select.
A
Figure 5.113: Input/Output List
7.
Scroll to OPERATOR PRESENT (A) and check the following conditions:
•
The status must be ON when the Operator is sitting on the seat.
•
The status must be OFF when the Operator is not sitting on the seat.
NOTE:
If the two conditions listed above are NOT true, the
Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your
MacDon Dealer.
A
Figure 5.114: Operator Present Status (Set to ON)
Perform the following checks on the Operator Presence System every 5 years.
Checking the Operator Presence System and engine lock-out systems:
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
With the windrower engine running, place the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK and center the steering wheel until it locks.
2.
With everyone clear of the machine, engage the HEADER ENGAGE switch: a.
After header drives are running, stand up out of the seat. In approximately 5 seconds, the header should shut off.
b.
If NOT , the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
NOTE:
To restart the header, move the HEADER ENGAGE switch to OFF position and then back to the ON position.
3.
With the windrower moving at less than 8 km/h (5 mph):
215023
313
Revision B
a.
Stand up out of the seat.
b.
The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display will flash NO OPERATOR DETECTED, ENGINE SHUT DOWN IN 5
…
4
…
3
…
2
…
1
… accompanied by a steady tone. At 0, the engine shuts down.
c.
If the engine does NOT shut down, the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
4.
With the windrower moving at more than 8 km/h (5 mph): a.
Stand up out of the seat.
b.
After a 2 second delay, the HPT will display NO OPERATOR DETECTED along with a tone.
c.
If NOT , the Operator Presence System requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
Checking Engine Interlock
Perform the following checks on the engine lock-out system every year or every 500 hours
— whichever occurs first.
CAUTION
Check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
1.
With the engine shut down and the HEADER ENGAGE switch (A) engaged, try to start the engine. If the engine turns over, the system requires adjustment. See your
MacDon Dealer.
2.
With the engine shut down, the steering wheel NOT centered, and the ground speed lever (GSL) (B) in NEUTRAL
(but NOT in PARK), try to start the engine. The Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) will flash NOT IN NEUTRAL and
CENTER STEERING WHEEL, accompanied by a short beep with each flash and the engine should NOT turn over. If the engine turns over, the system requires adjustment. See your MacDon Dealer.
B
A
Figure 5.115: Console
A properly functioning system should operate as follows. If not, see your MacDon Dealer.
•
The starter should engage ONLY when the GSL is in PARK, the steering wheel is locked in the CENTER position, and the
HEADER ENGAGE switch is in the OFF position.
•
Under the above conditions, the brake should engage and the machine should NOT move after engine start-up.
•
The steering wheel should NOT lock with the engine running and the GSL out of PARK.
•
When the GSL is pulled straight out of PARK ( NOT in forward or in reverse), the machine should NOT move with the engine running and with the steering wheel still centered.
215023
314
Revision B
5.12
Every 1000 Hours
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 1000 hours of operation.
•
Change fuel tank vent filter. For instructions, refer to
5.12.1 Removing and Installing the Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 315 .
•
Clean DEF supply module filter. For instructions, refer to
5.12.2 Diesel Exhaust Fluid Supply Module Filter, page 317
.
•
Change wheel drive lubricant. For instructions, refer to
5.6.7 Changing Wheel Drive Lubricant
.
5.12.1
Removing and Installing the Fuel Tank Vent Filter
The fuel tank is vented by a hose and filter in the platform rail. Change the filter every 1000 hours or annually, whichever occurs first.
Change the filter as follows:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOT smoke or allow flame or sparks near windrower when servicing.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Remove two bolts (A) and plate (B) on the right service platform.
B
A
Figure 5.116: Right Service Platform
215023
315
Revision B
3.
Release hose tension clamps (A) and slide away from filter (B).
4.
Pull hoses off filter (B) and remove filter.
B
5.
Position new filter (A) and attach to fuel tank hose (B). The
IN marking on the filter should face away from the fuel tank hose.
NOTE:
If filter has an arrow instead of an IN marking, arrow should point toward the fuel tank hose.
A
Figure 5.117: Fuel Tank Vent and Filter
B
A
6.
Attach fuel vent hose (A) to filter (B) and secure both hoses with tension clamps (C).
7.
Close hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.2 Closing Hood, page 248 .
Figure 5.118: Fuel Tank Vent and Filter
B
C
A
Figure 5.119: Fuel Tank Vent and Filter
215023
316
Revision B
5.12.2
Diesel Exhaust Fluid Supply Module Filter
The supply module filter is designed to prevent debris that may be suspended in the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) from entering the system. Permanent damage to
— and premature failure of
— the DEF supply module can result from fluid debris.
Checking the DEF Supply Module Filter
1.
Locate the aftertreatment diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) supply module (A) on the inside of the right platform by the engine oil dipstick.
A
2.
Inspect the area around the seal and vent of the aftertreatment DEF supply module filter cap (A) for signs of leakage.
3.
DEF fluid leaves a white deposit when dry. If there is evidence of leaking, remove the supply module filter, clean and inspect before replacing. For instructions, refer to
Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter, page 318
.
Figure 5.120: DEF Supply Module
A
Figure 5.121: DEF Supply Module Filter Cap
Removing the Supply Module Filter
WARNING
Batteries can emit explosive gases. To reduce the possibility of personal injury, always ventilate the compartment before servicing the batteries. To reduce the possibility of arcing, remove the negative (
–
) battery cable first and attach the negative (
–
) battery cable last.
WARNING
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) contains urea. Do NOT get the substance in your eyes. In case of contact, immediately flush eyes with water for a minimum of 15 minutes. Do NOT swallow. In the event the DEF is ingested, contact doctor immediately.
215023
317
Revision B
WARNING
The DEF line connecting the aftertreatment DEF dosing unit to the aftertreatment DEF dosing valve is under low pressure and should NOT be disconnected while the engine is running or before the system has completed the purge process after engine shutdown. Disconnecting the DEF line while under low pressure could cause DEF to spray.
WARNING
Wear appropriate eye and face protection when using compressed air. Flying debris and dirt can cause personal injury.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
IMPORTANT:
Any spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by non-combustible absorbent material like sand, and then shoveled into a suitable container for disposal. DEF is corrosive. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT disconnect the windrower batteries until the DEF dosing system has completed the purge cycle. Before beginning to remove and/or disconnect any components, wait at least 5 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF for the aftertreatment DEF dosing system to purge the DEF from the system. The purge cycle is an automatic process and does not require intervention to occur. The aftertreatment DEF supply module will create an audible pumping noise during the purging process.
NOTE:
DO NOT power wash or steam clean the filter. Use compressed air to remove any loose debris.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Wait 3 minutes for DEF system to complete purge cycle.
3.
Place a catch basin under DEF filter cap to collect the remaining DEF in the filter housing.
4.
Unscrew the filter cap (A).
5.
Remove the aftertreatment DEF filter equalizing element (B).
6.
Remove the old aftertreatment DEF supply module filter element (D).
NOTE:
A disposable service tool (C) is included with the filter to aid in filter removal. Use the appropriate end of the tool to remove filter. When inserting the tool, a click sound can be heard which indicates proper engagement with the filter.
7.
Discard and replace the filter and equalizing element if removed from the aftertreatment supply module.
D
C
B
A
Figure 5.122: DEF Supply Module Filter
Cleaning and Inspecting the Supply Module Filter
NOTE:
If there is the possibility that contaminated diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) has gone through the DEF supply system, check the
DEF filter prior to discarding the filter.
215023
318
Revision B
1.
Check the diesel exhaust filter for evidence of contaminated DEF. Use visual and aroma characteristics of the filter to determine if contaminated fluid has passed through the dosing system.
2.
Inspect the diesel exhaust filter for debris.
3.
Discard the filter element and the equalizing element.
4.
Inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module filter cap for cracks or holes.
5.
Check the condition of the threads on the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap.
6.
If threads are damaged, replace the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap.
7.
If cap threads are damaged, inspect the aftertreatment DEF supply module threads.
8.
If threads of aftertreatment DEF supply module are damaged, replace the entire aftertreatment DEF supply module.
9.
Clean the aftertreatment DEF supply module cap and threads on the supply module with warm water and clean cloth.
Installing the Supply Module Filter
1.
Slide the DEF filter equalizing element (A) into the DEF filter cartridge (B).
2.
Insert the assembly into the aftertreatment DEF supply module (C).
3.
Install cap (D) and torque to 20 Nm (15 lbf·ft).
NOTE:
The aftertreatment DEF dosing system will not prime until the correct selective catalytic reduction (SCR) catalyst temperatures are reached. To verify that there are no DEF leaks, test drive the windrower for a minimum of
15 minutes to get the SCR system up to temperature.
4.
Operate the engine and check for leaks.
B
A
D
C
Figure 5.123: DEF Supply Module Filter
215023
319
Revision B
5.13
Every 2000 Hours
Complete the following maintenance tasks every 2000 hours of operation.
•
Change engine coolant. For instructions, refer to
5.13.1 Changing Engine Coolant, page 320
.
•
Change hydraulic oil. For instructions, refer to
5.13.2 Draining Hydraulic Oil, page 322
•
Change DEF tank vent hose filter. For instructions, refer to
5.13.4 Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Vent Hose Filter, page 324
.
•
General engine inspection. For instructions, refer to
5.13.5 General Engine Inspection, page 325 .
5.13.1
Changing Engine Coolant
Change the engine coolant after every 2000 hours of operation or two years, whichever occurs first.
Draining Coolant
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Let the engine cool.
3.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
4.
Turn the pressurized coolant tank cap (A) to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
5.
Remove the pressurized coolant tank cap.
A
Figure 5.124: Coolant Recovery Tank
215023
320
Revision B
6.
Locate the radiator drain valve (B) on the radiator inlet tube (A). It is located inside the frame beside the engine.
7.
Place a drain pan (about 30 liters [8 U.S. gallons]) under the drain valve, and then open the radiator drain valve (B).
8.
When the system has been completely drained, close the radiator drain valve (B).
9.
Fill system with clean water through the pressurized coolant tank. Replace the pressurized coolant tank cap.
10. Start engine and press the red area on the console
TEMPERATURE CONTROL until maximum heating is reached. Run the engine until normal operating temperature (green range on display) is reached.
A
B
Figure 5.125: Radiator Drain Valve
11. Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
12. Drain water out before rust or sediment settles. Repeat Steps
to
to drain water.
13. Close drain valves. Fill the system with a solution of clean water and a heavy duty radiator cleaner. Follow instructions provided with the cleaner.
14. After using the cleaner solution, flush system with clean water again. Inspect radiator, hoses, and fittings for leaks.
15. Close drain valves and fill system. For instructions, refer to
16. Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.2 Closing Hood, page 248 .
Adding Coolant
Check the coolant level in the pressurized coolant tank daily, the tank should be at least one-half full. If less, add coolant.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
1.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
2.
Remove the pressurized cap (A) from coolant recovery tank.
NOTE:
For coolant specifications, refer to the inside back cover.
3.
Add coolant at a rate not exceeding 11 L/min (3 gpm) until the recovery tank is one-half full.
NOTE:
When adding coolant, use the MAX COLD line (B) on the side of tank that faces cab for an accurate measurement.
A
B
Figure 5.126: Coolant Recovery Tank
CAUTION
Before starting the machine, check to be sure all bystanders have cleared the area.
215023
321
Revision B
4.
With the pressurized cap off, start the engine and run at high idle for approximately 20 minutes or until the engine temperature reaches 85°C (185°F).
5.
Add coolant until the recovery tank is one-half full. Check the coolant level again. For instructions, refer to
Checking Engine Coolant Level, page 285
.
6.
Replace the pressurized cap (A).
7.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.2 Closing Hood, page 248 .
5.13.2
Draining Hydraulic Oil
Hydraulic oil should be changed every 2000 hours of operation or 3 years, whichever comes first.
DANGER
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
If machine is running, oil may be hot. Burns can result from contact with hot oil. This procedure can be performed when the oil is cold, but first run the machine to stir the oil up before draining.
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
4.
Place a container (at least 65 liters [17 U.S. gallons] capacity) under drain at the bottom of the hydraulic reservoir to collect the oil.
5.
On the hydraulic oil tank, turn plug handle (A) counterclockwise until loose, and then remove plug (this will allow air to enter tank).
A
Figure 5.127: Reservoir Plug
215023
322
Revision B
6.
From beneath the windrower, locate hose (A) that connects to the inlet manifold (B).
7.
Remove hose (A) from the elbow fitting and allow hose to drain into a clean container.
8.
Once the tank is empty, reattach hose to elbow.
A
B
9.
Locate and remove the magnetic drain plug (A) that is underneath the hydraulic oil tank.
NOTE:
Pull the traction drive hoses out of the way to allow oil to drop straight down into catch pan.
10. Inspect and clean the magnetic drain plug for any debris.
11. Reinstall drain plug. Torque plug to 75
–
82 Nm
(55
–
60 lbf·ft).
Figure 5.128: Inlet Manifold
A
12. Reinstall plug (A) on the hydraulic oil tank.
13. Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
14. Dispose of used oil in a manner that complies with local rules and regulations.
Figure 5.129: Hydraulic Oil Drain
A
Figure 5.130: Reservoir Plug
5.13.3
Filling Hydraulic Oil
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
323
Revision B
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
3.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
4.
Turn plug handle (A) counterclockwise until loose and then remove plug by pulling straight out.
NOTE:
When filling oil at a fast rate, the screen element in the fill tube restricts the oil and makes it difficult for air to escape.
A
Figure 5.131: Plug Handle
5.
To improve oil fill rate through the screen, open the breather cap (A) at the top of the tank to allow air to escape.
IMPORTANT:
Whenever the breather cap is opened, clean the area and take care to prevent debris from entering the tank through the opening.
6.
Add oil to maintain the level between the low and full indicator marks. Refer to the inside back cover for hydraulic oil specifications and quantity.
NOTE:
When the sight glass is showing LOW, approximately 4 liters
(1 U.S. gallon) is required to reach FULL.
7.
Reinstall plug, and turn plug handle (B) clockwise until plug is secure.
8.
Close breather cap (A).
9.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
B
Figure 5.132: Hydraulic Oil Tank
5.13.4
Replacing the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Vent Hose Filter
The diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) vent hose filter should be replaced every 2000 hours.
A
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
215023
324
Revision B
2.
Locate vent hose filter (B) below the DEF tank (A).
A
B
3.
Pull vent hose filter (A) from the DEF tank vent hose.
4.
Install the new vent hose filter (A).
NOTE:
Ensure arrow on the vent hose filter (A) points towards the
DEF tank.
Figure 5.133: Vent Filter below DEF Tank
A
Figure 5.134: Vent Hose Filter below DEF Tank
5.13.5
General Engine Inspection
Engine inspection should be performed by your MacDon Dealer.
Refer to your engine manual for further information.
NOTE:
Owner
’ s Manual QSB 4.5 and QSB 6.7 Engine Cummins #4021531 are supplied with your machine.
215023
325
Revision B
5.14
Annual Service
Complete the following maintenance tasks annually. It is recommended that annual maintenance be done prior to start of operating season.
•
Check battery charge and fluid level. For instructions, refer to
.
•
Check steering linkages. For instructions, refer to
5.14.2 Checking Steering Link Pivots, page 335 .
•
Check A/C blower. For instructions, refer to
5.14.3 Air Conditioning Evaporator, page 337 .
•
Check antifreeze concentration. For instructions, refer to
5.14.4 Checking Engine Coolant Strength, page 339
.
5.14.1
Batteries
Table 5.5 Battery Specifications
Rating
Heavy duty, off-road, vibration resistant
Group
31A
CCA (min)
760
Volt
12
Maximum Dimension
334 x 188 x 232 mm
(13 x 7.4 x 9.13 in.)
Maintaining a Battery
CAUTION
Do NOT attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualified Dealer.
•
Check battery charge once a year , more often if operating in cold weather. Hydrometer readings should be 1.260 to
1.300. Readings below 1.250 indicate charging is required. For instructions, refer to
.
•
Keep batteries clean by wiping with a damp cloth.
•
Keep all connections clean and tight. Remove any corrosion and wash terminals with a solution of baking soda and water. A light coating of grease on terminals (after cables are attached) will reduce corrosion.
•
To prolong battery life, store batteries fully charged and at -7° to +26°C (+20° to +80°F). Check voltage after storage and recharge as needed according to battery and charger manufacturer recommendations.
•
Do NOT stack storage batteries on top of each other.
•
Test batteries every 4
–
6 months and recharge if necessary.
•
Disconnect battery ground if storing the windrower for more than 3 months.
Opening Battery Cover
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
215023
326
Revision B
3.
Lift up on the cab end of the cover (A) to disengage it from the retaining tab (B), and swing cover away from the frame.
B
Closing Battery Cover
1.
Swing cover (A) towards the windrower frame. Lift up on the cab end of the cover until it is secured by retaining tab (B) on the frame.
A
Figure 5.135: Battery Cover
B
A
Figure 5.136: Battery Cover
215023
327
Revision B
Charging a Battery
CAUTION
•
Ventilate the area where batteries are being charged.
•
Do NOT charge a frozen battery. Warm to 16°C (60°F) before charging.
•
Do NOT connect or disconnect live circuits. To prevent sparks, turn off charger and connect positive cable first.
PROTECT YOUR EYES.
•
If charging battery in windrower, disconnect POSITIVE battery cable before connecting charger cable, then connect ground cable last, away from battery.
•
Stop or cut back charging rate if battery feels hot, or is venting electrolyte. Battery temperature must NOT exceed
52°C (125°F).
•
The maximum charge rate in amperes should be NO MORE than 1/3 of the battery
’ s reserve capacity minute rating. If the terminal voltage exceeds 16.0 volts while charging, reduce the charge rate.
•
Continue charging and reduce the rate as needed until a two-hour period results in no increase in voltage or decrease in current.
Figure 5.137: Battery Charging
Table 5.6 Voltage Chart
50 Amps 30 Amps 20 Amps 10 Amps
OCV 18
State of Charge
(%)
12.6
12.4
12.2
12.0
11.8
100
75
50
25
0
20
45
65
85
Approximate battery charging time (minutes) to full charge at 27°C/80°F.
19
—
Fully charged
—
35 48
75
115
150
95
145
195
90
180
280
370
WARNING
•
Follow all battery manufacturers
’ instructions and precautions.
•
Gel and AGM (Absorbed Glass Mat) batteries require a voltage-limited charger. Charging a gel or AGM battery on a typical shop charger
— even one time
— may greatly shorten its life.
•
If the electrolyte is accessible, verify that plates are covered before beginning to charge. At the end of charge, add distilled water as needed to bring levels to the proper height. If water is added, charge for an additional 30 minutes to mix. If electrolyte levels are low, but battery is not accessible, remove battery from service.
18. Open circuit voltage with no charging/discharging for 8 hours or more.
19. Charging time depends on battery capacity, condition, age, temperature, and efficiency of charger.
215023
328
Revision B
CAUTION
Follow all instructions and precautions supplied by the battery charger manufacturer, including the following:
•
Charge at recommended rates and times.
•
Turn off charger prior to hook up to avoid dangerous sparks. Wear proper eye protection.
•
Reduce charge rate if the terminal voltage is higher than 16.0 volts while charging. The maximum charge rate in amperes should NOT exceed 1/3 of the battery
’ s reserve capacity minute rating.
•
Continue charging if there is no change in voltage or current for a two-hour period, and reduce the rate as needed.
•
If the battery case gets hot during charging or spews large amount of gasses, temporarily stop charging.
IMPORTANT:
NEVER overcharge batteries. Excessive charging will shorten battery life.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the battery cover. For instructions, refer to
Opening Battery Cover, page 326 .
3.
Remove the red plastic covers from positive cable clamps (B).
4.
Remove the black plastic covers from negative terminals (A).
5.
If charging battery in windrower, disconnect positive battery cable (C), then connect charger cable to positive post. Connect charger ground cable to the engine block last, away from battery.
6.
Charge batteries in accordance with charger manufacturer
’ s instructions.
A
B
C
Figure 5.138: Batteries
Boosting a Battery
If boosting a battery is required, connect boost cables in the exact order described below.
WARNING
•
Gas given off by batteries is explosive. Keep sparks and flames away from batteries.
•
Make last connection and first disconnection at the point farthest away from the batteries.
•
Wear protective eyewear when using a booster battery.
•
Be sure everyone is clear of machine when starting engine. Start engine from operator
’ s station only.
215023
329
Revision B
Connecting booster cables
1.
To access the windrower batteries, remove the battery cover. For instructions, refer to
Opening Battery Cover, page 326 .
2.
Pull back the red rubber battery terminal cover and connect one end of the positive (+) booster cable to positive (+) post (A) on the dead battery.
3.
Connect the other end of the positive (+) booster cable to the positive (+) post (B) on the booster battery.
4.
Connect one end of the negative (
–
) booster cable to negative (
–
) post (C) on the booster battery.
5.
Connect the other end of the negative (
–
) booster cable (D) to a clean, unpainted, solid metal part on the engine of the dead unit.
WARNING
To minimize the chance of an explosion, avoid connecting the negative boosting cable to the negative post on the dead battery.
6.
Turn ignition switch in cab as with normal start-up.
C
–
+
B
Figure 5.139: Attaching Booster Cables
Removing booster cables
CAUTION
Spark hazard. When disconnecting booster cables, do NOT allow the cable clamps to touch each other.
D
A
215023
330
Revision B
1.
Disconnect the negative (
–
) booster cable (A) from the engine of the unit that was boosted.
2.
Disconnect the other end of the negative (
–
) booster cable from the negative (
–
) battery post (B) of the booster battery.
3.
Disconnect the positive (+) booster cable from the positive
(+) battery post (C) of the booster battery.
4.
Disconnect the other end of the positive (+) booster cable from the positive (+) battery post (D) of the boosted battery.
5.
Replace the black and red rubber battery terminal covers.
6.
Close the battery cover. For instructions, refer to
B
–
A
D
+
C
Figure 5.140: Removing Booster Cables
Removing a Battery
CAUTION
Do NOT attempt to service battery unless you have the proper equipment and experience to perform the job. Have it done by a qualified Dealer.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the battery cover. For instructions, refer to
3.
Disconnect the battery harness. For instructions, refer to
Disconnecting a Battery, page 332 .
215023
331
Revision B
4.
Loosen bolt (A) until securing strap (B) can be removed.
5.
Lift batteries off the support.
B
A
Figure 5.141: Battery Location
Installing a Battery
Table 5.7 Battery Specifications
Rating
Heavy duty, off-road, vibration resistant
Group
31A
CCA (min)
760
1.
Position new batteries on battery support.
NOTE:
Ensure that positive terminal is positioned on the right side of the battery when facing them.
2.
Install strap (B) and secure with bolt (A).
3.
Connect battery cables. For instructions, refer to
Connecting Batteries, page 333
.
4.
Close battery cover. For instructions, refer to
Volt
12
B
Maximum Dimension
334 x 188 x 232 mm
(13 x 7.4 x 9.13 in.)
A
Figure 5.142: Battery Location
Disconnecting a Battery
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the battery cover. For instructions, refer to
215023
332
Revision B
3.
Remove the black plastic covers from the negative cable clamps (A). Loosen clamps and remove cable from batteries.
4.
Remove the red plastic covers from positive cable clamps (B). Loosen the clamps and remove cable from batteries.
B
A
Figure 5.143: Battery Location
Connecting Batteries
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Move latch (A) towards the right cab-forward side of the windrower.
2.
Grasp louver (B), and lift the hood to open.
B
A
Figure 5.144: Engine Compartment Hood
3.
Lift up on the cab-end of cover (A) to disengage it from retaining tab (B), and swing the cover away from the frame.
4.
If installing a new battery, remove plastic caps from battery posts.
IMPORTANT:
Batteries are negative grounded.
Always connect starter cable to the positive (+) terminal of battery and battery ground cable to negative (
–
) terminal of battery. Reversed polarity in battery or alternator may result in permanent damage to electrical system.
NOTE:
Before connecting harness to batteries, ensure that positive terminal is positioned on the right side of battery when installed on battery support.
A
B
Figure 5.145: Battery Location
215023
333
Revision B
5.
Attach red positive (+) cable terminals to positive posts (B) on batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
6.
Attach black negative (
–
) cable terminals to negative posts (A) on batteries and tighten clamps. Reposition plastic covers onto clamps.
B
A
7.
Swing cover (A) towards the windrower frame. Lift up on the cab end of the cover until it is secured by retaining tab (B) on the frame.
8.
Grasp hood by louver (C) and lower until hood engages the latch.
NOTE:
Check that the latch lever is not tilted to ensure the hood is latched.
Figure 5.146: Batteries
C
B
Figure 5.147: Battery Cover
A
Auxiliary Power Posts
The auxiliary power posts are a convenient way to connect remote auxiliary fuel pumps for in-field filling of the windrower fuel tank, trickle charging, or maintaining a battery charge.
IMPORTANT:
The auxiliary power posts are NOT meant for continuous duty. Remote fill pump motors have a high gallons per minute (GPM) rate, and most models can fill the windrower fuel tank within 10
–
15 minutes.
IMPORTANT:
The auxiliary power posts are NOT to be used as battery boost posts. Boosting a battery from these posts can result in blowing the auxiliary power posts
’ positive terminal fuse.
215023
334
Revision B
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the device being connected to the power posts has an amperage rating less than that of the maximum fuse rating listed on the auxiliary power posts
’ decal (A). 30 Amp loads and smaller are recommended as anything larger may blow the fuse if the device has a high in-rush current characteristic.
A
Figure 5.148: Auxiliary Power Posts Decal
5.14.2
Checking Steering Link Pivots
The following checks should be performed every year:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Place ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in PARK, shut down engine, and remove key.
A
Figure 5.149: Console
215023
335
Revision B
2.
Check steering rod bolts (A) for looseness.
3.
Ensure ball joints (B) feel firm, but can be moved by hand.
NOTE:
Ball joints that are excessively loose or too stiff to pivot by hand should be replaced.
Figure 5.150: Steering Rods Beneath the Cab
4.
Check steering link bolts (A) for looseness.
5.
Ensure ball joints (B) feel firm but can be moved by hand.
NOTE:
Ball joints that are excessively loose or too stiff to pivot by hand should be replaced.
Figure 5.151: Steering Rods
–
Pump End
Figure 5.152: Steering Link
215023
336
Revision B
6.
If bolts are loose: a.
Back off jam nut (A).
b.
Tighten inside nut (B) to 65
–
72 Nm (48
–
53 lbf·ft).
c.
Hold inside nut (B) and tighten jam nut (A) to
65
–
72 Nm (48
–
53 lbf·ft).
7.
See your MacDon Dealer to replace any loose steering link ball joints or steering rod ball joints.
8.
After replacing parts or making adjustments, perform checks for neutral interlock and steering lock. For instructions, refer to
5.11.2 Safety Systems, page 312 .
A
B
Figure 5.153: Steering Link
5.14.3
Air Conditioning Evaporator
Check the air conditioning evaporator for cleanliness every year. If the air conditioning system produces insufficient cooling, the evaporator fins may be clogged. Fins will clog up from the side opposite the blowers. The evaporator is located inside the heating air conditioning unit under the cab. To access the evaporator, remove the cover from the air conditioning unit.
Removing Air Conditioning Cover
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Loosen the clamps (A) on the two drain hoses and pull the hoses off the air conditioning (A/C) drain tubes.
215023
337
Figure 5.154: A/C Evaporator Box
Revision B
2.
Remove the eight fasteners (A) that attach the cover to the housing. Remove the cover (B).
B
A
Figure 5.155: A/C Cover
Cleaning Air Conditioning Evaporator Core
WARNING
To avoid cuts from evaporator fins, do NOT use bare hands to brush away clogs.
1.
Remove the air conditioning (A/C) cover. For instructions, refer to
Removing Air Conditioning Cover, page 337 .
2.
Use a vacuum cleaner or compressed air to remove dirt from inside the housing.
B B
3.
Blow compressed air through the evaporator fins from the blower side (A) first as shown. Direct the air straight into the evaporator to prevent fin damage. A nozzle extension makes this procedure easier.
4.
Repeat the previous step from the side (B) opposite the blowers.
A
Figure 5.156: A/C Evaporator Core
A
5.
If you can
’ t feel the compressed air blowing through the evaporator core, proceed as follows: a.
Protect the blower motor (A) from water.
b.
Soak the evaporator core (B) with warm water using a low pressure hose. Let soak for several minutes.
c.
Blow compressed air through the core from the blower side (C).
d.
Repeat the soaking procedure until air blows through the evaporator freely.
B
A
C
Figure 5.157: A/C Evaporator Core
C
215023
338
Revision B
Installing Air Conditioning Cover
1.
Straighten any bent fins.
2.
Position cover (B) and attach with eight screws (A).
B
A
3.
Reattach drain hoses to drain tubes and secure with hose clamps (A). Tighten bolts to 7
–
7.8 Nm (40
–
45 lbf·in).
Figure 5.158: Air Conditioning Cover
A
Figure 5.159: Air Conditioning Cover
5.14.4
Checking Engine Coolant Strength
Check the antifreeze in the pressurized coolant tank with a tester every year, preferably before off-season storage.
Antifreeze is essential in any climate. It broadens the operating temperature range by lowering the coolant freezing point and by raising its boiling point. Antifreeze also contains rust inhibitors and other additives to prolong engine life.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury from hot coolant, do NOT turn pressurized coolant tank cap until engine cools.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
IMPORTANT:
If antifreeze strength is not adequate, do NOT drain cooling system to protect against freezing. System may not drain completely, and damage from freezing could still result.
215023
339
Revision B
3.
Remove the pressurized coolant tank cap (A).
IMPORTANT:
Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to the first notch to relieve pressure before removing cap completely.
4.
Check the coolant in the pressurized coolant tank using an antifreeze tester. Tester should indicate protection to temperatures of -34°C (-30°F).
5.
Inspect the pressurized coolant tank cap as follows before reinstalling: a.
Check the gasket for cracks or deterioration, and replace the cap if necessary.
b.
Check that the spring in the cap moves freely. Replace the cap if spring is stuck.
6.
Install pressurized coolant tank cap (A).
7.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
Figure 5.160: Coolant Tank
A
215023
340
Revision B
5.15
Maintenance as Required
This section details service procedures that should be done as they are required.
5.15.1
Seat Belts
•
Keep sharp edges and items that can cause damage away from the belts.
•
Check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system, and mounting bolts for damage.
•
Check that bolts are tight on the seat bracket or mounting.
•
Replace all parts that have damage or wear.
•
Replace belts that have cuts that can weaken the belt.
•
Keep seat belts clean and dry. Clean only with a soap solution and warm water. Do NOT use bleach or dye on the belts, as this may weaken the material.
5.15.2
Draining Fuel Tank
Draining the fuel tank is necessary to remove old or contaminated fuel.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
WARNING
•
To avoid personal injury or death from explosion or fire, do NOT smoke or allow flame or sparks near fuel tank when refueling.
•
NEVER refuel the windrower when the engine is hot or running.
•
To avoid electric discharge and the risk of a fire or explosion, ensure that the fuel delivery system is properly bonded and grounded. A bonded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive and unbroken connection between all components of the fuel delivery system (fuel supply tank, transfer pump, transfer hose, nozzle, and others). A wire connection from the fuel delivery system to the machine chassis will equalize the static electric potential between the two machines, further reducing the chance of a static electric discharge. A properly grounded fuel delivery system has an electrically conductive connection from the fuel delivery system tank to earth ground to allow static and electrical charge dissipation.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Locate the fuel tank on the right side of the windrower frame.
215023
341
Revision B
3.
Place a container under plug (A). The fuel tank holds 518 liters (137 gallons) total.
4.
Loosen plug (A), and drain the tank.
5.
Add some clean fuel to tank to flush out any remaining contaminants.
NOTE:
Do NOT refill the fuel tank if you need to work on the system. Refill tank when work is completed. For instructions, refer to
.
A
Figure 5.161: Drain Plug
5.15.3
Draining the Diesel Exhaust Fluid Tank
It is necessary to drain the diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) tank when the DEF is contaminated or if storing the windrower for a period greater than six months.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Place a drain pan under the DEF tank (B). The drain pan should be large enough to hold 28 liters (7.5 U.S. gallons).
IMPORTANT:
Spilled DEF must be contained and absorbed by noncombustible absorbent material like sand and then shovelled into a suitable container for disposal. If spilled on tank or any surface of the vehicle, rinse thoroughly with water as DEF is corrosive.
B
A
CAUTION
Avoid contact with eyes. In case of contact, rinse immediately with water for 15 minutes.
3.
Remove the drain plug (A) from under the tank (B) and drain.
4.
Add some distilled water to the tank (B) to flush out remaining contaminants.
5.
Drain the distilled water that was used to clean the tank.
6.
Reinstall drain plug (A) into the tank (B).
7.
Refill DEF tank. For instructions, refer to
Exhaust Fluid Tank, page 254 .
NOTE:
Do NOT refill if storing for six months or longer.
Figure 5.162: View from beneath Tank
215023
342
Revision B
5.15.4
Belts
Tensioning Engine Fan Drive Belt
The engine fan drive belt is automatically tightened. Manual adjustment is NOT required.
Replacing Engine Fan Drive Belt
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
3.
Loosen compressor mounting hardware (A) and rotate the compressor (B) towards the engine to release tension on belts.
4.
Remove belts (C) from compressor (B).
C
B
A
Figure 5.163: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
5.
Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (A).
6.
Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until fan belt (B) can be slipped off pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
7.
Remove belt in order 1, 2, 3, as shown in Figure
8.
Insert the drive end of a 1/2 in. drive ratchet wrench into the belt tensioner (A).
9.
Rotate tensioner counterclockwise until belt (B) can be slipped onto pulley (C). Release tensioner and remove wrench.
10. Check that belt is properly seated in all pulley grooves.
1
A
B
Figure 5.164: Engine Belt
2
C
3
215023
343
Revision B
11. Install compressor belts (C).
12. Pry compressor (B) away from engine so that a force of
45 N (10 lbf) deflects the belts (C) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
NOTE:
The tab (D) on bracket can be used as support for prying.
13. Tighten compressor mounting hardware (A).
14. Recheck tension and readjust as required.
15. Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
C
D
A
B
Figure 5.165: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Tensioning Air Conditioner Compressor Belts
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the hood. For instructions, refer to
5.3.1 Opening Hood, page 247 .
3.
Loosen compressor mounting hardware (A).
4.
Pry compressor (B) away from engine so that a force of
45 N (10 lbf) deflects the belts (C) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
NOTE:
The tab (D) on bracket can be used as support for prying.
5.
Tighten compressor mounting hardware (A).
6.
Recheck tension and readjust as required.
7.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
C
D
A
B
Figure 5.166: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
Replacing Air Conditioner Compressor Belts
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
5.4.1 Opening Platform, page 249 .
215023
344
Revision B
3.
Loosen compressor mounting hardware (A) and rotate the compressor (B) towards the engine to release tension on belts.
4.
Remove belts (C) from compressor (B).
5.
Install compressor belts (C).
6.
Pry compressor (B) away from engine so that a force of
45 N (10 lbf) deflects the belts (C) 5 mm (3/16 in.) at mid-span.
NOTE:
The tab (D) on bracket can be used as support for prying.
7.
Tighten compressor mounting hardware (A).
8.
Recheck tension and readjust as required.
9.
Close the hood. For instructions, refer to
.
C
D
A
B
Figure 5.167: Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor
5.15.5
Engine Speed
The maximum and idle engine speeds are factory set.
Refer to
for detailed information. If specified speeds cannot be maintained, see your
MacDon Dealer.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid voiding engine warranty, contact Cummins before removing components or starting repairs.
5.15.6
Lighting
Aligning Headlights
–
Engine-Forward
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
NOTE:
Header should be attached and raised to maintain proper windrower stance.
215023
345
Revision B
1.
Position the windrower on level ground 7.5 m (25 ft.) (A) in front of a vertical surface as shown.
NOTE:
Check that casters are positioned underneath the windrower to properly align headlights.
2.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
Figure 5.168: Windrower Headlight Positioning
3.
Turn on ROAD lights (A) and switch to LOW BEAM.
Figure 5.169: Road Light Switch
A
215023
346
Revision B
4.
Adjust headlight (A) with adjusting bolts (B) so that the beam
’ s maximum height above the ground does not exceed
1263 mm (49 3/4 in.) (C). Access the bolts by reaching under the headlight bezel (D).
B
D
A
C
Figure 5.170: Left Engine-Forward Headlight
–
Right
Opposite
Aligning Headlights
–
Cab-Forward
Adjust field lights when in the field (or equivalent) to suit Operator preference.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners, and stand on header anti-slip strips.
A
Figure 5.171: Windrower in Cab-Forward
215023
347
Revision B
2.
Adjust lights by hand as required. Loosen/tighten nuts (A) if necessary.
Figure 5.172: Left Cab-Forward Headlight
–
Right
Opposite
Adjusting Front Field Lights
Adjust field lights when in the field (or equivalent) to best suit Operator preference.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Hold onto handholds (A) on the cab front corners, and stand on header anti-slip strips.
A
Figure 5.173: Windrower in Cab-Forward
215023
348
Revision B
2.
Adjust lights by hand as required. Loosen nuts (A) if necessary and retighten.
Figure 5.174: Left Cab-Forward Lights
–
Right Opposite
Adjusting Rear Roof Work Lights
Adjust lights to best suit Operator preference.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Stand on left or right platform (B) to access rear roof work lights (A).
A
B
B
Figure 5.175: Rear Roof Work Lights
215023
349
Revision B
2.
Adjust light by hand. Loosen or tighten bolts (A) if necessary.
Adjusting Rear Swath Lights
Adjust rear swath lights to best suit Operator preference.
1.
Stand on left or right platform (B) to access rear swath lights (A).
Figure 5.176: Left Rear Roof Work Light
–
Right
Opposite
B
B
Figure 5.177: Rear Swath Lights
2.
Adjust light position using bolts (A).
215023
350
Figure 5.178: Left Rear Swath Light
–
Right Opposite
Revision B
Replacing Bulbs in Standard Work Lights
The following procedure applies to all halogen bulbs shown in Figure
. If replacing engine-forward headlight bulbs, refer to
.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
Figure 5.179: Halogen Bulb Locations
C
D
B
A
A - Front Work Lights (Field) B - Stubble Lights (Rear) C - Rear Work Lights
NOTE:
Front work light shown.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Disconnect wiring harness (A).
3.
Remove rubber insulator boot (B).
4.
Remove bulb from body.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as the oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
5.
Align lugs on new bulb with slots in housing and push into place.
6.
Install insulator boot (B) and wiring harness (A).
D - Headlights (Cab-Forward)
Figure 5.180: Front Work Light
B
A
215023
351
Revision B
Replacing Headlight Bulb
–
Engine-Forward
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Remove eight hex flange bolts (A), then remove headlight bezel assembly (B). Retain hardware.
3.
Remove electrical connectors from red tail lights (C) to fully remove bezel (B).
C
4.
Remove the two bolts (A) holding the headlight bracket (B) in place and slide bracket forward.
5.
Pull wiring harness connector off the headlight and remove assembly (B).
B
C
Figure 5.181: Headlight Bezel Assembly
B
Figure 5.182: Right Headlight Shown
–
Left Similar
6.
Remove four machine screws (A) and nylon nuts (B) and retain hardware.
7.
Remove old headlight from bracket and replace with new headlight.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch the glass of the halogen bulb as oils or other chemicals from your skin will cause the bulb to fail prematurely.
8.
Attach headlight to bracket using four retained machine screws (A) and nylon nuts (B). Torque screws to 2.0
–
2.7 Nm
(18
–
24 lbf·in).
B
A
Figure 5.183: Right Headlight Shown
–
Left Similar
215023
352
Revision B
9.
Connect wiring harness connector to headlight.
10. Attach headlight bracket assembly (B) using retained bolts (A).
11. Align new headlight. For instructions, refer to
.
B
12. Attach electrical connectors to red tail lights (C).
13. Attach headlight bezel assembly (B) to frame using the eight retained hex flange bolts (A). Torque bolts to
2.0
–
2.7 Nm (18
–
24 lbf·in).
Figure 5.184: Right Headlight Shown
–
Left Similar
C
B
C
Figure 5.185: Headlight Bezel Assembly
Replacing LED Lights
–
Deluxe Cab Only
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
The M1170 Windrower deluxe cab is equipped with the following LED lights (MD #207062):
•
Four LED field lights (A)
•
Two LED stubble lights (B)
•
Two LED rear work lights (C)
The bulb of an LED light cannot be replaced. If a light fails, please contact your MacDon Dealer for replacement parts.
215023
353
Revision B
Figure 5.186: LED Light Locations
–
Deluxe Cab Only
C
B
A
Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber Lights
To replace bulbs in red and amber lights, follow these steps:
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
A
B
NOTE:
Hold onto the handholds on the cab front corners and stand on the header anti-slip strips, or stand on the maintenance platform when accessing the red and amber lights.
2.
Use left or right platform to access marker lights (A) and (B) attached to mirror arms.
Figure 5.187: Cab-Forward Red and Amber Light
Locations
215023
354
Revision B
3.
Remove two screws (A) from lens and remove lens.
4.
Push and twist light bulb to remove from socket.
5.
Install a new bulb in the socket, ensuring that bulb base is properly engaged in socket.
•
Use Bulb Trade #1157 for red tail lights
•
Use Bulb Trade #1156 for amber lights
6.
Reinstall lens with screws (A).
Figure 5.188: Red and Amber Lights
Replacing Red Tail Lights
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down engine and remove key. Turn lights OFF.
2.
Remove two hex flange bolts (A) from light (B), and remove light from bezel.
3.
Remove electrical connector from light (B).
4.
Connect wiring harness to new light (B), and secure light to bezel using two hex flange bolts (A).
A
B
Figure 5.189: Red Tail Lights
215023
355
Revision B
Replacing Beacon Lights
1.
Disconnect wiring (A) from harness.
2.
Remove nuts (B) and remove beacon (C). Discard defective beacon and hardware.
3.
Clean residue from support (D) mounting surface.
4.
Install new beacon (C) with gasket (E) onto support. Secure with bolts (F), washers (G), and nuts (B).
5.
Torque nuts to 0.65 Nm (0.48 lbf·ft).
E
B
G
F
D
A
Figure 5.190: Beacon Light Assembly
Replacing the Cabin Dome Bulb
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Insert a slotted screwdriver (or similar prying tool) into slot (A). Gently pry the lens cover until retaining tabs (B) are free of the dome light bezel.
3.
Remove lens cover.
C
B
A
Figure 5.191: Cabin Dome Light
215023
356
Revision B
4.
Replace bulb (A) (MD #208191).
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT touch glass with fingers.
A
5.
Insert single retaining tab (A) into dome light bezel.
6.
Insert a slotted screwdriver (or similar prying tool) into slot (B), and gently pry lens cover until retaining tabs (C) engage into dome light bezel.
1015623
Figure 5.192: Cabin Dome Light with Cover Removed
A C
B
Figure 5.193: Cabin Dome Light
Replacing the Cabin Dome Light Assembly
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
357
Revision B
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Insert a slotted screwdriver (or similar prying tool) into slot (A). Gently pry the lens cover until retaining tabs (B) are free of the dome light bezel.
3.
Remove lens cover.
B
A
Figure 5.194: Cabin Dome Light
4.
Remove two screws (A) from dome light bezel.
A
1015624
Figure 5.195: Cabin Dome Light with Cover Removed
5.
Carefully insert a slotted screwdriver (or similar prying tool) between roof liner and dome light assembly on the side of the light with the ON/OFF switch.
6.
Gently depress retaining clip (A), and swing dome light assembly downwards to disengage retaining tab (B).
7.
Disconnect the old dome light assembly from the wiring harness.
8.
Connect the new dome light (MD #201707) to the wiring harness.
9.
Engage retaining tab (B), and swing dome light assembly upwards until retaining clip (A) snaps into place and secures assembly.
B
Figure 5.196: Cabin Dome Light Assembly
A
215023
358
Revision B
10. Secure dome light assembly with two screws (A).
A
11. Insert single retaining tab (A) into dome light bezel.
12. Insert a slotted screwdriver (or similar prying tool) into slot (B), and gently pry lens cover until retaining tabs (C) engage into dome light bezel.
1015624
Figure 5.197: Cabin Dome Light with Cover Removed
A C
B
Figure 5.198: Cabin Dome Light
Turn Signal Indicators
If the turn signal indicators on the console do not function, contact your MacDon Dealer.
5.15.7
Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses
Most circuit breakers and fuses are located inside a fuse box mounted on the left (cab-forward) side of the frame, behind the platform and inside the battery cover.
NOTE:
The circuit breakers automatically reset. Fuses are the plastic blade type.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
215023
359
Revision B
1.
Stop engine and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the battery cover (A) to access the fuse box. For instructions, refer to
Opening Battery Cover, page 326 .
A
3.
Lift latch (A) at top of fuse box cover (B) to disengage tab, and then lower cover.
4.
Check and replace fuses as required. For instructions, refer to
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page 361 .
5.
Position cover (B) onto fuse panel, ensuring that hooks at bottom of cover have engaged fuse panel.
6.
Push latch (A) to engage tab at top of fuse box.
7.
Close battery cover and move platform to working position.
For instructions, refer to
5.4.2 Closing Platform, page 249 .
Figure 5.199: Fuse Box Location
B
A
Figure 5.200: Fuse Box Cover
1014848
215023
360
Revision B
Checking and Replacing Fuses
1.
To check fuse, pull fuse (A) out of receptacle and visually examine.
2.
To replace fuse, insert new fuse into receptacle.
IMPORTANT:
Replacement fuses should match rating on decal shown on
Fuse Panel and Relay Module Decals, page 363 .
A
Figure 5.201: Fuses
Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open fuse box cover. For instructions, refer to
5.15.7 Accessing Circuit Breakers and Fuses, page 359 .
215023
361
Revision B
3.
To replace relay (A), pull relay out of receptacle and install new relay.
4.
Reinstall cover.
A
Figure 5.202: Fuse Box
–
Cover Removed
215023
362
Revision B
Fuse Panel and Relay Module Decals
Figure 5.203: Left Rail Fuse Decal Locations
D
B
C
A - Main Fuse Panel Decal (MD #208594) (Located inside Fuse Cover) (Group A)
B - Chassis Relay Module Fuse Decal (MD #207816) (Located inside Fuse Cover) (Group B)
C - Lower AMI Group Fuse Decal (MD #291378) (Group D)
D - Upper AMI Group Fuse Decal (MD #207818) (Group D)
E - ATO Group Fuse Decal (MD #291465) (Group C)
E
A
215023
363
Revision B
Figure 5.204: Main Fuse Panel Decal (MD #208594)
–
Group A
AF20
SPARE (5A MAX)
AF19
15A
GPS
AF18
AF17
SPARE
5A
HPT DISPLAY
AF16 5A
INTRLCK GSL/SEAT SW
AF15 15A
BOOSTER FAN
AF14 10A
RADIO POWER
AF13
AF12
15A
WIPER EF
15A
WIPER CF
AF11 10A
SEAT HEAT / COOL
AF10
20A
SEAT COMPRESSOR
AF9
20A
DUAL AUX PWR PLUG
AF8
5A
WHEEL LEG SENSORS
AF7
5A
HVAC MODULE POWER
AF6 5A
RELAY MOD CTRL PWR
AF5
5A
INTERLOCK SWITCHES
AF4
SPARE (15 AMP MAX)
AF3 15A
MASTER CONTROLLER
AF2 30A
EXT MOD - FRAME
AF1 30A
EXT MOD - FIREWALL
AK10
DEF LINE
HEATER 1
AK9
DEF LINE
HEATER 2
AK8
DEF LINE
HEATER 3
AK7
AFTER
TREATMENT
MOD PWR
AK6
DEF MODULE
AK5
STARTER
INTERLOCK
AK4
RADIO / ACC
AK3
IGNITION
POWER #2
AK2
OIL FILTER
SERVICE
INDICATOR
AK1
IGNITION
MAIN
*291611 REV. B
10A AF40
AFT MOD PWR
10A AF39
DEF MODULE
15A
AF38
DEF LINE HEATERS
10A AF37
DIAG PORT POWER
10A AF36
AUTO STEER
10A AF35
WASHER PUMP CF
10A
AF34
WASHER PUMP EF
AF33
SPARE (10A MAX)
10A AF32
RADIO & MIRRORS
5A AF31
BATT DISCONNECT SW
20A AF30
POWER PLUGS
10A
HORN B+
AF29
5A
AF28
CONSOLE MOD / KEY
20A
AF27
CONSOLE AUX PLUGS
AF26
SPARE (15A MAX)
15A
GPS
AF25
AF24
SPARE
AF23
SPARE
AF22
SPARE
AF21
SPARE
215023
364
Revision B
Figure 5.205: Chassis Relay Module Fuse Panel Decal (MD #207816)
–
Group B
215023
365
Revision B
Figure 5.206: ATO (Group C) and AMI (Group D) Fuse Decals
A
B
C
A - Lower AMI Group Fuse Decal (MD #291378) B - Upper AMI Group Fuse Decal (MD #207818) C - ATO Group Fuse Decal (MD #291465)
215023
366
Revision B
Figure 5.207: Roof Headliner Fuse Decal (MD #207819)
–
Group E
215023
367
Revision B
Inspecting and Replacing 125A Main Fuses
The 125A main fuse holders are located on the frame on the left cab-forward side platform beside the battery.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
Access the 125A main fuses as follows:
1.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
2.
Open the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
3.
Remove negative battery terminal.
4.
Locate the five main fuses (A) secured to the left cab-forward front frame.
5.
To check condition of the fuse, pull tab (A) and open cover (B).
Figure 5.208: Main Fuses
B
A
Figure 5.209: 125A Main Fuse
215023
368
Revision B
6.
Examine fuse (A) for indications of melting.
7.
To remove fuse (A), remove two nuts (B) and pull the fuse free from holder (existing wiring may need to be pulled off the stud first).
8.
Install the new fuse on studs and install any existing wiring that was removed.
9.
Secure with nuts (B).
A
10. Close cover (B) and secure with tab (A).
11. Close the platform. For instructions, refer to
.
Figure 5.210: 125A Main Fuse
B
A
Figure 5.211: 125A Main Fuse
5.15.8
Drive Wheels
Raising Drive Wheel
This procedure applies to both drive wheels.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Header MUST be removed and NO weight box installed. Use a hydraulic jack with minimum lifting capacity of 2268 kg
(5000 lb.) to provide adequate support for the machine.
1.
Detach the header.
2.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
3.
Block the wheels.
215023
369
Revision B
4.
Place the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in PARK.
5.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
6.
Place a jack under the leg jack point (A). Raise the drive wheel until it is slightly off the ground.
7.
Place a jack stand beneath the lift cylinder mount (B).
NOTE:
Do NOT place jack stand under the cylinder. Use a small metal plate on top of the jack stand.
8.
Lower the windrower onto the jack stand.
Figure 5.212: Ground Speed Lever
B
A
Figure 5.213: Drive Wheel Jack Point
Removing Drive Wheels
CAUTION
Use a suitable lifting device capable of supporting a minimum of 907 kg (2000 lb.) to lift the wheel assembly away from the windrower.
1.
Raise the windrower drive wheel (A) off the ground. For instructions, refer to
Raising Drive Wheel, page 369 .
2.
Remove the wheel nuts (B).
3.
Remove the drive wheel (A).
A
B
Figure 5.214: Drive Wheel Assembly
215023
370
Revision B
Installing Drive Wheels
CAUTION
Use a lifting device capable of supporting a minimum of 907 kg (2000 lb.) to lift the wheel assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The windrower must be supported off the ground with stands. For instructions, refer to
Raising Drive Wheel, page 369 .
1.
Using a forklift, lift cab end of windrower to approximately
130 cm (51 in.) (B) off the ground, enough to position the drive wheel assembly (A). Place a stand (C) under the windrower frame.
2.
Clean mounting surface on wheel drive and rim.
A
B
C
3.
Position a suitable lifting device (A) under the tire and raise slightly.
4.
Position the wheel against wheel drive hub so air valve (B) is on the outside and tread (C) points forward (cab-forward orientation).
NOTE:
For turf tires (diamond tread pattern), be sure the arrow on the sidewall points in forward rotation (cab-forward).
Figure 5.215: Supporting Windrower
C
B
A
Figure 5.216: Drive Wheel
215023
371
Revision B
5.
Align the rim with studs on the hub and push the wheel onto the hub.
6.
Install wheel nuts (A).
IMPORTANT:
To avoid damage to wheel rims and studs, do NOT use an impact wrench. Threads must be clean and dry. Do NOT apply lubricant or anti-seize compound. Do NOT overtighten wheel nuts.
7.
Torque drive wheel nuts. For instructions, refer to
Tightening Drive Wheel Nuts, page 269
.
1
10
8
3
6
A
4
5
9
7
2
Figure 5.217: Tightening Sequence
–
Ten Bolt Wheel
1
12
3
6
7
9
11
2
10
8
5
4
Figure 5.218: Tightening Sequence
–
Twelve
Bolt Wheel
8.
Repeat the tightening sequence two additional times, ensuring the specified torque is achieved each time.
9.
Repeat Steps
to
for the other drive wheel.
10. Raise the windrower, remove the stand, and lower windrower to the ground.
11. Lower the windrower. Remove the jack. For instructions, refer to
Lowering Drive Wheel, page 372
.
12. Repeat the torque procedure every hour of operation until two consecutive checks confirm that there is no movement of the nuts.
Lowering Drive Wheel
CAUTION
Jack stand must be capable of supporting a minimum of 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
215023
372
Revision B
1.
Place a jack under the leg jack point (A), and raise the drive wheel slightly off the jack stand.
2.
Remove the jack stand from under the cylinder lift mount (B). Lower the drive wheel to the ground.
3.
Remove the jack.
B
A
Figure 5.219: Drive Wheel Leg Jacking Point
5.15.9
Caster Wheels
Adjusting Caster Tread Width
The rear casters can be adjusted to a narrow tread width, which allows loading and shipping without having to remove them.
A narrow tread width is better suited for smaller headers because it allows more space to the uncut crop, and provides more maneuverability around poles, irrigation inlets, and other obstacles.
A wider tread width reduces runover in heavy crops that produce large windrows.
WARNING
To avoid bodily injury or death from unexpected startup of the machine, always stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition before leaving the operator
’ s seat for any reason.
CAUTION
Park on a flat, level surface with the header on the ground, the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK position, and the steering wheel in locked position (centered). Wait for the HPT to beep and display a red P symbol to confirm the park brakes have engaged.
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Place the ground speed lever (GSL) in PARK.
3.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
215023
373
Revision B
4.
Using a jack (or another lifting device) under the frame at location (A), slightly raise the rear of the windrower until most of the weight is off the casters.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT damage the engine oil pan when raising the windrower.
NOTE:
Lifting device must have a lifting capacity of at least 4536 kg
(10,000 lb.).
5.
Remove six bolts (B) (four on backside, two on underside) and washers from the left and right sides of the walking beam.
B
B
B
Figure 5.220: Left Caster Wheel Extension
A
6.
Slide the left and right extensions equal distances in either the inboard or outboard directions, and align its holes at the desired locations.
NOTE:
To assist moving the extensions, rotate the caster so the wheel is parallel to the walking beam.
IMPORTANT:
Ensure the caster wheels are positioned at equal distances from the center of the windrower.
Figure 5.221: Right Caster Wheel Extension
= =
Figure 5.222: Adjustable Caster Wheels
215023
374
Revision B
7.
Position bracket (A) and install back bolts (C).
8.
Install bottom bolts (B).
9.
Tighten bolts as follows: a.
Snug bottom bolts (B), then snug back bolts (C).
b.
Tighten and torque back bolts (C) to 746
–
770 Nm
(550
–
570 bf·ft).
c.
Tighten and torque bottom bolts (B) to 746
–
770 Nm
(550
–
570 lbf·ft).
10. Lower the windrower to the ground.
IMPORTANT:
Torque bolts after first 5 and 10 hours of operation.
Installing Forked Caster Wheel
1.
Position axle assembly (B) into wheel (C) and secure with wheel nuts (A).
C
B
A
Figure 5.223: Caster Wheel Extensions
B
C
A
Figure 5.224: Caster Wheel Assembly
2.
Tighten wheel nuts (A) to 163 Nm (120 lbf·ft) using the tightening sequence shown at right. Repeat the tightening sequence three times.
3
6
A
8
5
1
4
7
2
Figure 5.225: Caster Wheel Tightening Sequence
215023
375
Revision B
3.
Position wheel assembly (D) in forked caster (C).
4.
Install eight bolts (A) and nuts (four on each side of caster) to secure axle (B) to caster (C). Torque nuts to 97
–
107 Nm
(75
–
79 lbf
∙ ft).
5.
Lower caster wheel. For instructions, refer to
C
A
B
D
Figure 5.226: Caster Wheel Assembly
Removing Forked Caster Wheel
CAUTION
Wheel assemblies are heavy. Support wheel assembly before removing axle bolts.
1.
Raise caster wheel. For instructions, refer to
2.
Remove the eight bolts (A) and nuts (four of each on each side of caster) attaching axle (B) to forked caster (C), and remove wheel assembly (D) from caster (C).
C
B
A
D
3.
Remove the eight wheel nuts (A) that secure the axle (B) to the wheel (C).
4.
Separate axle (B) and wheel (C).
Figure 5.227: Caster Wheel Assembly
B
C
A
Figure 5.228: Caster Wheel Assembly
215023
376
Revision B
Lowering Caster Wheel
1.
Raise the end of walking beam (A) slightly, using a suitable lifting device capable of lifting minimum 2268 kg (5000 lb.).
2.
Remove the jack stand, and lower the end of the walking beam until the caster wheel assembly (B) is on the ground.
3.
Remove blocks from the drive tires.
A
B
Figure 5.229: Caster Wheel Assembly
Raising Caster Wheel
This procedure is for raising the caster wheel. This procedure applies to both caster wheels.
1.
Park the windrower on a level surface.
2.
Block the wheels.
3.
Place the ground speed lever (GSL) (A) in PARK.
4.
Shut down the engine, and remove the key from the ignition.
A
5.
Raise the end of walking beam (A) until the caster wheel assembly (B) is slightly off the ground. Use a suitable lifting device, capable of lifting 2268 kg (5000 lb.) minimum.
6.
Place a jack stand beneath the walking beam and lower the beam until resting on the stand.
Figure 5.230: GSL Position
215023
377
A
B
Figure 5.231: Caster Wheel Assembly
Revision B
Chapter 6: Options and Attachments
6.1
Hood
6.1.1
High Debris Cooler Intake (Hood Scoops)
The High Debris Cooler Intake kit contains air intake ducts designed to pull cooling system air from a less debris-prone area.
MD #B6055
Instruction MD #147859 is included with the bundle.
215023
379
Revision B
6.2
Cab
6.2.1
Automated Steering Systems
A MacDon-approved automated steering system is available from MacDon Dealers that provide Trimble
® global positioning system (GPS) installation and support services.
MacDon windrowers are partially pre-wired for either the Trimble the Trimble
®
EZ-Pilot
®
®
AutoPilot
™ hydraulically integrated steering system or wheel/column-based assisted steering system. The windrower
’ s ground speed lever (GSL) has an automated steering (autosteer) engage switch.
The Trimble
®
EZ-Pilot
® system for model year 2019 and later machines requires the MacDon EZ-Pilot
®
Ready kit
(MD #B6602). Installation instruction (MD #214623) is included in the bundle.
The Trimble
®
AutoPilot
™ system for model year 2019 and later machines requires the MacDon Trimble
®
Autopilot
™
Ready kit (MD #B6601). Installation instruction (MD #214624) is included in the bundle.
Other GPS providers may supply parts in their vehicle-specific installation packages or make installation kits available through MacDon Dealers.
6.2.2
High Performance Lighting
–
Standard on Deluxe Cab Package
The standard windrower cab has four halogen field lights on the front, as well as two halogen stubble lights and two halogen work lights on the back. The Lighting Upgrade kit (MD #B6051) contains eight LED flood lights to replace all of these lights. Machines with the deluxe cab already have 360° Night Vision LED Lighting installed.
MD #B6051
Installation instructions are included in the bundle.
NOTE:
This bundle is included in the deluxe cab package.
215023
380
Revision B
6.3
Header Operation
6.3.1
Booster Spring Kit
–
External
This kit is available for headers over 2812 kg (6200 lb.) to increase float capacity.
MD #B6047
–
Booster Spring kit (external) includes two springs (one for each side) and mounting brackets. Kit instruction
MD #147825 is included in the bundle.
There is also a Double Booster Spring kit (MD #B6106) that is used together with the Booster Spring kit (external) to add on a second booster spring. Refer to
6.3.2 Double Booster Spring Kit
Table 6.1 Available Float Spring Kits for Different Header Types and Configurations
Header Type Description Header Configuration
Additional
Float Spring Kits
D130XL
D130XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D140XL
D140XL
D140XL
9.1 m (30 ft.) single reel, double knife, timed
9.1 m (30 ft.) single reel, double knife, timed
10.8 m (35 ft.) single reel, double knife, untimed
10.8 m (35 ft.) single reel, double knife, untimed
10.8 m (35 ft.) single reel, double knife, untimed
10.8 m (35 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
10.8 m (35 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
10.8 m (35 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
Transport
Transport
Upper Cross Auger
Vertical Knives
Base
Transport
Transport
Upper Cross Auger
Vertical Knives
Base
Transport
Transport
Upper Cross Auger
Vertical Knives
Base
Transport
Transport, Upper Cross Auger,
Vertical Knives
—
MD #B6047
—
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
—
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
—
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
215023
381
Revision B
Table 6.1
Available Float Spring Kits for Different Header Types and Configurations (continued)
Header Type Description Header Configuration
Additional
Float Spring Kits
D145XL
D145XL
12.2 m (40 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
12.2 m (40 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
Base
Transport
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
6.3.2
Double Booster Spring Kit
–
External
Available for headers over 2812 kg (6200 lb.) to increase the float capacity.
The Double Booster Spring kit (MD #B6106) is used together with the Booster Spring kit (MD # B6047) to add a second booster spring. Refer to
. Kit instruction MD #147826 is included in the bundle.
Table 6.2 Available Float Spring Kits for Different Header Types and Configurations
Header Type Description Header Configuration
Additional
Float Spring Kits
D145XL
13.7 m (45 ft.) double reel, double knife, untimed
Transport
Upper Cross Auger
Vertical Knives
MD #B6106
6.3.3
Double Windrow Attachment
This kit allows auger headers to lay a double windrow when installed on a windrower. The kit includes a draper deck, linkage assembly, hydraulics, and installation instructions.
MD #C2070 consists of:
•
MD #B6693
–
Deck
•
MD #B6694
–
Mounting frame and hydraulic/electrical connections
•
Double Windrow Attachment (DWA) manual
6.3.4
Double Windrow Attachment Shutoff Kit
The DWA Shut-Off kit is for M1170 Windrowers configured for both auger and draper headers .The kit will enable the
Operator to shut off the DWA draper in order to operate the windrower with a draper header.
MD #299704
Instructions are included in the kit.
6.3.5
Center-Link Lifter
This kit allows the center-link cylinder to be hydraulically positioned and connected to the header without leaving the operator
’ s station.
MD #B6617
Instruction MD #214701 included in the bundle.
215023
382
Revision B
6.3.6
Swath Compressor
The MacDon Swath Compressor is a large, formed polyethylene sheet which is designed to mount to the underside of a
MacDon M1 Series Windrower. The MacDon Swath Compressor is designed for use with D1XL and D1X Series Draper
Headers cutting canola.
When lowered, the swath compressor helps prevent wind damage by shaping the windrow and anchoring it into the stubble behind the header using a smooth, gradual transition that helps prevent shelling in ripe conditions.
The swath compressor height can be adjusted and monitored with the Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display. Height can be adjusted for crop ripeness, yield, and the amount of compression required. The swath compressor will automatically lift up if the Operator stops or reverses the windrower.
Preferred height can be saved under a One-Touch-Return preset.
MD #B6441
Instructions are included with the kit.
215023
383
Revision B
6.4
Transport
6.4.1
Ballast
Ballast kits are for draper headers only. For operation on steep hills, additional ballast sets (beyond the recommendation in the table) may be installed.
Initial rear ballast package (MD #B6053): 1 unit (163 kg [360 lb.])
Additional rear ballast package (MD #B6054): 2 units (163 kg [360 lb.] each)
Installation instructions are included.
Table 6.3 Ballast
Header Type Description Installed Options Base Kit
Additional
Kits
Additional
Float Springs
D125X
D130XL
D130XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D135XL
D140XL
D140XL
D140XL
D145XL
D145XL
D145XL
25 foot, single reel, double knife, timed
30 foot, single reel, double knife, timed
30 foot, single reel, double knife, timed
35 foot, single reel, double knife, untimed
35 foot, single reel, double knife, untimed
35 foot, single reel, double knife, untimed
35 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
35 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
35 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
40 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
40 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
40 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
45 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
45 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
45 foot, double reel, double knife, untimed
–
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
Base
Transport
Transport + upper cross auger + vertical knives
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
0
0
MD #B6047
0
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
0
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
0
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
MD #B6047
MD #B6106
215023
384
Revision B
6.4.2
Single Side Mud Caster Wheels
Single-sided mud caster wheels on an unsuspended assembly are designed to minimize wheel clogging in very heavy mud conditions.
MD #B6017
Instruction MD #214616 is included with the bundle.
6.4.3
Towing Harness
The towing harness is used together with the weight box (refer to
6.4.4 Weight Box, page 385 ) when towing a D1XL or D1X
Series Draper Header equipped with slow speed transport option behind the windrower.
MD #B6048
–
Weight box harness only. Includes hitch pin and wiring for use with slow speed header transport option.
Instruction MD #147868 is included in the bundle.
6.4.4
Weight Box
A weight box installed onto the windrower header lift system is required to transport a header behind the windrower.
MD #B5238
–
Weight box without harness
A towing harness is required to use the weight box. Refer to
6.4.3 Towing Harness, page 385
for more information.
215023
385
Revision B
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting
7.1
Engine Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom: Engine won
’ t crank.
Solution
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Move ground speed lever (GSL) to
NEUTRAL.
Move steering wheel to locked
(centered) position.
Controls not in NEUTRAL Disengage HEADER ENGAGE switch.
Symptom: Engine hard to start or will not start.
NEUTRAL interlock misadjusted Contact Dealer.
No fuel to engine
Old fuel in tank
Water, dirt, or air in fuel system
Improper type of fuel
Fill empty fuel tank. Replace clogged filter.
Drain tank. Refill with fresh fuel.
Drain, flush, fill, and prime system.
Use proper fuel for operating conditions.
Crankcase oil too heavy
Low battery output
Poor battery connection
Faulty starter
Loose electrical connection at fuel pump
Wiring shorted, circuit breaker open
ECM fuse (1 of 2) blown
ECM Ignition relay faulty
Contact Dealer
Section
and
Maintaining Fuel Filters, page 309
5.15.2 Draining Fuel Tank, page 341
5.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 239
Use recommended oil.
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
Have battery tested. Check battery electrolyte level.
Clean and tighten loose connections.
Contact Dealer.
Ensure connector at pump is fully pushed in.
Check continuity of wiring and breaker
(manual reset).
Replace.
Replace.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Contact Dealer Faulty injectors
Symptom: Engine knocks.
Engine out of time
Insufficient oil
Low or high coolant temperature
Contact Dealer.
Add oil.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
5.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 239
Improper fuel Use proper fuel.
215023
387
Revision B
Problem
Symptom: Low oil pressure.
Low oil level
Solution Section
Improper type of oil
Add oil.
Drain and fill crankcase with proper oil.
Contact Dealer.
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
Contact Dealer Worn components
Symptom: High oil consumption.
Internal parts worn
Crankcase oil too light
Contact Dealer.
Use recommended oil.
Oil leaks
Check for leaks around gaskets, seals, and drain plugs.
Symptom: Engine runs irregularly or frequently stalls.
Contact Dealer
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
5.7.1 Checking Engine Oil Level, page
Unsteady fuel supply
Water or dirt in fuel system
Low coolant temperature
Air in fuel system
Dirty or faulty injectors
Symptom: Lack of power.
Incorrect timing
Change filter on fuel tank vent line.
Replace clogged fuel filter.
Drain, flush, and fill fuel system.
Remove and check thermostat.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
5.12.1 Removing and Installing the
Fuel Tank Vent Filter, page 315
and
5.11.1 Maintaining Fuel Filters, page
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Engine oil viscosity too high
Contact Dealer.
Use recommended oil.
Contact Dealer
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
Cleaning Primary Air Filter, page 303
Intake air restriction
Clogged fuel filter
Service air cleaner.
Replace primary fuel filter, and if necessary, replace secondary fuel filter.
5.11.1 Maintaining Fuel Filters, page
High back pressure
Improper type of fuel
High or low engine temperature
Improper valve clearance
Faulty injectors
Clean out or replace exhaust canisters.
Use proper fuel.
Remove and check thermostat.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Engine temperature is below normal.
Defective thermostat Remove and check thermostat.
Symptom: Warning alarm sounds.
Engine overheated Check thermostat.
5.10.7 Inspecting Exhaust System, page 306
5.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 239
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
215023
388
Revision B
Problem
Engine overheated
Low engine oil pressure
Low charge oil pressure
Symptom: Engine overheats.
Low coolant level
Solution
Check coolant level.
Check oil level.
Check oil level.
Section
5.7.5 Checking Engine Coolant Level, page 285
5.7.1 Checking Engine Oil Level, page
5.7.3 Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281
Water only for coolant
Engine overloaded
Defective radiator cap
Dirty radiator screen
Dirty radiator core
Cooling system dirty
Defective thermostat
Defective temperature gauge or sender
Defective water pump
Symptom: High fuel consumption.
Clogged or dirty air cleaner
Fill reserve tank to proper level. Check system for leaks.
Replace with antifreeze.
Reduce ground speed.
Replace cap.
Clean screen.
Clean radiator.
Flush cooling system.
Remove and check thermostat.
Check coolant temperature with thermometer. Replace gauge if necessary.
Contact Dealer.
Service air cleaner.
Engine overloaded Reduce ground speed.
Improper valve clearance
Engine out of time
Dirty injector nozzles
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Low engine temperature
Improper type of fuel
Check thermostat.
Use proper fuel.
Symptom: Starter cranks slowly or will not operate.
Low battery output Check battery charge.
Loose or corroded battery connections Clean and tighten loose connections.
Controls not in NEUTRAL Move GSL to NEUTRAL.
Controls not in NEUTRAL
Move steering wheel to locked
(centered) position.
Controls not in NEUTRAL Disengage header.
Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 125
Inspecting Pressurized Coolant Tank
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page
5.13.1 Changing Engine Coolant, page
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Cleaning Primary Air Filter, page 303
Driving Forward in Cab-Forward Mode, page 125
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
5.1.2 Fuel Specifications, page 239
Maintaining a Battery, page 326
Maintaining a Battery, page 326
Driving in Reverse in Cab-Forward
Engaging and Disengaging the Header, page 185
215023
389
Revision B
Problem
Relay not functioning
Main fuse defective/blown
Key power fuse blown
Key switch worn or terminals loose
Switch at Interlock not closed or defective
Crankcase oil too high viscosity
Solution
Check relay and wire connections.
Replace main fuse.
Replace.
Contact Dealer.
Adjust switch or replace Contact your
Dealer.
Use recommended oil.
Section
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Checking and Replacing Fuses, page
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
5.1.3 Lubricants, Fluids, and System
215023
390
Revision B
7.2
Electrical Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Symptom: Low voltage and/or the battery will not charge.
Defective battery Have battery tested.
Loose or corroded connections
Defective alternator belt
Section
Clean and tighten battery connections.
Maintaining a Battery, page 326
Replace worn belt.
Replacing Engine Fan Drive Belt, page
Alternator or voltage regulator not connected properly
Dirty or defective alternator, defective voltage regulator, or high resistance in circuit
Symptom: Lights dim.
Connect properly.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
High resistance in circuit or poor ground on lights
Symptom: Lights do not light.
Check the wiring circuit for a break in a wire or a poor ground.
—
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Burned out or defective light bulb
Broken wiring
Poor ground on lights
Open or defective circuit breaker
Defective relay
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Replace light bulb.
Check wiring for broken wire or shorts.
Clean and tighten ground wires.
Check circuit breaker.
Replace relay.
Replacing Bulbs in Standard Work
Replacing Bulbs in Red and Amber
Replacing Red Tail Lights, page 355
Replacing Beacon Lights, page 356
Replacing the Cabin Dome Bulb, page
—
—
5.15.7 Accessing Circuit Breakers and
Replacing Circuit Breakers and Relays, page 361
Symptom: Wrong turn signal/indicator lights activated.
Reversed wiring Contact Dealer.
Symptom: No current to tab.
Broken or disconnected wire
Circuit breaker tripped
Contact Dealer.
Breaker automatically resets.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
—
215023
391
Revision B
7.3
Hydraulics Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom: Header or reel is not lifting.
Appropriate solenoids not being energized by activating switch
Contact Dealer.
Solution
Symptom: Reel and/or conveyor is not turning.
Flow controls adjusted too low
Toggle speed controls on Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) display to increase flow.
Flow controls adjusted too low
Toggle speed controls on Harvest
Performance Tracker (HPT) display to increase flow.
Appropriate solenoid on flow control block not being energized
Contact Dealer.
Relief pressure too low Check/adjust/clean relief valve.
Symptom: Hydraulic oil high-temperature alarm activates.
Hydraulic oil cooling system not working properly
Check/clean cooling box.
Contact Dealer
Conveyor Speed Adjustment Buttons, page 76
and
Reel and Disc Speed Switch, page 73
Conveyor Speed Adjustment Buttons, page 76
and
Reel and Disc Speed Switch, page 73
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Section
5.9.2 Cleaning Cooler Module, page
215023
392
Revision B
7.4
Header Drive Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom: Header drive is not engaging.
OPERATOR PRESENCE switch not closed or faulty
OPERATOR PRESENCE switch not closed or faulty
Solution
Occupy operator
’ s seat or replace switch. Contact your Dealer.
Occupy operator
’ s seat or replace switch. Contact your Dealer.
Appropriate solenoid not being energized by activating switch
Couplers not connected
Faulty pump or flow controls
Control solenoids disconnected
Header ID not detected
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Attach header or check wiring. Contact your Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Section
Symptom: Header drive lacks power.
Relief valve setting too low
Header drive overload
Symptom: Warning alarm sounds.
Header drive overload
Relief valve setting too low
Contact Dealer.
Reduce ground speed.
Reduce ground speed.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
—
—
215023
393
Revision B
7.5
Traction Drive Troubleshooting
Problem Solution Section
Symptom: The warning alarm sounds and the low charge pressure warning appears on the Harvest Performance
Tracker (HPT).
Low hydraulic oil level
Stop engine, and add oil to hydraulic system.
Contact Dealer.
5.7.3 Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281
Low hydraulic pressure Contact Dealer
Faulty sender Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Symptom: Wheels lack necessary ability to pull on a grade or when pulling out of a ditch.
Internal pump or motor damage Contact Dealer
Insufficient torque at drive wheels
Loose or worn controls
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Contact Dealer.
Maintain engine rpm, decrease GSL setting.
Check controls.
Check charge pressure.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
—
Relief valve in tandem pump dirty or damaged
Replace relief valve.
Contact Dealer
Symptom: With the steering wheel centered, one wheel pulls more than the other wheel.
Leakage at pump or motor
Binding or interference with controls under cab
Faulty relief valve
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Both wheels will not pull in forward or in reverse.
Loose hardware on pump controls Repair or tighten.
Check charge pressure.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Repair or replace valve Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Low oil level and low charge pressure Check oil reservoir level.
Wheel drives disengaged Engage wheel drives.
Servo input loose
Failed pump
Check servo.
Contact Dealer.
Symptom: One wheel will not pull in forward or in reverse.
Broken pump arm or shaft
Steering controls worn or defective
Contact Dealer.
Check GSL and steering for loose, worn or damaged ball joints and connecting rods.
5.7.3 Checking Hydraulic Oil, page 281
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
High pressure relief valve stuck open, damaged seat
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Failed pump, motor or final drive
Contact Dealer.
Check charge pressure.
Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Excessive noise from the drive system.
Mechanical interference in steering or ground speed linkage
Remove interference.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
215023
394
Revision B
Problem
Brakes binding or not releasing fully
Faulty pump or motor
Solution
Check charge pressure.
Contact Dealer.
Air in system
Hydraulic line clamps loose
Ball joints are worn
Check lines for leakage.
Tighten clamps.
Replace worn parts.
Symptom: The hydraulic oil filter leaks at a seal.
Not properly tightened Tighten filter element.
Damaged seal or threads Replace filter or filter head.
Contact Dealer
Contact Dealer
Section
—
—
—
Installing Return Oil Filter, page 276
or
Installing Charge Filter, page 277
Removing Return Oil Filter, page 275
or
Removing Charge Filter, page 277
215023
395
Revision B
7.6
Steering and Ground Speed Control Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom: The machine will not steer straight.
Neutral interlock misadjusted
Parking brake not functioning
Ground speed lever (GSL) servo misadjusted
Contact Dealer.
Solution
Linkage worn or loose
Adjust steering chain tension. Replace worn parts. Adjust linkage.
Symptom: The machine moves on flat ground with controls set to neutral.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
GSL cable misadjusted Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Steering wheel will not lock with the GSL set to PARK.
Transmission interlock misadjusted
Faulty GSL neutral switch
Interlock springs not pulling interlock closed
Faulty switch on PARK
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Replace or reattach springs.
Replace switch or adjust.
Symptom: Insufficient road speed.
Ground speed limit is too low Increase limit.
Symptom: Maximum ground speed is too slow.
Servo not adjusted properly
Fault with wheel motor control
GSL position sensor not calibrated or damaged
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Maximum speed limit is set at 10 mph Increase speed limit.
Section
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page
—
—
—
Adjusting Ground Speed Limit, page
Symptom: Steering is too stiff or too loose.
Steering chain tension is out of adjustment
Adjust steering chain tension.
Ball joints or steering linkage pivot stiff Replace or repair.
—
—
215023
396
Revision B
7.7
Cab Air Troubleshooting
Problem
Symptom: The blower fan will not run.
Burned out motor
Burned out switch
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Solution
Motor shaft tight or bearings worn
Faulty wiring
— loose or broken
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Blower rotors in contact with housing Contact Dealer.
Burned out motor
—
Symptom: The blower fan is operating, but air doesn
’ t blow into the cab.
Dirty fresh air filter Clean fresh air filter.
Dirty recirculating air filter Clean return air filter.
Evaporator clogged Clean evaporator.
Air flow passage blocked Remove blockage.
Symptom: Heater is not heating.
Heater shut-off valve at engine closed Open valve.
Defective thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Replace thermostat.
Heater temperature control defective Replace control.
No thermostat in engine water outlet manifold
Install thermostat.
Symptom: Air louvers emitting odor.
Plugged drainage hose Blow out hose with compressed air.
Dirty filters Clean filters.
Symptom: Air conditioning is not cooling.
Low refrigerant level Add refrigerant.
Clutch coil burned out or disconnected Contact Dealer.
Blower motor disconnected or burned out
Contact Dealer.
Switch contacts in thermostat burned excessively, or sensing element defective
Replace thermostat.
Compressor partially or completely seized
Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Condenser fins plugged Clean condenser.
Section
—
—
—
—
—
—
Inspecting and Cleaning Fresh Air
Intake Filter Element, page 288
5.9.1 Servicing Return Air Filter, page
Cleaning Air Conditioning Evaporator
—
3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off Valve, page 59
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
—
Contact Dealer.
—
—
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Cleaning Left Cooling Module, page
215023
397
Revision B
Problem
Loose or broken compressor drive belt
Dirty filters
Replace drive belt and/or tighten to specifications.
Solution
Clean fresh air and recirculation filters.
Section
Tensioning Air Conditioner Compressor
and
Conditioner Compressor Belts, page
5.9.1 Servicing Return Air Filter, page
Broken or disconnected electrical wire
Broken or disconnected ground wire
Check all terminals for loose connections; check wiring for hidden breaks.
Check ground wire to see if loose, broken, or disconnected.
—
—
Expansion valve stuck in open or closed position
Contact Dealer.
—
Broken refrigerant line
Leak in system
Compressor shaft seal leaking
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
—
—
—
Clogged screen in receiver-drier; plugged hose or coil
Contact Dealer.
—
Symptom: Air conditioning is not producing sufficient cooling (meaning that air temperature in the windrower cab, measured at the louvered vent, can be maintained at 14°C [57°F] below ambient air temperature)
Compressor clutch slipping
Remove clutch assembly for service or replacement.
Contact Dealer.
Thermostat defective or improperly adjusted
Replace thermostat.
Clogged air filters
Heater circuit is open
Remove air filters, and clean or replace as necessary.
Lower temperature control in cab, and close valve on engine.
Insufficient air circulation over condenser coil; fins clogged with dirt or insects
Clean condenser.
Evaporator fins clogged
Refrigerant low
Clogged expansion valve
Clogged receiver-drier
Excessive moisture in system
Air in system
Clean evaporator fins (under cab floor).
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Blower motor sluggish in operation Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Air conditioning cools intermittently.
Unit icing up due to thermostat adjusted too low
Adjust thermostat.
Contact Dealer.
5.9.1 Servicing Return Air Filter, page
3.10.3 Climate Controls, page 59
and
3.10.1 Heater Shut-Off Valve, page 59
Cleaning Left Cooling Module, page
Cleaning Air Conditioning Evaporator
Contact Dealer.
—
—
—
—
—
—
215023
398
Revision B
Problem
Unit icing up due to excessive moisture in system
Contact Dealer.
Unit icing up due to incorrect superheat adjustment in the expansion valve
Thermostat defective
Defective blower switch or blower motor
Partially open, improper ground or loose connection in compressor clutch coil
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Compressor clutch slipping Contact Dealer.
Symptom: Air conditioning system too noisy.
Solution
Defective winding or improper connection in compressor clutch coil or relay
Excessive charge in system
Low charge in system
Excessive moisture in system
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Loose or excessively worn drive belt
Noisy clutch
Noisy compressor
Compressor oil level low
Blower fan noisy due to excessive wear
Symptom: Cab windows fog up.
High humidity
—
—
—
—
—
Tighten or replace as required.
Remove clutch for service or replacement as required.
Check mountings and repair. Remove compressor for service or replacement.
Add SP-15 PAG refrigerant oil.
Remove blower motor for service or replacement as necessary.
—
—
—
Tensioning Air Conditioner Compressor
and
Conditioner Compressor Belts, page
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Contact Dealer.
Run A/C to dehumidify air and heater to control temperature.
Section
—
—
3.10.3 Climate Controls, page 59
215023
399
Revision B
7.8
Operator
’ s Station Troubleshooting
Solution Problem
Rough ride.
Seat suspension not adjusted for operator
’ s weight
High air pressure in tires
Cab suspension too stiff
Adjust seat suspension.
Deflate to proper pressure.
Adjust suspension.
Section
3.3.3 Suspension and Height, page 43
5.7.4 Checking Tire Pressures, page
Contact Dealer.
215023
400
Revision B
Chapter 8: Reference
8.1
Torque Specifications
The following tables provide correct torque values for various bolts, cap screws, and hydraulic fittings.
•
Tighten all bolts to torque values specified in charts (unless otherwise noted throughout this manual).
•
Replace hardware with same strength and grade of bolt.
•
Use torque value tables as a guide and periodically check tightness of bolts.
•
Understand torque categories for bolts and cap screws by using their identifying head markings.
Jam nuts
When applying torque to finished jam nuts, multiply the torque applied to regular nuts by f=0.65.
Self-tapping screws
Standard torque is to be used ( NOT to be used on critical or structurally important joints).
Nominal
Size (A)
3-0.5
3.5-0.6
4-0.7
5-0.8
6-1.0
8-1.25
10-1.5
12-1.75
14-2.0
16-2.0
20-2.5
24-3.0
8.1.1
Metric Bolt Specifications
Table 8.1 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Free Spinning Nut
Torque (Nm)
Min.
1.4
Max.
1.6
2.2
3.3
6.7
11.4
28
55
95
152
236
460
796
2.5
3.7
7.4
12.6
30
60
105
168
261
509
879
Torque (lbf·ft) (*lbf·in)
Min.
*13
*20
*29
*59
*101
20
40
70
113
175
341
589
Max.
*14
*22
*32
*66
*112
23
45
78
124
193
377
651
A
Figure 8.1: Bolt Grades
215023
401
Revision B
3-0.5
3.5-0.6
4-0.7
5-0.8
6-1.0
8-1.25
10-1.5
12-1.75
14-2.0
16-2.0
20-2.5
24-3.0
Table 8.2 Metric Class 8.8 Bolts and Class 9 Distorted
Thread Nut
Nominal
Size (A)
Torque (Nm)
Min.
1
Max.
1.1
1.5
2.3
4.5
7.7
18.8
37
65
104
161
314
543
1.7
2.5
5
8.6
20.8
41
72
115
178
347
600
Torque (lbf·ft) (*lbf·in)
Min.
*9
*14
*20
Max.
*10
*15
*22
*40
*69
*167
28
48
77
119
233
402
*45
*76
*185
30
53
85
132
257
444
Nominal
Size (A)
3-0.5
3.5-0.6
4-0.7
5-0.8
6-1.0
8-1.25
10-1.5
12-1.75
14-2.0
16-2.0
20-2.5
24-3.0
Table 8.3 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Free
Spinning Nut
Torque (Nm)
Min.
1.8
2.8
4.2
8.4
14.3
38
75
132
210
326
637
1101
Max.
2
3.1
4.6
9.3
15.8
42
83
145
232
360
704
1217
Torque (lbf·ft) (*lbf·in)
Min.
*18
*27
*41
*82
*140
28
56
97
156
242
472
815
Max.
*19
*30
*45
*91
*154
31
62
108
172
267
521
901
A
Figure 8.2: Bolt Grades
A
Figure 8.3: Bolt Grades
215023
402
Revision B
Nominal
Size (A)
3-0.5
3.5-0.6
4-0.7
5-0.8
6-1.0
8-1.25
10-1.5
12-1.75
14-2.0
16-2.0
20-2.5
24-3.0
Table 8.4 Metric Class 10.9 Bolts and Class 10 Distorted
Thread Nut
Torque (Nm)
Min.
1.3
2.1
3.1
6.3
10.7
26
51
90
143
222
434
750
Max.
1.5
2.3
3.4
7
11.8
29
57
99
158
246
480
829
Torque (lbf·ft) (*lbf·in)
Min.
*12
*19
*28
Max.
*13
*21
*31
*56
*95
19
38
66
106
165
322
556
*62
*105
21
42
73
117
182
356
614
A
Figure 8.4: Bolt Grades
M3
M4
M5
M6
M8
M10
M12
M14
M16
8.1.2
Metric Bolt Specifications Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Table 8.5 Metric Bolt Bolting into Cast Aluminum
Nominal
Size (A)
Bolt Torque
8.8
(Cast Aluminum)
20
40
70
–
–
Nm
–
–
–
9
14
28
52
–
– lbf·ft
–
–
–
6
10.9
(Cast Aluminum)
Nm
–
4
8
12
28
55
100
–
– lbf·ft
1
2.6
5.5
9
20
40
73
–
–
A
Figure 8.5: Bolt Grades
215023
403
Revision B
8.1.3
O-Ring Boss Hydraulic Fittings
–
Adjustable
1.
Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
2.
Back off lock nut (C) as far as possible. Ensure that washer (D) is loose and is pushed toward lock nut (C) as far as possible.
3.
Check that O-ring (A) is NOT on threads and adjust if necessary.
4.
Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring (A).
B
A
C
D
5.
Install fitting (B) into port until backup washer (D) and
O-ring (A) contact part face (E).
6.
Position angle fittings by unscrewing no more than one turn.
7.
Turn lock nut (C) down to washer (D) and tighten to torque shown. Use two wrenches, one on fitting (B) and other on lock nut (C).
8.
Check final condition of fitting.
Figure 8.6: Hydraulic Fitting
A
D
B
Figure 8.7: Hydraulic Fitting
E
C
215023
404
Revision B
Table 8.6 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings
–
Adjustable
SAE Dash Size
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-16
-20
-24
-32
Thread Size (in.)
5/16
–
24
3/8
–
24
7/16
–
20
1/2
–
20
9/16
–
18
3/4
–
16
7/8
–
14
1 1/16
–
12
1 3/8
–
12
1 5/16
–
12
1 5/8
–
12
1 7/8
–
12
2 1/2
–
12
Nm
120
–
132
153
–
168
176
–
193
221
–
243
270
–
298
332
–
365
6
–
7
12
–
13
19
–
21
21
–
33
26
–
29
46
–
50
75
–
82
Torque Value
20 lbf·ft (*lbf·in)
*53
–
62
*106
–
115
14
–
15
15
–
24
19
–
21
34
–
37
55
–
60
88
–
97
113
–
124
130
–
142
163
–
179
199
–
220
245
–
269
20.
Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
215023
405
Revision B
8.1.4
O-Ring Boss Hydraulic Fittings
–
Non-Adjustable
1.
Inspect O-ring (A) and seat (B) for dirt or obvious defects.
C
2.
Check that O-ring (A) is NOT on threads and adjust if necessary.
3.
Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring.
4.
Install fitting (C) into port until fitting is hand-tight.
5.
Torque fitting (C) according to values in Table
6.
Check final condition of fitting.
A
Table 8.7 O-Ring Boss (ORB) Hydraulic Fittings
–
Non-Adjustable
SAE Dash Size
-2
-3
-4
-5
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-16
-20
-24
-32
Thread Size (in.)
5/16
–
24
3/8
–
24
7/16
–
20
1/2
–
20
9/16
–
18
3/4
–
16
7/8
–
14
1 1/16
–
12
1 3/8
–
12
1 5/16
–
12
1 5/8
–
12
1 7/8
–
12
2 1/2
–
12
Figure 8.8: Hydraulic Fitting
Nm
120
–
132
153
–
168
176
–
193
221
–
243
270
–
298
332
–
365
6
–
7
12
–
13
19
–
21
21
–
33
26
–
29
46
–
50
75
–
82
Torque Value 21 lbf·ft (*lbf·in)
*53
–
62
*106
–
115
14
–
15
15
–
24
19
–
21
34
–
37
55
–
60
88
–
97
113
–
124
130
–
142
163
–
179
199
–
220
245
–
269
B
21.
Torque values shown are based on lubricated connections as in reassembly.
215023
406
Revision B
8.1.5
O-Ring Face Seal Hydraulic Fittings
1.
Check components to ensure that sealing surfaces and fitting threads are free of burrs, nicks, scratches, or any foreign material.
Figure 8.9: Hydraulic Fitting
2.
Apply hydraulic system oil to O-ring (B).
3.
Align tube or hose assembly so that flat face of sleeve (A) or (C) comes in full contact with O-ring (B).
4.
Thread tube or hose nut (D) until hand-tight. The nut should turn freely until it is bottomed out.
5.
Torque fittings according to values in Table
.
NOTE:
If applicable, hold hex on fitting body (E) to prevent rotation of fitting body and hose when tightening fitting nut (D).
6.
Use three wrenches when assembling unions or joining two hoses together.
7.
Check final condition of fitting.
Table 8.8 O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings
A
D
B
E
Figure 8.10: Hydraulic Fitting
SAE Dash Size
-6
-8
-10
-12
-14
-3
-4
-5
Thread Size (in.)
Note 23
9/16
11/16
13/16
1
1 3/16
Tube O.D. (in.)
1/2
5/8
3/4
7/8
3/16
1/4
5/16
3/8
Nm
–
25
–
28
–
40
–
44
55
–
61
80
–
88
115
–
127
–
Torque Value 22 lbf·ft
–
18
–
21
–
29
–
32
41
–
45
59
–
65
85
–
94
–
C
22.
Torque values and angles shown are based on lubricated connection as in reassembly.
23. O-ring face seal type end not defined for this tube size.
215023
407
Revision B
Table 8.8
O-Ring Face Seal (ORFS) Hydraulic Fittings (continued)
SAE Dash Size
-16
-20
-24
-32
Thread Size (in.)
1 7/16
1 11/16
1
–
2
2 1/2
Tube O.D. (in.)
1
1 1/4
1 1/2
2
Nm
150
–
165
205
–
226
315
–
347
510
–
561
Torque Value
24 lbf·ft
111
–
122
151
–
167
232
–
256
376
–
414
8.1.6
Tapered Pipe Thread Fittings
Assemble pipe fittings as follows:
1.
Check components to ensure that fitting and port threads are free of burrs, nicks, scratches, or any form of contamination.
2.
Apply pipe thread sealant (paste type) to external pipe threads.
3.
Thread fitting into port until hand-tight.
4.
Torque connector to appropriate torque angle. The turns from finger tight (TFFT) and flats from finger tight (FFFT) values are shown in Table
. Make sure that tube end of a shaped connector (typically 45° or 90°) is aligned to receive incoming tube or hose assembly. Always finish alignment of fitting in tightening direction. Never back off (loosen) pipe threaded connectors to achieve alignment.
5.
Clean all residue and any excess thread conditioner with appropriate cleaner.
6.
Assess final condition of fitting. Pay special attention to possibility of cracks to port opening.
7.
Mark final position of fitting. If a fitting leaks, disassemble fitting and check for damage.
NOTE:
Overtorque failure of fittings may not be evident until fittings are disassembled.
Table 8.9 Hydraulic Fitting Pipe Thread
Tapered Pipe Thread Size
1/8
–
27
1/4
–
18
3/8
–
18
1/2
–
14
3/4
–
14
1
–
11 1/2
1 1/4
–
11 1/2
1 1/2
–
11 1/2
2
–
11 1/2
Recommended TFFT
2
–
3
2
–
3
2
–
3
2
–
3
1.5
–
2.5
1.5
–
2.5
1.5
–
2.5
1.5
–
2.5
1.5
–
2.5
Recommended FFFT
12
–
18
12
–
18
12
–
18
12
–
18
12
–
18
9
–
15
9
–
15
9
–
15
9
–
15
24.
Torque values and angles shown are based on lubricated connection as in reassembly.
215023
408
Revision B
Area
Flow
Force
Length
Length
Power
Pressure
Pressure
Pressure
8.2
Conversion Chart
Table 8.10 Conversion Chart
Quantity SI Units (Metric)
Unit Name hectare liters per minute ha
Abbreviation
L/min
Newton N mm millimeter meter m kilowatt kilopascal kW kPa megapascal bar (Non-SI)
MPa bar
Torque Newton meter Nm
Factor x 2.4710 = x 0.2642 = x 0.2248 = x 0.0394 = x 3.2808 = x 1.341 = x 0.145 = x 145.038 = x 14.5038 = x 0.7376 =
Torque Newton meter Nm
Temperature degrees Celsius
Velocity
Velocity
Velocity
Volume
Volume
Volume
Weight meters per minute meters per second
°C kilometers per hour km/h liter milliliter cubic centimeter kilogram m/min m/s
L mL cm 3 or cc kg x 8.8507 =
(°C x 1.8) + 32 = x 3.2808 = x 3.2808 = x 0.6214 = x 0.2642 = x 0.0338 = x 0.061 = x 2.2046 = acre
US Customary Units (Standard)
Unit Name Abbreviation acres
US gallons per minute gpm pound force inch foot lbf in.
ft.
horsepower hp pounds per square inch psi pounds per square inch psi pounds per square inch psi pound feet or foot pounds pound inches or inch pounds degrees Fahrenheit feet per minute feet per second miles per hour
US gallon ounce cubic inch pound lbf·ft lbf·in
°F ft/min ft/s mph
US gal oz.
in.
3 lb.
215023
409
Revision B
8.3
Windrower Fault Codes
The Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) displays the windrower fault codes as a sequence of three numbers (AAA.BBBBBB.
CC). The sequence is defined as follows:
•
AAA = The Source Address (SA) defines which module generated the fault.
•
BBBBBB = The SPN is the description of the unique fault value.
•
CC = The FMI indicated the fault
’ s level of severity.
Source address (SA) numbers refer to the following locations:
•
23: Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) display
•
25: HVAC box
•
104: Master controller and connected extension modules
•
176: Roof relay module
•
178: Chassis relay module
•
190: Console and ground speed lever (GSL)
215023
410
Revision B
215023
411
Revision B
215023
412
Revision B
215023
413
Revision B
215023
414
Revision B
215023
415
Revision B
215023
416
Revision B
215023
417
Revision B
215023
418
Revision B
215023
419
Revision B
215023
420
Revision B
215023
421
Revision B
215023
422
Revision B
215023
423
Revision B
215023
424
Revision B
215023
425
Revision B
215023
426
Revision B
215023
427
Revision B
215023
428
Revision B
215023
429
Revision B
215023
430
Revision B
215023
431
Revision B
215023
432
Revision B
215023
433
Revision B
215023
434
Revision B
215023
435
Revision B
215023
436
Revision B
215023
437
Revision B
215023
438
Revision B
215023
439
Revision B
215023
440
Revision B
215023
441
Revision B
215023
442
Revision B
215023
443
Revision B
215023
444
Revision B
215023
445
Revision B
215023
446
Revision B
215023
447
Revision B
215023
448
Revision B
215023
449
Revision B
215023
450
Revision B
215023
451
Revision B
215023
452
Revision B
215023
453
Revision B
215023
454
Revision B
215023
455
Revision B
8.4
Engine Fault Codes
Example: Harvest Performance Tracker (HPT) displays the Fault Code 629S 16F 28C
•
629S - S represents the J1939 SPN column. Locate code 629 in that column.
•
12F - F represents the FMI column. Locate code 12 in that column.
•
28C - C is occurrences, 28 is the quantity.
•
J1939 SPN description - Controller 1. The Cummins description of this is engine control module critical internal failure -
Bad intelligent device or component
•
The Cummins Dealer will request the fault code that corresponds with the number that you have located in the J1939
SPN column.
J1939
SPN
27
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
Check
Engine
51
51
84
91
91
91
91
91
91
3
4
2
0
1
2
3
4
9
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Lamp
Amber
None
None
Amber
Red
Red
Red
Amber
Amber
Red
Cummins
Fault Code
2272
6497
6498
241
148
147
1242
1358
1359
3326
J1939_SPN Description
Engine Exhaust Gas
Engine Intake Throttle
Actuator Position Sensor
Circuit
Engine Intake Throttle
Actuator Position Sensor
Circuit
Wheel-Based
Vehicle Speed
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Detail
EGR Valve Position Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Intake Throttle Actuator
Position Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Intake Throttle Actuator
Position Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
Wheel-Based Vehicle Speed -
Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 1 - Data valid but above normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position 1 Sensor Circuit
Frequency - Data valid but below normal operating range
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 1 - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 1 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 1 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
SAE J1939 Multiplexed
Accelerator Pedal or Lever Sensor
System - Abnormal update rate
215023
456
Revision B
J1939
SPN
91
94
94
95
97
97
97
97
100
100
100
100
100
101
101
J1939
FMI
19
3
4
16
3
4
15
16
1
2
3
4
18
0
2
Telltale
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Water in
Fuel
Eng Oil
Press
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Water in
Fuel
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
1515
546
547
2372
428
429
418
1852
415
435
135
141
143
556
1942
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Accelerator Pedal
Position 1
Engine Fuel Delivery
Pressure
Engine Fuel Delivery
Pressure
Engine Fuel Filter
Differential Pressure
Water In Fuel Indicator
Water In Fuel Indicator
Water In Fuel Indicator
Water In Fuel Indicator
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Crankcase Pressure
Engine Crankcase Pressure
SAE J1939 Multiplexed
Accelerator Pedal or Lever Sensor
System - Received network data in error
Fuel Delivery Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Fuel Delivery Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Fuel Filter Differential Pressure -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Water in Fuel Indicator Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Water in Fuel Indicator Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Water in Fuel Indicator - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe Level
Water in Fuel Indicator - Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Engine Oil Rifle Pressure - Data valid but below normal operational range - Most Severe
Level
Engine Oil Rifle Pressure - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Oil Rifle Pressure 1 Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Oil Rifle Pressure 1 Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Oil Rifle Pressure - Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Crankcase Pressure - Data valid but above normal operational range - Most Severe Level
Crankcase Pressure - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
215023
457
Revision B
J1939
SPN
101
101
101
101
102
102
103
103
103
105
105
105
105
105
J1939
FMI
Telltale
3
Check
Engine
4
15
16
3
4
15
16
18
0
3
4
15
16
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Red
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
1843
1844
1974
555
122
123
2288
595
687
155
153
154
2964
488
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Engine Crankcase Pressure
Engine Crankcase Pressure
Engine Crankcase Pressure
Engine Crankcase Pressure
Engine Intake Manifold #1
Pressure
Engine Intake Manifold #1
Pressure
Engine Turbocharger
1 Speed
Engine Turbocharger
1 Speed
Engine Turbocharger
1 Speed
Engine Intake Manifold 1
Engine Intake Manifold 1
Engine Intake Manifold 1
Engine Intake Manifold #1
Engine Intake Manifold
Crankcase Pressure Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Crankcase Pressure Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Crankcase Pressure - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe Level
Crankcase Pressure - Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Intake Manifold 1 Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Intake Manifold 1 Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Turbocharger 1 Speed - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe Level
Turbocharger 1 Speed - Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Turbocharger 1 Speed - Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Intake Manifold 1 Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operational range - Most Severe
Level
Intake Manifold 1 Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Intake Manifold 1 Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Intake Manifold 1 Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe
Level
Intake Manifold 1 Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
215023
458
Revision B
J1939
SPN
107
107
110
110
110
110
110
111
111
111
111
111
157
157
J1939
FMI
15
16
0
3
4
16
31
1
3
4
17
18
0
3
Telltale
Eng Air
Filter
Eng Air
Filter
Eng coolant temp
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Eng coolant temp
Check
Engine
Coolant
Level
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Coolant
Level
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Red
None
None
Coolant
Level
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
Red
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
5576
3341
151
144
145
146
2659
235
6522
6523
2448
197
449
451
J1939_SPN Description
Engine Air Filter 1
Differential Pressure
Engine Air Filter 1
Differential Pressure
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Engine Coolant Level
Engine Coolant Level
Engine Coolant Level
Engine Coolant Level
Engine Coolant Level
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 1
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 1
Detail
Engine Air Filter Differential
Pressure - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least
Severe Level
Engine Air Filter Differential
Pressure - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Engine Coolant Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operational range - Most
Severe Level
Engine Coolant Temperature 1
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Coolant Temperature 1
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Coolant Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Engine Coolant Temperature -
Condition exists
Coolant Level - Data valid but below normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
Coolant Level Sensor 1 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Coolant Level Sensor 1 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Coolant Level - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Least Severe Level
Coolant Level - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure -
Data valid but above normal operational range - Most
Severe Level
Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
215023
459
Revision B
J1939
SPN
157
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
Check
Engine
157
157
168
168
168
168
175
175
190
190
190
237
411
16
18
15
16
17
18
3
4
0
2
16
13
2
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Battery
Battery
Battery
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
None
Amber
None
None
Red
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
452
553
559
6256
442
6257
249
689
6525
234
2321
2468
4517
1866
J1939_SPN Description
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 1
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 1
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 1
Battery Potential / Power
Input 1
Battery Potential / Power
Input 1
Battery Potential / Power
Input 1
Battery Potential / Power
Input 1
Engine Oil Temperature 1
Engine Oil Temperature 1
Engine Speed
Engine Speed
Engine Speed
Vehicle
Identification Number
Engine Exhaust Gas
Detail
Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Injector Metering Rail 1 Pressure -
Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Battery 1 Voltage - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Battery 1 Voltage - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Battery 1 Voltage - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Battery 1 Voltage - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Oil Temperature Sensor 1
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Crankshaft Speed/Position
- Data valid but above normal operational range - Most
Severe Level
Engine Crankshaft Speed/Position
- Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Crankshaft Speed/Position
- Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Vehicle Identification Number -
Out of Calibration
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Differential Pressure - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
215023
460
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
411
411
412
412
412
412
441
441
441
558
558
558
563
563
3
4
3
4
15
16
3
4
14
2
13
19
9
31
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
Red
Amber
None
Cummins
Fault Code
2273
2274
2375
2376
2961
2962
293
294
6583
431
432
3527
3488
4215
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 Differential
Pressure
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 Differential
Pressure
Engine Exhaust Gas
Engine Exhaust Gas
Engine Exhaust Gas
Engine Exhaust Gas
Auxiliary Temperature 1
Auxiliary Temperature 1
Auxiliary Temperature 1
Accelerator Pedal 1 Low
Idle Switch
Accelerator Pedal 1 Low
Idle Switch
Accelerator Pedal 1 Low
Idle Switch
Anti-Lock Braking
(ABS) Active
Anti-Lock Braking
(ABS) Active
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Differential Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Differential Pressure Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Least Severe Level
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Auxiliary Temperature Sensor
Input 1 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Auxiliary Temperature Sensor
Input 1 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Auxiliary Temperature Sensor
Input 1 - Special Instructions
Accelerator Pedal or Lever Idle
Validation Switch - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Accelerator Pedal or Lever Idle
Validation Switch Circuit - Out of
Calibration
Accelerator Pedal or Lever Idle
Validation Switch - Received
Network Data In Error
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) Controller
- Abnormal update rate
Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) Active -
Condition Exists
215023
461
Revision B
J1939
SPN
612
J1939
FMI
Telltale
2
Stop
Engine
625
629
630
633
639
639
641
641
641
641
641
641
641
644
647
9
12
12
31
9
13
7
9
11
12
13
15
31
2
3
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Red
Red
Amber
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
Red
None
Red
Amber
None
Cummins
Fault Code
115
291
343
3697
2311
285
286
2387
1894
2198
2634
2449
1976
2635
237
6263
J1939_SPN Description Detail
System Diagnostic Code #2
Proprietary Datalink
Controller #1
Engine Control Module
Calibration Memory
Engine Magnetic Speed/Position
Lost Both of Two Signals - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Proprietary Datalink Error (OEM/
Vehicle Datalink) - Abnormal update rate
Engine Control Module Warning
Internal Hardware Failure - Bad intelligent device or component
Engine Control Module
Calibration Memory - Bad intelligent device or component
Electronic Fuel Injection Control
Valve Circuit - Condition exists
Engine Fuel Actuator 1
Control Command
J1939 Network #1, Primary
Vehicle Network
(previously SAE J1939
Data Link)
J1939 Network #1, Primary
Vehicle Network
(previously SAE J1939
Data Link)
SAE J1939 Multiplexing PGN
Timeout Error - Abnormal update rate
SAE J1939 Multiplexing
Configuration Error - Out of
Calibration
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine Variable Geometry
Turbocharger Actuator #1
Engine External Speed
Command Input
Engine Fan Clutch 1 Output
Device Driver
VGT Actuator Driver Circuit
(Motor) - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
VGT Actuator Driver Circuit -
Abnormal update rate
VGT Actuator Driver Circuit - Root cause not known
VGT Actuator Controller - Bad intelligent device or component
VGT Actuator Controller - Out of
Calibration
VGT Actuator Driver Over
Temperature (Calculated) - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe Level
VGT Actuator Driver Circuit -
Condition exists
External Speed Command Input
(Multiple Unit Synchronization) -
Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Fan Control Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
215023
462
Revision B
J1939
SPN
647
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
Check
Engine
651
652
652
653
653
654
654
677
677
697
697
701
723
723
5
5
7
5
7
5
7
3
4
3
4
14
2
7
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
6264
322
331
1141
324
1142
332
1143
584
585
2557
2558
4734
2322
731
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Engine Fan Clutch 1 Output
Device Driver
Engine Injector
Cylinder #01
Engine Injector
Cylinder #02
Engine Injector
Cylinder #02
Engine Injector
Cylinder #03
Engine Injector
Cylinder #03
Engine Injector
Cylinder #04
Engine Injector
Cylinder #04
Engine Starter Motor Relay
Engine Starter Motor Relay
Auxiliary PWM Driver #1
Auxiliary PWM Driver #1
Auxiliary I/O #01
Engine Speed 2
Engine Speed 2
Fan Control Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
1 Circuit - Current below normal or open circuit
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
2 Circuit - Current below normal or open circuit
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
2 - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
3 Circuit - Current below normal or open circuit
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
3 - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
4 Circuit - Current below normal or open circuit
Injector Solenoid Driver Cylinder
4 - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Starter Relay Driver Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Starter Relay Driver Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Auxiliary PWM Driver 1 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Auxiliary PWM Driver 1 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Auxiliary Input/Output 1 - Special
Instructions
Engine Camshaft Speed / Position
Sensor - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Speed / Position Camshaft and Crankshaft Misalignment -
Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
215023
463
Revision B
J1939
SPN
729
J1939
FMI
Telltale
3
Check
Engine
729
748
862
862
974
974
974
976
1072
1072
1073
1073
1075
1075
4
9
3
4
3
4
19
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
None
None
Amber
None
None
Red
Red
Red
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Cummins
Fault Code
6556
6557
3641
6336
6337
133
134
288
6563
6418
6419
6421
6422
6258
6259
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Engine Intake Air Heater
Driver #1
Engine Intake Air Heater
Driver #1
Transmission Output
Retarder
Crankcase breather Heater
Circuit
Crankcase breather Heater
Circuit
Remote Accelerator Pedal
Position
Remote Accelerator Pedal
Position
Remote Accelerator Pedal
Position
PTO Governor State
Engine (Compression)
Brake Output #1
Engine (Compression)
Brake Output #1
Engine (Compression)
Brake Output #2
Engine (Compression)
Brake Output #2
Engine Electric Lift Pump for Engine Fuel Supply
Engine Electric Lift Pump for Engine Fuel Supply
Engine Intake Air Heater 1 Circuit
- Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Intake Air Heater 1 Circuit
- Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Transmission Output Retarder -
Abnormal update rate
Crankcase Breather Filter Heater
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Crankcase Breather Filter Heater
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Remote Accelerator Pedal or
Lever Position Sensor 1 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Remote Accelerator Pedal or
Lever Position Sensor 1 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
SAE J1939 Multiplexing Remote
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor System - Received network data in error
Auxiliary Intermediate (PTO)
Speed Switch Validation - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Brake Actuator Driver 1
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Brake Actuator Driver 1
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Brake Actuator Driver
Output 2 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Brake Actuator Driver
Output 2 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Electric Lift Pump for Engine Fuel
Supply Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Electric Lift Pump for Engine Fuel
Supply Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
215023
464
Revision B
J1939
SPN
1081
J1939
FMI
9
Telltale
Check
Engine
1172
1172
1176
1176
1176
1194
1209
1209
1209
1231
1235
1323
1324
1325
1326
1347
3
4
2
3
4
13
2
3
4
2
2
31
31
31
31
3
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
3555
691
692
743
741
742
3298
2554
2373
2374
3329
3331
1654
1655
1656
1657
272
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Engine Wait to Start Lamp
Engine Turbocharger 1
Compressor Intake
Temperature
Engine Turbocharger 1
Compressor Intake
Temperature
Engine Turbocharger 1
Compressor Intake
Pressure
Engine Turbocharger 1
Compressor Intake
Pressure
Engine Turbocharger 1
Compressor Intake
Pressure
Anti-theft Encryption Seed
Present Indicator
Engine Exhaust Gas
Pressure 1
Engine Exhaust Gas
Pressure 1
Engine Exhaust Gas
Pressure 1
J1939 Network #2
J1939 Network #3
Engine Misfire Cylinder #1
Engine Misfire Cylinder #2
Engine Misfire Cylinder #3
Engine Misfire Cylinder #4
Engine Fuel Pump
Pressurizing Assembly #2
Engine Wait to Start Lamp -
Abnormal update rate
Turbocharger 1 Compressor
Intake Temperature Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Turbocharger 1 Compressor
Intake Temperature Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Turbocharger 1 Compressor
Intake Pressure - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Turbocharger 1 Compressor
Intake Pressure Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Turbocharger 1 Compressor
Intake Pressure Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Anti-theft Encryption Seed - Out of Calibration
Exhaust Gas Pressure 1 - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Exhaust Gas Pressure Sensor 1
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Exhaust Gas Pressure Sensor 1
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
J1939 Network #2 - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
J1939 Network #3 - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Misfire Cylinder 1 -
Condition exists
Engine Misfire Cylinder 2 -
Condition exists
Engine Misfire Cylinder 3 -
Condition exists
Engine Misfire Cylinder 4 -
Condition exists
Engine Fuel Pump Pressurizing
Assembly 1 Circuit - Voltage
215023
465
Revision B
J1939
SPN
1347
1347
1349
1378
1388
1388
1388
1569
1639
1639
1639
1639
1639
1668
1675
1761
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
7
3
31
3
4
14
31
0
1
2
15
17
2
31
1
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
DEF
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
None
None
None
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
271
281
483
649
297
298
6584
3714
4789
4791
6469
6467
6468
4437
3737
1673
J1939_SPN Description
Engine Fuel Pump
Pressurizing Assembly #1
Engine Fuel Pump
Pressurizing Assembly #3
Engine Injector Metering
Rail 2 Pressure
Engine Oil Change Interval
Auxiliary Pressure #2
Auxiliary Pressure #2
Auxiliary Pressure #2
Engine Protection
Torque Derate
Fan Speed
Fan Speed
Fan Speed
Fan Speed
Fan Speed
J1939 Network #4 - Data erratic
Engine Starter Mode
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Detail above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Fuel Pump Pressurizing
Assembly 1 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Engine Fuel Pump Pressurizing
Assembly 1 - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Injector Metering Rail 2 Pressure
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Oil Change Interval -
Condition exists
Auxiliary Pressure Sensor Input 2
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Auxiliary Pressure Sensor Input 2
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Auxiliary Pressure Sensor Input 2
- Special Instructions
Engine Protection Torque Derate -
Condition exists
Fan Speed - Data Valid but Above
Normal Operational Range - Most
Severe Level
Fan Speed - Data Valid but Below
Normal Operational Range - Most
Severe Level
Fan Speed
–
Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Fan Speed - Data Valid but Above
Normal Operational Range - Most
Severe Level
Fan Speed - Data Valid but Below
Normal Operational Range - Most
Severe Level
J1939 Network #4 - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Engine Starter Mode Overcrank
Protection - Condition exists
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level - Data valid but
215023
466
Revision B
J1939
SPN
1761
1761
1761
1761
1761
1761
1761
1761
2623
2623
2789
2791
J1939
FMI
Telltale
3
4
9
10
11
13
17
18
3
4
15
5
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
DEF
DEF
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
None
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
(Blinking)
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
1669
1668
4677
4769
6562
6526
3497
3498
1239
1241
2346
2349
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank Level
Accelerator Pedal #1
Channel 2
Accelerator Pedal #1
Channel 2
Engine Turbocharger 1
Calculated Turbine Intake
Temperature
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 (EGR1)
Valve Control
Detail below normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level Sensor Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level Sensor Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
SAE J1939 Multiplexing PGN
Timeout Error - Abnormal update rate
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level Sensor -
Abnormal rate of change
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level Sensor - Root cause not known
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level Sensor - Out of
Calibration
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Least Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Level - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 2 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Accelerator Pedal or Lever
Position Sensor 2 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Turbocharger Turbine Intake
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Least Severe
EGR Valve Control Circuit -
Current below normal or open circuit
215023
467
Revision B
J1939
SPN
2791
J1939
FMI
Telltale
6
Check
Engine
2791
2791
2791
3031
3031
3031
3031
3216
3216
3216
3216
3216
3216
3216
7
13
15
2
3
4
9
2
4
9
10
13
16
20
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
None
Cummins
Fault Code
2353
6555
1896
1961
1679
J1939_SPN Description
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 (EGR1)
Valve Control
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 (EGR1)
Valve Control
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 (EGR1)
Valve Control
Engine Exhaust Gas
Recirculation 1 (EGR1)
Valve Control
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
Temperature
1678
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
Temperature
6559
4572
3228
1885
3232
6621
3718
3726
6458
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Detail
EGR Valve Control Circuit -
Current above normal or grounded circuit
EGR Valve Control Circuit -
Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
EGR Valve Controller - Out of
Calibration
EGR Valve Control Circuit Over
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Least Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Temperature - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Temperature Sensor -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Temperature Sensor -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Temperature -
Abnormal Update Rate
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor - Abnormal update rate
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor - Abnormal rate of change
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx -
Out of Calibration
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor - Data not Rational -
Drifted High
215023
468
Revision B
J1939
SPN
3216
J1939
FMI
Telltale
21
Check
Engine
3218
3226
3226
3226
3226
3226
3226
3226
3228
3361
3361
3361
3362
3363
2
2
4
9
10
13
20
21
2
2
3
4
31
3
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
None
Amber
None
None
Amber
None
Amber
None
None
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Cummins
Fault Code
6459
3682
6464
6521
2771
6565
3717
6462
6463
6582
2976
3558
3559
1682
6479
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 Intake
Gas Sensor Power Status
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment Outlet NOx
Sensor Circuits
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1
Intake NOx
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet
Gas Sensor Power Status
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module Input Lines
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor - Data not Rational -
Drifted High
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor Power Supply - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Data not Rational -
Drifted High
Aftertreatment Outlet NOx
Sensor Circuit- Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Abnormal update rate
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Abnormal rate of change
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Out of Calibration
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Data not Rational -
Drifted High
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor - Data not Rational -
Drifted High
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor Power Supply - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Temperature
- Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Input Lines -
Condition exists
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Heater - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
215023
469
Revision B
J1939
SPN
3363
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
Check
Engine
3363
3363
3363
3364
3364
3364
3364
3364
3364
3364
3364
7
16
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
None
None
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
6481
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Heater
6475
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Heater
1713
6476
3866
3878
1686
1685
4741
4742
3876
3868
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Detail
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Heater - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Heater - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Heater - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Heater - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Data valid but below normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality Sensor Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality Sensor Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality Sensor Circuit -
Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality Sensor Circuit -
Current above normal or grounded circuit
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality Sensor - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Abnormal update rate
215023
470
Revision B
J1939
SPN
3364
J1939
FMI
Telltale
10
Check
Engine
3364
3364
3364
3364
3364
3464
3464
3464
3509
3509
3510
3510
3511
11
13
15
18
19
3
4
5
3
4
3
4
3
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
None
Amber
None
None
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
4277
1715
1714
4842
6752
4241
6493
6494
6496
386
352
227
187
239
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Abnormal rate of change
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Root cause not known
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Out of Calibration
Aftertreatment Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Tank
1 Quality
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit
Sensor supply voltage 1
Sensor supply voltage 1
Sensor supply voltage 2
Sensor supply voltage 2
Sensor supply voltage 3
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Least Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderate Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Quality - Received network data in error
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to low source
Electronic Throttle Control
Actuator Driver Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 1 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 1 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Sensor Supply 2 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 2 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Sensor Supply 3 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
215023
471
Revision B
J1939
SPN
3511
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4
Check
Engine
3512
3512
3513
3513
3514
3514
3515
3515
3515
3515
3521
3597
3597
3597
3
4
3
4
3
4
5
6
10
11
11
2
12
17
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
None
Cummins
Fault Code
238
2185
2186
1695
1696
515
516
4743
4744
6619
4745
4768
1117
351
6499
J1939_SPN Description
Sensor supply voltage 3
Sensor supply voltage 4
Sensor supply voltage 4
Sensor supply voltage 5
Sensor supply voltage 5
Sensor supply voltage 6
Sensor supply voltage 6
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Temperature 2
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Property
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage #1
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage #1
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage #1
Detail
Sensor Supply 3 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Sensor Supply 4 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 4 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Sensor Supply 5 - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 5 - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Sensor Supply 6 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 6 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Temperature 2 Sensor
Circuit - Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Temperature 2 Sensor
Circuit - Current above normal or grounded
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Temperature 2 - Abnormal
Rate of Change
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Temperature 2 - Root Cause
Not Known
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Property - Root Cause Not
Known
Power Supply Lost With Ignition
On - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Injector Power Supply - Bad intelligent device or component
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage 1 - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
215023
472
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
3597
3695
3750
4096
4185
4186
4187
4188
4223
4334
4334
4334
4334
18
2
14
31
31
31
31
31
31
2
3
4
16
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
1938
6568
5938
3547
1427
1428
1429
1431
1432
3596
3571
3572
3575
J1939_SPN Description Detail
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage #1
Aftertreatment
Regeneration Inhibit Switch
ECU Power Output Supply
Voltage 1 - Data valid but below normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment Regeneration
Inhibit Switch - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Diesel Particulate Filter 1
Conditions Not Met for
Active Regeneration
NOx limits exceeded due to
Empty Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank
Overspeed Shutdown
Relay Driver
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown
Relay Driver
High Engine Temperature
Shutdown Relay Driver
Pre-Low Oil Pressure
Indicator Relay Driver
Pre-High Engine
Temperature Warning
Relay Driver
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Doser
Absolute Pressure
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Doser
Absolute Pressure
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Doser
Absolute Pressure
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Doser
Absolute Pressure
Diesel Particulate Filter 1
Conditions Not Met for Active
Regeneration
–
Condition exists
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Empty -
Condition exists
Overspeed Shutdown Relay Driver
Diagnostic has detected an error -
Condition exists
Low Oil Pressure (LOP) Shutdown
Relay Driver Diagnostic has detected an error -
Condition exists
High Engine Temperature (HET)
Shutdown Relay Driver Diagnostic has detected an error - Condition exists
Pre-Low Oil Pressure Warning
Relay Driver Diagnostic has detected an error -
Condition exists
Pre-High Engine Temperature
Warning Relay Driver Diagnostic has detected an error - Condition exists
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Pressure Sensor - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data valid but above normal operating range
215023
473
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4334
4337
4340
4340
4340
4342
4342
4342
4344
4344
4344
4360
18
10
3
4
5
3
4
5
3
4
5
0
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Red
Cummins
Fault Code
3574
4249
6531
6532
6482
6533
6534
6483
6535
6536
6484
3229
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Doser
Absolute Pressure
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Dosing
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
1 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
1 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
1 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
2 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
2 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
2 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
3 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
3 State
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line Heater
3 State
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
Detail
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Pressure Sensor - Data valid but below normal operating range
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Dosing Temperature -
Abnormal Rate of Change
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 1 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 1 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 1 Circuit -
Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 2 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 2 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 2 Circuit -
Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 3 Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 3 Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater 3 Circuit -
Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
215023
474
Revision B
J1939
SPN
4360
J1939
FMI
Telltale
2
Check
Engine
4360
4360
4360
4360
4363
4363
4363
4363
4363
4364
4364
3
4
15
16
0
2
3
4
16
17
18
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Red
Red
Amber
None
None
Red
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
3144
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
3142
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
3143
3164
3231
3165
3148
6569
6571
3235
6517
3582
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Intake Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Outlet Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Outlet Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Outlet Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Outlet Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst Outlet Gas
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Conversion Efficiency
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Conversion Efficiency
Detail
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature Sensor - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Least Severe
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Intake
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Outlet
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operational range -
Most Severe
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Outlet
Temperature Sensor - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Outlet
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Outlet
Temperature Sensor Circuit -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Outlet
Temperature - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment SCR Catalyst
Conversion Efficiency - Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
Aftertreatment SCR Catalyst
Conversion Efficiency - Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately Severe Level
215023
475
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4376
4376
4376
4765
4765
4765
4765
4766
4766
4766
4766
4766
3
4
7
2
3
4
16
0
2
3
4
15
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
None
None
Amber
Amber
Red
Red
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
3577
3578
6527
6539
3314
3313
3251
5387
5386
4533
4534
5389
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Return Valve
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Return Valve
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Return Valve
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Intake
Temperature
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Intake
Temperature
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Intake
Temperature
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Intake
Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature Sensor
Circuit
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Return Valve - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Return Valve - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Return Valve - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjust
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Intake Temperature -
Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Intake Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Intake Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Intake Temperature -
Data Valid But Above Normal
Operating range
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Most
Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature -
Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature
Sensor Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature -
Data valid but above normal
215023
476
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
4766
4792
4792
4794
4796
5018
5024
5031
5125
5125
5245
5246
5298
5298
16
7
14
31
31
11
10
10
3
4
31
0
17
18
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Stop
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Red
None
Red
Amber
None
None
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Red
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
5388
3751
4585
3151
6621
2637
3649
6581
3419
3421
4863
3712
2638
1691
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Outlet
Gas Temperature
Aftertreatment SCR
Catalyst System
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst System
Aftertreatment 1 SCR
Catalyst System
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst Missing
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Aftertreatment 1 Intake
Gas NOx Sensor
Heater Ratio
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet
Gas NOx Sensor
Heater Ratio
Sensor supply voltage 7
Sensor supply voltage 7
Detail operating range - Least
Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Outlet Gas Temperature -
Data valid but above normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Aftertreatment SCR Catalyst
System - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst
System - Special Instructions
Aftertreatment 1 SCR Catalyst
System Missing - Condition exists
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Missing - Condition exists
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Face Plugged - Root cause not known
Aftertreatment 1 Intake NOx
Sensor Heater - Abnormal rate of change
Aftertreatment 1 Outlet NOx
Sensor Heater - Abnormal rate of change
Sensor Supply 7 Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Sensor Supply 7 Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Operator Inducement
Active
Aftertreatment SCR
Operator Inducement
Severity
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Tank Low Level Indicator
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Conversion Efficiency
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Conversion Efficiency
Aftertreatment SCR Operator
Inducement - Data valid but above normal operational range -
Most Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Conversion Efficiency -
Data valid but below normal operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Conversion Efficiency -
Data valid but below normal
215023
477
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
5394
5394
5394
5484
5484
5491
5491
5491
5571
5571
5571
5742
2
5
7
3
4
3
4
7
0
7
15
12
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
None
Amber
Amber
None
None
None
None
None
Amber
None
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
3755
3567
3568
6456
6457
6477
6478
6537
3741
3727
5585
4158
J1939_SPN Description Detail
Aftertreatment Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Dosing Valve
Aftertreatment Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Dosing Valve
Aftertreatment Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Dosing Valve
Engine Fan Clutch 2 Output
Device Driver
Engine Fan Clutch 2 Output
Device Driver
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line
Heater Relay
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line
Heater Relay
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Line
Heater Relay
High-Pressure Common
Rail Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve
High-Pressure Common
Rail Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve
High-Pressure Common
Rail Fuel Pressure
Relief Valve
Aftertreatment Diesel
Particulate Filter
Temperature
Sensor Module operating range - Moderately
Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Dosing Valve - Data is erratic, intermittent, or incorrect
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Dosing Valve - Current below normal or open circuit
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Dosing Valve - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Engine Fan Clutch 2 Control
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Engine Fan Clutch 2 Control
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater Relay - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater Relay - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Line Heater Relay -
Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
High-Pressure Common Rail Fuel
Pressure Relief Valve - Data valid but above normal operational range
High-Pressure Common Rail Fuel
Pressure Relief Valve -
Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
High-Pressure Common Rail Fuel
Pressure Relief Valve - Data valid but above normal operating range - Least Severe Level
Aftertreatment Diesel Particulate
Filter Temperature Sensor
Module - Bad intelligent device or component
215023
478
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
5743
5743
5743
5743
5743
5743
5745
5745
5745
5745
5746
5746
3
4
9
11
12
16
3
4
17
18
3
4
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
4164
4165
4152
4261
4159
4166
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Selective
Catalytic Reduction
Temperature
Sensor Module
4168
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Supply Module Heater
4169
6513
4171
6529
4156
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Supply Module Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Supply Module Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid
Supply Module Heater
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module Heater Relay
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module Heater Relay
Detail
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Voltage above Normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Voltage below normal, or Shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Abnormal update rate
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Root cause not known
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Bad intelligent device or component
Aftertreatment Selective Catalytic
Reduction Temperature Sensor
Module - Data valid, but above normal
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater -
Data valid, but below normal operating range
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater -
Data valid, but below normal operating range
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater Relay
- Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater Relay
- Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
215023
479
Revision B
J1939
SPN
J1939
FMI
Telltale
5798
6655
6655
6799
6799
6799
6799
6802
6881
6881
6882
6882
6882
6882
10
3
4
2
3
4
7
31
9
13
3
4
9
11
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
None
None
None
None
None
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
4251
6511
6512
6473
6471
6472
5185
5278
5653
5654
5393
5394
5391
5395
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Exhaust Fluid Supply
Module Heater
Temperature
ECU Power Lamp
ECU Power Lamp
Engine Fan Blade Pitch
Engine Fan Blade Pitch
Engine Fan Blade Pitch
Engine Fan Blade Pitch
SCR Operator Inducement
Override Switch
SCR Operator Inducement
Override Switch
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
Detail
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Supply Module Heater
Temperature - Abnormal rate of change
Maintain ECU Power Lamp -
Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Maintain ECU Power Lamp -
Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Fan Blade Pitch - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Fan Blade Pitch Position Sensor
Circuit - Voltage above normal, or shorted to high source
Fan Blade Pitch Position Sensor
Circuit - Voltage below normal, or shorted to low source
Fan Blade Pitch - Mechanical system not responding or out of adjustment
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Exhaust
Fluid Dosing System Frozen -
Condition exists
SCR Operator Inducement
Override Switch - Abnormal
Update Rate
SCR Operator Inducement
Override Switch - Out of
Calibration
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Voltage above normal or shorted to high source
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Voltage below normal or shorted to low source
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Abnormal Update Rate
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Root cause not known
215023
480
Revision B
J1939
SPN
6882
6882
6918
6928
7848
520968
520968
524286
J1939
FMI
Telltale
12
16
31
31
31
9
19
31
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Check
Engine
Lamp
Amber
Amber
Maintenance
Amber
Amber
Amber
None
Amber
Cummins
Fault Code
5392
5396
5632
6597
6634
5939
5941
5617
J1939_SPN Description
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
Aftertreatment Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst
Temperature
Sensor Module
SCR System Cleaning
Inhibited Due to
Inhibit Switch
SCR System Cleaning
Inhibited Due to System
Timeout
Diesel Particulate Filter 1
Conditions Not Met for
Active Regeneration
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel
Oxidation Catalyst System
Detail
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Bad intelligent device or component
Aftertreatment Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst Temperature Sensor
Module - Data valid but above normal operating range -
Moderately Severe Level
SCR System Cleaning Inhibited
Due to Inhibit Switch -
Condition exists
SCR System Cleaning Inhibited
Due to System Timeout -
Condition exists
Diesel Particulate Filter 1
Conditions Not Met for Active
Regeneration - Condition exists
Machine Constrained Operation -
Abnormal Update Rate. No
Communication or an invalid data transfer rate has been detected on the J1939 data link between the ECM and the machine electronic control unit.
Machine Constrained Operation -
Received network data in error.
The received J1939 datalink message was not valid.
Aftertreatment 1 Diesel Oxidation
Catalyst System - Special
Instruction
215023
481
Revision B
Index
A
A Series headers
definition........................................................... 29
A40DX Auger Headers
run screen 2.................................................. 232
auger speed
adjusting ...................................................... 218
connecting hydraulics ........................................ 148
detaching from windrower ................................. 150
disc speed switch ................................................ 73
float options with fixed deck ............................... 229
knife speed ...................................................... 224
adjusting knife alarm pressure ......................... 226
adjusting knife speed alarm ............................. 227
mechanically connecting to M1 Series .................. 143
operating......................................................... 218
reel speed
adjusting ...................................................... 218
adjusting reel alarm pressure ........................... 223
setting reel speed in auto mode ....................... 218
setting reel speed in manual mode ................... 220
aftertreatment functions
activating......................................................... 122
air conditioning
cleaning evaporator core .................................... 338
compressor
filters
fresh air intake filter....................................... 287
removing filter ........................................... 287
installing cover ................................................. 339
removing cover................................................. 337
testing/troubleshooting
cab air ......................................................... 397
air conditioning box connectors
welding precautions .............................................. 9
air filters, See
annual service...................................................... 110
anti-shimmy dampeners
location ............................................................. 37
antifreeze ........................................................... 339
API
definition........................................................... 29
ASTM
definition........................................................... 29
attaching/detaching headers
A40DX Auger Headers
attaching to windrower................................... 143
connecting hydraulics ..................................... 148
detaching from windrower .............................. 150
D1X or D1XL Series Draper Headers
attaching draper header supports ..................... 154
connecting center-link .................................... 155
connecting hydraulics ..................................... 160
detaching from windrower .............................. 163
hydraulic center-link with optional self-alignment
kit ............................................................. 155
hydraulic center-link without optional self-alignment
kit ............................................................. 155
hydraulic center-link without self-alignment
kit ............................................................. 155
R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers
attaching to windrower................................... 167
connecting hydraulics ..................................... 171
auger alarm pressure
adjusting ......................................................... 223
auger pressure
viewing ........................................................... 231
auger speed
adjusting ......................................................... 218
viewing .....................................................231
automated steering systems ................................... 380
autosteer engagement button .......................... 69, 71
autosteer, See
B
ballast kits........................................................... 384
batteries
auxiliary power posts ......................................... 334
battery cable .................................................... 329
battery cover
closing ......................................................... 327
opening ....................................................... 326
battery safety ....................................................... 8
battery specification .......................................... 326
boosting .......................................................... 329
charging .......................................................... 328
connecting ....................................................... 333
maintaining...................................................... 326
removing ......................................................... 331
troubleshooting ................................................ 391
welding precautions .............................................. 9
beacon lights ......................................................... 55
location ............................................................. 37
switch ............................................................... 52
belts................................................................... 343
INDEX
A/C compressor belt
replacing ...................................................... 344
engine fan drive belt
seat belts........................................................... 49
tensioning A/C compressor belt .....................272, 344
Bluetooth
®
feature ................................................. 64
bolts
definition........................................................... 29
booster spring kit ................................................. 381
break-in inspections
schedule.......................................................... 243
break-in period .................................................... 109
C cab
troubleshooting cab air ...................................... 397
cab connectors
welding precautions .............................................. 9
cab temperature, See
cab-forward
definition........................................................... 29
calibration
caster wheels, See
center-links
definition........................................................... 29
location ............................................................. 37
self-locking center-link hook mechanism ............... 187
CGVW
definition........................................................... 29
charge filters
installing.......................................................... 277
chassis extension module
welding precautions .............................................. 9
chassis relay module
welding precautions .............................................. 9
circuit breakers
accessing circuit breakers ................................... 359
replacing ......................................................... 361
climate controls ................................................ 59, 77
See also
component locations .............................................. 37
compressors
consoles ............................................................... 39
conversion chart .................................................. 409
conveyor speed adjustment buttons .......................... 76
coolant
adding to engine ............................................... 321
checking level in engine ..................................... 285
coolant temperature gauges..................................... 77
cooling system
twin-flow cooling system .................................... 255
cutting height ...................................................... 188
D
D1X or D1XL Series Draper Headers hydraulic center-link with optional self-alignment kit
attaching to M1170........................................ 155
D1X Series
definition........................................................... 29
D1X Series Draper Headers
adjusting reel alarm pressure .............................. 199
attaching to windrower
connecting hydraulics ..................................... 160
draper header supports .................................. 154
detaching from windrower
units with hydraulic center-link ........................ 163
run screen 2.................................................. 215
draper speed
adjusting ...................................................... 200
adjusting draper alarm pressure ....................... 204
draper slip warning ........................................ 206
setting draper speed in auto mode ................... 201
setting draper speed in manual mode ............... 203
header float
float options with deck shift ............................ 212
hydraulic center-link without self-alignment kit
attaching to M1170........................................ 155
knife speed ...................................................... 206
knife speed alarm
adjusting alarm .......................................... 210
adjusting pressure ...................................... 208
setting knife speed...................................207, 225
operating......................................................... 193
reel speed
setting reel speed in manual mode ................... 198
D1XL Series
definition........................................................... 29
D1XL Series Draper Headers
adjusting reel alarm pressure .............................. 199
attaching to windrower
connecting hydraulics ..................................... 160
draper header supports .................................. 154
INDEX
detaching from windrower
units with hydraulic center-link ........................ 163
run screen 2.................................................. 215
draper speed
adjusting ...................................................... 200
adjusting draper alarm pressure ....................... 204
draper slip warning ........................................ 206
setting draper speed in auto mode ................... 201
setting draper speed in manual mode ............... 203
header float
float options with deck shift ............................ 212
hydraulic center-link with optional self-alignment kit
attaching to M1170........................................ 155
hydraulic center-link without self-alignment kit
attaching to M1170........................................ 155
knife speed ...................................................... 206
knife speed alarm
adjusting alarm .......................................... 210
adjusting pressure ...................................... 208
setting knife speed...................................207, 225
operating......................................................... 193
reel speed
setting reel speed in manual mode ................... 198
date
setting on HPT .................................................... 90
decals
fuse box and relay module decals ........................ 363
location of safety signs......................................... 16
deck shift ....................................................... 74, 211
controls ............................................................. 75
deck shift control.................................................. 211
DEF, See
DEF gauges............................................................ 77
definition of terms.................................................. 29
diesel exhaust fluid system..................................... 253
DEF tank
draining the tank .....................................253, 342
filling the tank .........................................112, 254
exhaust system cleaning ..................................... 121
filters
changing vent hose filter ................................. 324
cleaning and inspecting filter ........................ 318
installing filter............................................ 319
removing filter ........................................... 317
differential auger-reel control ................................. 218
disc pressure
viewing .....................................................237
disc pressure alarm
adjusting ......................................................... 234
disc speed
viewing .....................................................237
disc speed switch ................................................... 73
DK
definition........................................................... 29
DM
definition........................................................... 29
DOC
definition........................................................... 29
doors
location ............................................................. 37
double booster spring kit
—
external ....................... 382 double windrow attachment shutoff kit.................... 382
double windrow attachments ............................ 74, 189
conveyor speed adjustment buttons....................... 76
deck position.................................................... 189
draper speed .................................................... 190
raising deck........................................................ 76
double windrowing ............................................... 189
draper headers
operating a D1X or D1XL Series............................ 193
draper pressure
viewing ........................................................... 214
draper speed ......................................................... 74
D1X and D1XL Series Draper Headers
setting in manual mode .................................. 203
setting in auto mode.......................................... 201
viewing .....................................................214
draper speed controls ............................................. 76
drive wheels, See
driving the windrower
adjusting ground speed limit ............................... 124
driving on road ...........................................133, 135
engine-forward operation................................... 127
entering/exiting the windrower ........................... 124
forward in cab-forward mode.............................. 125
reverse in cab-forward mode .............................. 126
stopping .......................................................... 130
DWA, See
E
EC declaration of conformity ...................................... ii
ECM
definition........................................................... 29
eco engine control
INDEX
programming the EEC ........................................ 119
using the EEC ..................................................... 68
ECU
definition........................................................... 29
electrical systems ................................................. 263
auxiliary power posts ......................................... 334
battery battery cover
closing ...................................................... 327
opening .................................................... 326
boosting....................................................... 329
charging ....................................................... 328
connecting.................................................... 333
maintaining .................................................. 326
removing...................................................... 331
extension modules ............................................ 267
fuses and relays ................................................ 363
checking and replacing fuses............................ 361
inspecting/replacing 125A main fuses................ 368
relay modules ............................................... 267
replacing circuit breakers/relays ....................... 361
master controller .............................................. 267
module layout .................................................. 263
preventing damage to electrical systems ............... 268
troubleshooting ................................................ 391
engaging the header ............................................. 185
engine air intake temperatures ............................... 132
engine control module
welding precautions .............................................. 9
engine coolant temperatures.................................. 132
engine cooling system
air conditioning (A/C)......................................... 259
charge air cooler (CAC)....................................... 257
cooling module
cleaning screens and components ..............293, 296
engine coolant
adding coolant .............................................. 321
checking coolant level .................................... 285
checking coolant strength ............................... 339
draining coolant ............................................ 320
hydraulic oil cooler ............................................ 258
pressurized coolant tank cap
inspecting pressurized coolant tank cap ............. 256
engine harness
welding precautions .............................................. 9
engine interlock ................................................... 314
engine load
viewing .............................................. 232, 237
–
engine operation engine aftertreatment switches
manual SCR conditioning/inhibit switches .......... 122
engine speed.................................................... 345
engine temperature........................................... 121
exhaust aftertreatment system
exhaust system cleaning.................................. 121
fueling............................................................. 112
oil pressure ...................................................... 121
shutting down the engine ................................... 120
engine rpm............................................................ 77
engine-forward
definition........................................................... 29
engines
adding coolant.................................................. 321
adding oil...................................................280, 299
air intake system............................................... 259
belts ............................................................... 343
charge air cooling.............................................. 258
checking coolant level ........................................ 285
checking cooling data ........................................ 132
checking interlock ............................................. 314
checking oil level.........................................113, 279
cooling system
twin-flow cooling system................................. 255
eco engine control
programming the EEC ..................................... 119
eco engine control (EEC)
using the EEC .................................................. 68
electronics ......................................................... 13
engine air filter
installing primary air filter ............................... 301
engine compartment ......................................... 247
engine controls ................................................... 67
engine exhaust system
inspecting exhaust system ............................... 306
engine gearbox maintenance
adding lubricant ............................................ 286
changing lubricant ...................................272, 308
checking lubricant level................................... 286
engine operation
eco engine control programming ...................... 119
starting the engine ......................................... 115
troubleshooting ......................................... 118
fault codes ....................................................... 456
faults and telltales ............................................... 86
power ............................................................... 13
removing water from fuel system......................... 281
troubleshooting ................................................ 387
INDEX
engine start .................................................. 118
entering the cab ................................................... 124
evaporator .......................................................... 337
evaporator core
cleaning........................................................... 338
exhaust aftertreatment system
activating......................................................... 122
exhaust system
cleaning........................................................... 121
inspecting ........................................................ 306
exiting the cab ..................................................... 124
external booster spring kit ..................................... 381
F
fan speeds........................................................... 132
fault codes
engine fault codes ............................................. 456
windrower fault codes ....................................... 410
FFFT
definition........................................................... 29
field lights
location ............................................................. 37
switch ............................................................... 52
symbol ............................................................ 106
filters
cleaning and inspecting filter ........................... 318
installing filter ............................................... 319
removing filter .............................................. 317
DEF vent hose filter
changing DEF vent hose filter ........................... 324
engine air filter
installing primary air filter ............................... 301
removing primary air filter............................... 299
engine oil filter
replacing engine oil filter................................. 298
fresh air intake filter .......................................... 287
fuel filters
maintaining fuel filters .................................... 309
primary fuel filter
installing ................................................... 310
removing .................................................. 309
removing/installing fuel tank vent filter ............. 315
secondary fuel filter
HVAC filters fresh air intake filter
removing filter ........................................... 287
return oil filter
installing ...................................................... 276
removing...................................................... 275
final drives .......................................................... 141
finger tight
definition........................................................... 29
firewall extension module
welding precautions .............................................. 9
float, See
float booster springs
spring with external booster spring kit .................. 381
float preset ........................................................... 74
float springs
location ............................................................. 37
fluids, fuel, and lubricants ...................................... 239
fuel gauges............................................................ 77
fuel systems
fluids, fuel, and lubricants................................... 239
fuel filters
maintaining fuel filters .................................... 309
primary fuel filter
installing ................................................... 310
removing .................................................. 309
secondary fuel filter
fuel specifications ............................................. 239
fuel tank
draining the fuel tank ..................................... 341
filling the fuel tank ......................................... 112
removing/installing fuel tank vent filter ............. 315
priming ........................................................... 311
function buttons .................................................. 104
fuse panel ........................................................... 363
fuses
accessing fuses ................................................. 359
checking and replacing ....................................... 361
inspecting/replacing 125A main fuses ................... 368
G gearboxes engine
changing lubricant ...................................272, 308
glossary ................................................................ 29
GPS automated steering systems............................. 380
ground speed control
troubleshooting ................................................ 396
ground speed lever
function group switches ....................................... 71
INDEX
header position 6-way switch ................................ 72
header raise and lower rates............................... 191
home, back, and select buttons ............................. 80
location ............................................................. 39
reel position four-way switch ................................ 72
scroll knob, scroll wheel, and select button.............. 80
ground speed levers................................................ 69
ground speed limit................................................ 124
ground speeds ....................................................... 77
GSL, See
GVW
definition........................................................... 29
H handholds
location ............................................................. 37
hard joint
definition........................................................... 29
harvest performance tracker fault codes
engine fault codes.......................................... 456
windrower fault codes .................................... 410
faults and telltales ............................................... 86
function buttons
F1 to F4........................................................ 104
HPT display ................................................... 67, 77
home, back, select buttons ................................ 80
main menu ..................................................... 82
menu icons ..................................................... 83
navigating the display ....................................... 79
QuickMenu ..................................................... 81
screen layout .................................................. 77
scroll knob, scroll wheel, select button ................ 80
setting display brightness and volume ................. 88
setting display language and units ...................... 91
setting display time and date ............................. 90
setting up the display ....................................... 88
soft keys ........................................................ 81
machine information
accessing header information .......................... 100
accessing performance information .................. 102
accessing software information ........................ 101
accessing windrower information ....................... 99
run screen 1
auger headers ............................................... 231
draper headers.............................................. 214
rotary disc headers ........................................ 237
run screen 2
auger headers ............................................... 232
draper headers.............................................. 215
rotary disc headers ........................................ 238
run screen 3 ..................................................... 131
run screen 4 ..................................................... 132
settings
calibrating windrower and header ...................... 93
control locks ................................................... 98
resetting to factory defaults............................... 91
windrower tire size .......................................... 97
symbols
definitions .................................................... 107
viewing machine information ................................ 99
harvest performance tracker display
checking header settings .................................... 179
location ............................................................. 39
hazard lights ................................................ 54, 56, 69
location ............................................................. 37
HDS
definition........................................................... 29
header angles ...................................................... 186
header controls...................................................... 70
console header buttons........................................ 74
deck shift/float presets ..................................... 75
draper speed .................................................. 76
DWA.............................................................. 76
GSL buttons ....................................................... 71
header position 6-way switch............................. 72
reel position four-way switch ............................. 72
header drive ........................................................ 184
header engage switch ............................................. 70
float operating guidelines ................................... 182
float options with fixed deck (R1 Series) ................ 235
preset controls ................................................... 75
removing and restoring float ............................... 184
setting float ..................................................... 182
header hours ....................................................... 100
header information................................................. 77
header lift legs
location ............................................................. 37
header operation center-link
checking self-locking center-link hook................ 187
cutting height ................................................... 188
header angles
adjusting header angle.................................... 186
header drive..................................................... 184
header float
float operating guidelines................................ 182
INDEX
knife/disc drive hydraulics .................................. 262
operating a header ............................................ 180
operating with a header
A40DX Auger Header...................................... 218
D1X Series Draper Header ............................... 193
D1XL Series Draper Header.............................. 193
header float .................................................. 181
R116 Rotary Disc Header................................. 233
reel and draper hydraulics .................................. 262
reversing the header.......................................... 185
header positions ............................................... 71, 77
headers
accessing information on the HPT ........................ 100
adjusting raise and lower rates ............................ 191
D1X Series attaching header
self-aligning hydraulic center-link .................. 155
attaching to windrower
connecting hydraulics.................................. 160
draper header supports ............................... 154
detaching from windrower
units with hydraulic center-link ..................... 163
D1X Series Draper Headers attaching header
non-self-aligning hydraulic center-link ............ 155
D1XL Series attaching header
attaching to windrower
connecting hydraulics.................................. 160
draper header supports ............................... 154
detaching from windrower
units with hydraulic center-link ..................... 163
definition........................................................... 29
R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers
disc run screens............................................. 237
towing with windrower ...................................... 138
headlights ........................................................ 53
aligning ........................................................... 345
heater shut-off valves.............................................. 59
hex keys
definition........................................................... 29
high beams
switch ............................................................... 52
symbol ............................................................ 106
hoods
closing ............................................................ 248
location ............................................................. 37
opening to lowest position.................................. 247
horns ................................................................... 66
horn button location............................................ 69
location ............................................................. 37
hp
definition........................................................... 29
HPT, See
HVAC system
A/C compressor
coolant cycling .............................................. 111
A/C condenser .................................................. 259
A/C cover
installing cover .............................................. 339
removing cover ............................................. 337
A/C evaporator ................................................. 337
cleaning evaporator core................................. 338
air distribution.................................................... 59
fresh air intake filter .......................................... 287
removing filter .............................................. 287
heater shut-off valve............................................ 59
return air cleaner/filter ...................................... 292
testing/troubleshooting
cab air ......................................................... 397
hydraulic oil temperatures ..................................... 132
hydraulics filters
part numbers ................................................ 241
removing charge filter .................................... 277
return oil filter
installing ................................................... 276
removing .................................................. 275
fittings
O-ring boss (ORB) adjustable ........................... 404
O-ring boss (ORB) non-adjustable ..................... 406
O-ring face seal (ORFS) ................................... 407
tapered pipe thread fittings ............................. 408
hydraulic hoses and lines.................................... 285
hydraulic oil
checking and adding hydraulic oil ..................... 281
draining hydraulic oil ...................................... 322
filling hydraulic oil.......................................... 323
hydraulic safety .................................................... 6
traction drive hydraulics ..................................... 262
troubleshooting ................................................ 392
warnings.......................................................... 261
hydraulics
– connecting
A40DX............................................................. 148
D1X Series ....................................................... 160
D1XL Series ...................................................... 160
R1 SP Series ..................................................... 171
I
ignition switch ....................................................... 67
location ............................................................. 39
inhibit status.......................................................... 77
ISC
definition........................................................... 29
J
JIC
definition........................................................... 29
K knife
definition........................................................... 29
knife pressure
viewing .............................................. 214, 231
–
knife speed
A40DX Auger Headers
adjusting knife alarm pressure ......................... 226
adjusting knife speed alarm ............................. 227
knife speed chart ........................................... 224
D1X Series Draper Headers
knife alarm pressure....................................... 208
knife speed alarm .......................................... 210
setting knife speed...................................207, 225
D1XL Series Draper Headers
knife alarm pressure....................................... 208
knife speed alarm .......................................... 210
setting knife speed...................................207, 225
knife speed chart .............................................. 206
viewing .............................................. 214, 231
–
L language
setting on HPT .................................................... 91
lighting ................................................................. 52
beacons............................................................. 55
replacing lights .............................................. 356
cab-forward mode
field............................................................... 52
road lights ...................................................... 53
engine-forward mode
road lights ...................................................... 54
field lights
cab-forward mode ........................................... 52
flood lights
adjusting front work lights (field) ...................... 348
headlights
aligning headlights (cab-forward)...................... 347
aligning headlights (engine-forward) ................. 345
INDEX
replacing headlight bulb (engine-forward) .......... 352
interior lights
dome bulb .................................................... 356
dome light assembly ...................................... 357
LED lights
optional lighting upgrade ................................ 380
replacing LED lights (deluxe cab)....................... 353
rear roof work lights
adjusting rear roof work lights ......................... 349
rear swath lights
adjusting rear swath lights............................... 350
red and amber lights
replacing bulbs .............................................. 354
troubleshooting ................................................ 391
turn signal / hazard lights ..................................... 56
turn signal indicators ......................................... 359
work lights
replacing halogen bulbs .................................. 351
locks
lock and unlock swath compressor ....................... 217
lubricants
adding to engine gearbox ................................... 286
changing in engine gearbox...........................272, 308
checking engine gearbox level ............................. 286
lubricating the windrower
recommended fuel, fluids, and lubricants .............. 239
lubrication........................................................... 289
grease points and intervals ................................. 291
greasing procedure............................................ 290
lubricants/fluids/system capacities ....................... 240
lubricating wheel drive
adding lubricant - 12 bolt (optional) .................. 306
adding lubricant
–
10 Bolt ............................... 305
changing wheel drive lubricant......................... 273
changing wheel drive lubricant 12 Bolt
(optional).................................................... 274
checking lubricant levels ................................. 304
checking lubricant levels
–
storing lubricants and fluids ................................ 239
M maintenance and servicing
A/C compressor belt
replacing ...................................................... 344
tensioning ....................................... 272, 343
break-in inspection schedule ............................... 243
break-in inspections
procedures ................................................... 269
break-in period ................................................. 109
checking safety systems ..................................... 312
engine interlock............................................. 314
operator presence system ............................... 312
INDEX
electrical system ............................................... 263
batteries ...................................................... 326
module layout ............................................... 263
electronic maintenance tool................................ 246
engine
air intake system ........................................... 259
charge air cooling .......................................... 258
engine belt ................................................... 343
engine oil
checking .............................................113, 279
gearbox........................................................ 286
general engine inspection ............................... 325
engine air filters................................................ 299
engine coolant.................................................. 320
engine exhaust system
inspecting..................................................... 306
engine oil......................................................... 298
filter part numbers ............................................ 241
fuel system
fuel filters..................................................... 309
fuel, fluids, and lubricants................................... 239
greasing the windrower...................................... 289
hydraulic oil
checking and adding hydraulic oil ..................... 281
draining hydraulic oil ...................................... 322
filling hydraulic oil.......................................... 323
lighting............................................................ 345
adjusting field/work/flood lights (front) ............. 348
adjusting rear swath lights............................... 350
adjusting roof work lights (rear) ....................... 349
aligning headlights (cab-forward)...................... 347
aligning headlights (engine-forward) ................. 345
replacing dome light assembly ......................... 357
replacing halogen bulbs .................................. 351
replacing headlight bulb (engine forward) .......... 352
replacing LED lights (deluxe cab)....................... 353
replacing red and amber bulbs ......................... 354
replacing red tail lights ................................... 355
maintenance schedule ....................................... 243
maintenance schedule/record ............................. 244
platform operation, See
preseason checks/annual service ......................... 110
safety.................................................................. 5
service intervals
10 hours or daily............................................ 279
100 hours ..................................................... 292
1000 hours ................................................... 315
2000 hours ................................................... 320
250 hours or annually ..................................... 298
50 hours....................................................... 287
500 hours or annually ..................................... 309
annual service ............................................... 326
as required ................................................... 341
steering link pivots ............................................ 335
system overviews .............................................. 253
air intake system ........................................... 259
diesel exhaust fluid system .............................. 253
electrical system ............................................ 263
engine cooling system
twin-flow cooling system ............................. 255
hydraulic system............................................ 261
wheels and tires
caster wheels ................................................ 373
drive wheels ................................................. 369
maintenance indicator............................................. 77
maintenance platforms
location ............................................................. 37
manuals engine owner
’
s manual ...................................... 325
manual storage location ....................................... 61
MDS
definition........................................................... 29
menu icons
HPT .................................................................. 83
metric bolts
torque specifications ......................................... 401
mirrors
location ............................................................. 37
N
N-DETENT
definition........................................................... 29
n/a
definition........................................................... 29
NPT
definition........................................................... 29
nut
definition........................................................... 29
O
oil pressure ......................................................... 121
oils (engine)
adding.......................................................280, 299
checking level .............................................113, 279
One-Touch-Return ................................................ 190
operating symbols ................................................ 106
operating the windrower
accessing header information.............................. 100
accessing performance information...................... 102
accessing software information ........................... 101
accessing windrower information........................... 99
adjusting header raise and lower rates.................. 191
break-in period ................................................. 109
INDEX
daily checks...................................................... 111
data run screen 3
–
performance data...................... 131
run screen 4
–
cooling data.............................. 132
draper speed ................................................ 190
driving the windrower
forward in cab-forward mode .......................... 125
forward in engine-forward mode ...................... 127
reverse in cab-forward mode ........................... 126
stopping....................................................... 130
engine starting ................................................. 115
filling the fuel tank ............................................ 112
One-Touch-Return............................................. 190
operating a header ............................................ 180
operating with a header
A40DX Auger Header...................................... 218
D1X Series Draper Header ............................... 193
D1XL Series Draper Header.............................. 193
header safety props ....................................... 180
R116 Rotary Disc Header................................. 233
operational safety ............................................. 109
overview ........................................................... 99
preseason checks/annual service ......................... 110
distributing A/C compressor coolant ................. 111
shutting down the engine ................................... 120
operations........................................................... 109
See also
See also
header float ..................................................... 181
owner/operator responsibilities........................... 105
symbols ........................................................... 106
operator presence system........................................ 41
checking .......................................................... 312
operator
’
fore-aft isolator control ........................................ 44
fore-aft position.................................................. 43
lumbar support................................................... 45
seat tilt.............................................................. 44
suspension and seat height ................................... 43
vertical dampener ............................................... 45
operator
’
s station................................................... 39
AM/FM/CD/USB Bluetooth
®
-equipped radio............ 63
checking engine interlock ................................... 314
climate control system
fan and temperature controls ............................ 59
console ............................................................. 39
engine controls ................................................... 67
eco engine control (EEC) ................................... 68
header controls, See
horn ................................................................. 66
lighting.............................................................. 52
cab-forward
–
field........................................... 52
cab-forward
–
road .......................................... 53
engine-forward
–
road ...................................... 54
tail / beacon lights ........................................... 55
turn signal / hazard lights .................................. 56
location ............................................................. 37
operator amenities
operator
’
operator console............................................... 123
operator presence system ............................. 41, 312
rear view mirrors ................................................ 58
safety systems .................................................. 312
seat belts.................................................... 49, 341
steering column and wheel ................................... 51
training seat ....................................................... 48
windrower controls ............................................. 69
windshield wipers ............................................... 57
options and attachments ....................................... 379
ballast packages for draper headers ..................... 384
booster spring kit (external) ................................ 381
center-link lifter ................................................ 382
double booster spring kit
–
external ..................... 382 double windrow attachment (DWA) ..................... 382
DWA shutoff kit............................................. 382
high debris cooler intake (hood scoops) ................ 379
single-sided mud caster wheel............................. 385
swath compressor ............................................. 383
transport
windrower lighting upgrade (LED) ........................ 380
ORB
definition........................................................... 29
ORFS
definition........................................................... 29
owner/operator responsibilities .............................. 105
P
park ..................................................................... 69
INDEX
performance data................................................. 131
platforms ............................................................ 249
adjusting platform ............................................. 250
precleaners
location ............................................................. 37
predelivery checks
tire pressure..................................................... 282
preseason checks ................................................. 110
pressurized coolant tank
inspecting pressurized coolant tank cap ................ 256
priming
fuel system ...................................................... 311
product overview ................................................... 29
Q
QuickMenu system ................................................. 81
R
R Series headers
definition........................................................... 29
R1 Series Rotary Disc Headers
attaching header............................................... 167
connecting hydraulics ........................................ 171
run screen 2.................................................. 238
disc speed........................................................ 233
disc pressure alarm ........................................ 234
setting disc speed .......................................... 233
disc speed switch ................................................ 73
header float
float options with fixed deck............................ 235
operating......................................................... 233
radios activating Bluetooth
®
........................................... 64
AM/FM/CD/USB Bluetooth
®
-equipped radio............ 63
pairing a Bluetooth
®
device .................................. 65
rear view mirrors.................................................... 58
reel
D1X and D1XL Series headers
adjusting reel alarm pressure ........................... 199
troubleshooting ................................................ 392
reel alarm pressure
A40DX Auger Headers ........................................ 223
D1X and D1XL Series headers .............................. 199
reel fore-aft position
viewing ........................................................... 215
reel height
viewing ........................................................... 215
reel position
four-way switch .................................................. 72
reel pressure
viewing .....................................................214, 231
reel speed
A40DX Auger Headers
setting in manual mode .................................. 220
D1X and D1XL Series Draper Headers
setting in manual mode .................................. 198
viewing ....................................... 214
Reel Speed Control kit ........................................... 218
references
torque specifications ......................................... 401
relay module ....................................................... 363
relays
replacing ......................................................... 361
return oil filter
installing.......................................................... 276
removing ......................................................... 275
reverse ................................................................. 70
symbol ............................................................ 106
reversing
in cab-forward mode ......................................... 126
in engine-forward mode ..................................... 129
reversing the header ............................................. 185
road lights ............................................................. 53
aligning headlights ............................................ 345
location ............................................................. 37
switch ............................................................... 52
symbol ............................................................ 106
RoHS
definition........................................................... 29
roof connectors
welding precautions .............................................. 9
rpm
definition........................................................... 29
S
SAE
definition........................................................... 29
safety ..................................................................... 1
battery safety ....................................................... 8
checking engine interlock ................................... 314
checking operator presence system...................... 312
general safety....................................................... 3
hydraulic safety .................................................... 6
maintenance safety ............................................... 5
operational safety ............................................. 109
INDEX
safety alert symbols............................................... 1
interpreting decals ........................................... 18
sign location....................................................... 16
signal words ......................................................... 2
tire safety ............................................................ 7
welding precautions .............................................. 9
safety systems ..................................................... 312
screen layouts
HPT .................................................................. 77
screws
definition........................................................... 29
scroll wheel ........................................................... 71
SDD
definition........................................................... 29
seat belts .............................................................. 49
maintaining seat belts ........................................ 341
serial numbers
shutting down the engine ...................................... 120
SKD
definition........................................................... 29
Slow Speed Transport option.................................. 138
soft joints
definition........................................................... 29
soft keys ............................................................... 81
software ............................................................. 101
specifications ......................................................... 32
battery specification .......................................... 326
filter part numbers ............................................ 241
fuel................................................................. 239
torque specifications ......................................... 401
windrower dimensions ......................................... 36
spin turning ......................................................... 129
spm
definition........................................................... 29
starting the engine ............................................... 115
steering adjustments
automated steering systems (option).................... 380
checking steering link pivots................................ 335
troubleshooting ................................................ 396
stopping ............................................................. 130
storing windrowers ............................................... 142
supply module
cleaning and inspecting filter............................... 318
installing filter .................................................. 319
removing filter.................................................. 317
swath compressors ................................................. 74
description....................................................... 215
lock and unlock................................................. 217
operating......................................................... 215
raising ............................................................... 76
switches
auxiliary lift ........................................................ 76
disc speed..................................................... 71, 73
ground speed lever.............................................. 71
header engage.................................................... 70
header position .................................................. 72
lighting.............................................................. 52
reel position four-way switch ................................ 72
symbols
definitions ....................................................... 106
HPT ................................................................ 107
HPT menu icons .................................................. 83
windrower operating symbols ............................. 106
T
taillights........................................................... 53
–
location ............................................................. 37
telltales ................................................................ 77
temperatures
cab ................................................................... 59
engine............................................................. 121
hydraulic oil ...............................................132, 238
seat .................................................................. 47
tension
definition........................................................... 29
TFFT
definition........................................................... 29
throttle............................................................ 67, 70
location ............................................................. 39
time
setting on HPT .................................................... 90
tires, See
torque
definition........................................................... 29
torque angles
definition........................................................... 29
bolting into cast aluminum .............................. 403
O-ring boss (ORB) hydraulic fittings
–
O-ring boss (ORB) hydraulic fittings
– non-
adjustable ...................................................... 406
O-ring face seal (ORFS) fittings............................. 407
INDEX
tapered pipe thread fittings ................................ 408
torque-tension
definition........................................................... 29
towing harness .................................................... 385
towing headers .................................................... 138
preparing......................................................... 139
weight box....................................................... 385
towing windrower ................................................ 140
engaging and disengaging final drives ................... 141
traction drive
troubleshooting ................................................ 394
training seats ......................................................... 48
Trimble
®
automated steering systems ...................... 380
troubleshooting
batteries.......................................................... 391
cab air............................................................. 397
electrical.......................................................... 391
engine............................................................. 387
engine start...................................................... 118
header drive..................................................... 393
hydraulics ........................................................ 392
lighting............................................................ 391
operator
’
s station ............................................. 400
reel................................................................. 392
steering and ground speed control ....................... 396
traction drive ................................................... 394
turn signals ...................................................... 391
wheels ............................................................ 394
turn signals ............................................ 53
indicators ........................................................ 359
location ............................................................. 37
status................................................................ 77
symbol ............................................................ 106
troubleshooting ................................................ 391
turning the windrower .......................................... 129
twin-flow cooling system ....................................... 255
U
UCA
definition........................................................... 29
ULSD
definition........................................................... 29
units of measurement
setting on HPT .................................................... 91
W walking beams
adjusting caster tread width................................ 373
location ............................................................. 37
tightening bolts................................................. 271
washers
definition........................................................... 29
water
removing from fuel system ................................. 281
WCM
definition........................................................... 29
weight boxes ................................... 133, 135, 138, 385
welding precautions.................................................. 9
wheel motor connectors
welding precautions .............................................. 9
wheels and tires
caster wheel nut torque .................................. 270
installing forked caster wheel........................... 375
location.......................................................... 37
removing forked caster wheel .......................... 376
tightening anti-shimmy dampener .................... 271
checking tire pressure ........................................ 282
drive wheels
installing drive wheels .................................... 371
location.......................................................... 37
lowering drive wheels..................................... 372
raising drive wheel ......................................... 369
removing drive wheel ..................................... 370
tightening drive wheel nuts ............................. 269
safety.................................................................. 7
setting tire size in HPT.......................................... 97
tires
checking pressure .......................................... 282
troubleshooting ................................................ 394
wheel drive adding lubricant
–
10 Bolt ............................... 305
adding lubricant
–
12 bolt (optional) ................. 306
changing lubricant ......................................... 273
changing lubricant 12 Bolt (optional) ................. 274
checking lubricant levels ................................. 304
checking lubricant levels
–
windrower faults
fault codes ....................................................... 410
faults and telltales ............................................... 86
windrowers
definition........................................................... 29
windshield wipers................................................... 57
location ............................................................. 37
symbol ............................................................ 106
work lights ....................................................... 53
–
Lubricants, Fluids, and System Capacities
Table .11 System Capacities
Lubricant/Fluid
Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF)
Grease
Diesel fuel
Hydraulic oil
Gear lubricant
Gear lubricant
Gear lubricant
Antifreeze
Engine oil
Air conditioning refrigerant
Air conditioning refrigerant oil
Windshield washer fluid
Location
Diesel exhaust fluid tank
Description
Must meet ISO 22241 requirements.
As required unless otherwise specified
Fuel tank
SAE multi-purpose high temperature extreme pressure (EP2) performance with 1% max molybdenum disulphide (NLGI Grade 2) lithium base
Ultra low sulphur diesel (ULSD) Grade No. 2, or
ULSD Grade No. 1 and 2 mix
25
; refer to
for more information
Single grade transmission/hydraulic fluid (THF)
Hydraulic reservoir
Gearbox
Recommend Viscosity:
•
60.1 cSt @ 40°C
•
9.5 cSt @ 100°C
Recommended brands:
•
AGCO Power Fluid 821XL
•
Case HY-TRAN ULTRACTION
•
John Deere Hy-Gard J20C
•
Petro-Canada Duratran
SAE 75W-140 or 80W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant (SAE J2360 preferred)
Standard Wheel drive
High Torque Wheel drive
SAE 75W-140 or 80W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant (SAE J2360 preferred)
SAE 85W-140, API service class GL-5 fully synthetic gear lubricant
Engine cooling system
ASTM D-6210 and Fleetguard ES Compleat
®
Engine oil pan
SAE 15W-40 compliant with SAE specs for API
Class SJ and CJ-4 engine oil
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning system total capacity
Windshield washer fluid tank
R134A
PAG SP-15
SAE J942 compliant
Capacity
28 liters (7.5 U.S.
gallons)
As required unless otherwise specified
518 liters (137 U.S.
gallons)
60 liters (15.8 U.S.
gallons) 26
2.3 liters (2.4 U.S.
quarts)
1.4 liters (1.5 U.S.
quarts)
4.5 liters (4.8 U.S.
quarts)
31 liters (8.2 U.S.
gallons)
11 liters (11.6 U.S.
quarts)
2.38 kg (5.25 lb.)
240 cc (8.1 fl. oz.)
4 liters (1 U.S. gallon)
25. Optional when operating temperature is below 0°C (32°F).
26. Denotes capacity of a dry system. Refill capacity is 58 liters (15 U.S. gallons).
MacDon Industries Ltd.
680 Moray Street
Winnipeg, Manitoba
Canada R3J 3S3 t. (204) 885-5590 f. (204) 832-7749
MacDon, Inc.
10708 N. Pomona Avenue
Kansas City, Missouri
United States 64153-1924 t. (816) 891-7313 f. (816) 891-7323
MacDon Australia Pty. Ltd.
A.C.N. 079 393 721
P.O. Box 103 Somerton, Victoria, Australia
Australia 3061 t.+61 3 8301 1911 f.+61 3 8301 1912
MacDon Brasil Agribusiness Ltda.
Rua Grã Nicco, 113, sala 404, B. 04
Mossunguê, Curitiba, Paraná
CEP 81200-200 Brasil t. +55 (41) 2101-1713 f. +55 (41) 2101-1699
LLC MacDon Russia Ltd.
123317 Moscow, Russia
10 Presnenskaya nab, Block C
Floor 5, Office No. 534, Regus Business Centre t. +7 495 775 6971 f. +7 495 967 7600
MacDon Europe GmbH
Hagenauer Strasse 59
65203 Wiesbaden
Germany
CUSTOMERS
MacDon.com
DEALERS
Portal.MacDon.com
Trademarks of products are the marks of their respective manufacturers and/or distributors.
Printed in Canada
